Truyen2U.Net quay lại rồi đây! Các bạn truy cập Truyen2U.Com. Mong các bạn tiếp tục ủng hộ truy cập tên miền mới này nhé! Mãi yêu... ♥

Idea Group

In today's digital 21st century, almost all businesses face intense competition

from competitors all around the globe. The rapid change of the global environ-

ment forces enterprises to seek suitable business strategies to sustain them in

the competitive marketplace. This leads enterprises to change their existing

ways of conducting and operating businesses, and transform themselves in a

way that will enable them to cope with the global challenges, compete globally

and eventually grow. The winners in this phenomenon are the companies that

implement their business operations in the most creative and innovative manner

possible. Needless to say, this is done through the incorporation of information

technology (IT) into the business strategies and goals.

In the past few years, IT has been recognized as an imperative factor that

drives companies toward global operations (Palvia, Palvia, & Whitworth, 2002).

Moreover former U.S. President Bill Clinton (2002) also stated in his address

at the University of California, Berkeley: "A world characterized not just by a

global economy, but by a global information society. When I took the oath of

office as president on January the 20th, 1993, there were only 50 sites on the

World Wide Web in '93. When I left office, there were over 350 million and

rising. Today they're probably somewhere around 500 million. There's never

been anything like it." It has evidently indicated that the globalization process

will not thrive without judicious exploitation of information technology. Conse-

quently the key words that emerge in performing innovative business opera-

tions are "globalization" and "information technology."

Globalization is not merely conducting businesses outside of home regions or

countries. It involves the coordination of business structure, functions, activi-

ties, units, and employees together with the incorporation of appropriate global

strategies. In order to implement the global strategy, efficient operation and

management of global information systems seem to be the imperative success

factor.

The fact that businesses are speculating on the significance of globalization is

not so much of an issue. However the global challenge has presented enter-

prises with new types of economic opportunities and threats. Accommodating

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !these opportunities and threats by means of operating the global information

systems dynamically to provide senior executives making decisions accurate

and prompt information is crucial for successful global business operations and

is at the heart of this book.

This book addresses the importance of information technology management

and issues in operating information systems in the global dynamic business en-

vironment. It embraces discussions of the global information technology theory,

frameworks and IT architecture, discovery of global knowledge management,

improvement of the global information systems development methodologies, and

applications of the latest technologies, such as mobile technology and web ser-

vices, in the global information systems development and operations.

The book is considered a collection of new ideas, the latest technology applica-

tions and experiences in the global information systems development and op-

erations. It will significantly contribute to the academic, research, and corpo-

rate business communities.

By surveying the literature in related fields, most discussions have been fo-

cused on the management issues in developing and implementing global infor-

mation systems. Nevertheless, there is a lack of apparent attention for applying

the latest information technologies to enhance the performance of global infor-

mation systems.

The book will document the technical and managerial aspects of global infor-

mation systems and provide insights into how the latest information technolo-

gies such as intelligent agents, dynamic decision support systems, and mobile

technology could be initiated and embedded to the global information systems.

The book will also address the architecture of an integrated supply chain in

global business operations; what process improvement is required to implement

global information systems; and how organizations handle knowledge gener-

ated from various information sources globally. The book is intended to convey

a high-level understanding of managing and applying the latest information tech-

nology for global information systems operation. In this book we are particu-

larly interested in exchanging concepts, new ideas, research results, experi-

ence, and other related issues that could contribute to the academic arena and

also benefit the corporate business community.

Organization of the Book

The systematic presentation of chapters gives readers an organized structure

of the material. It embodies research and experience reports from global re-

searchers. Although the book is not formally divided into parts, each group of

vi

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !related chapters has a different focus on global information systems develop-

ment and operations. The book is organized into 13 chapters.

Chapter I defines the evolution and key indicators of the information society,

which is being triggered by the Information Wave in the last 25 years. Several

aspects of the information society will be reviewed and their developmental

path will be defined. The fast development of the "global economy" is based on

the information communication technology (ICT) supported by the information

society. Depending on the different levels of national ICT development, differ-

ent levels of complexity and influence are implied on the global economy. Hence

it is imperative to recognize various development phases, solutions, and internal

and external consequences of the information society. The key question ap-

pears to be whether the information society is a new tool of thought or a new

way of life.

Chapter II highlights the problem of inefficiency of classical business systems

in an era of dynamic changes of global business environment. By analyzing

business models on the conceptual level, it is proven that business structures in

classical business systems significantly influence the shaping and performing of

business processes. The author concludes that a single business system re-

engineering project is not the definitive answer. In the global business environ-

ment, changes are constant. The efficiency of business processes can be main-

tained and increased in the long term only by constant but effortless adaptation

of structures. This is possible by the introduction of the organizational structure

without hierarchy and the mechanism for dynamic adaptation of structures to

business processes. The model of "process organization" is described in the

chapter.

Chapter III discusses the risks related to the organizational transformation pro-

cess to globalization. This chapter aims at providing organizations that are con-

sidering the move to globalization with clear understanding of the entire trans-

formation process and all the prerequisites for a successful transition. A full

explanation of what is involved in the globalization process is at the start of the

chapter, followed by a comprehensive investigation of the key success factors

that may impact the process. Additionally the chapter discusses some of the

common problems that might face management and workers during the global-

ization process. It is intended to provide detailed global transformation informa-

tion to both managers and researchers for their use as the globalization guide-

lines.

Chapter IV presents how a medium-sized manufacturing organization trans-

formed itself from a manual to an IT-based document transacting business pro-

cess. This lesson in documents transaction helped the organization score large

gains in productivity, in cost cutting, and in evolving a sound performance mea-

surement system. However globalization also opened up opportunities and threats.

The old system had sufficient IT backing but it failed in motivating employees

vii

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !in adopting a global information challenge. In order to compete internationally

through differentiated products with high quality, this firm then reengineered its

manufacturing. Information from the market substituted quality as driver of

information transactions. The goal of the project was to web-enable the firm.

The IT project had to define business transactions as the unit, which would

define transactions in information in object language first and subsequently as

transactions in documents. Browser-enabled communication proved accept-

able to employees who had previous learning in information transactions.

Chapter V investigates one of the major hindrances to the utilization of rapid

evolution of information communication technology through global alliances,

cross-cultural issues. While technology renders the geographical boundaries

redundant, it aggrandizes the chasms in socio-cultural value systems of physi-

cally disparate alliance partners. This chapter first discusses the gamut of glo-

bal e-business alliances: the primary reasons for their need, their socio-cultural

perspective, and the various factors that influence such alliances. Secondly the

corresponding mitigating approaches to those negatively influencing factors are

suggested.

Chapter VI discusses concepts and characteristics of decision support methods

and demonstrates the gap between the decision maker and the decision support

systems techniques. It examines the experience of the government of Egypt in

building its information infrastructure to help develop the decision-making pro-

cess both at the government level as well as at the local public administration

level.

Chapter VII proposes a framework for making decisions dynamically in a glo-

bal organization. This framework enables data to be retrieved and analyzed

dynamically with the aid of technology. The chapter starts with the discussion

of various types of global organizations and departments within a global organi-

zation. It is followed by the investigation and identification of organizational

data and decisions that make up the global organization; it also examines the

different enabling technologies that can be applied for information retrieval.

Finally the chapter concludes with a discussion of the proposed framework for

making decisions dynamically in a global organization.

Chapter VIII is dedicated to the major managerial, organizational, and techno-

logical aspects of development of data warehouses in a global information envi-

ronment, when different external sources of information are available and po-

tentially may have value for decision support and managerial analysis. It sum-

marizes the major benefits that become available for businesses if they decide

to integrate information from external sources into their data warehouses. It

also introduces the overall organizational framework of development of data

warehouses that are based upon the information from different external

sources.

viii

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Chapter IX explores the impact of web services in creating a paradigm shift in

the way businesses strive to globalize. This fundamental shift in the paradigm

of the globalization process occurs due to the fact that with web services, it is

not one single organization that starts dealing with its clients electronically but,

rather, a number of organizations (a cluster) with common needs and compli-

mentary services that start dealing with each other electronically. Web services

enable business applications to talk directly with each other without human

intervention, resulting in rapid interactions amongst businesses at a global level.

Chapter X discusses quantitative modeling to introduce and manage new infor-

mation technology successfully in global business operations. The mathemati-

cal models that involve conceptualization of the problem and its abstraction to a

quantitative framework are the mina discussion of the chapter. Furthermore

the dependent and the independent variables are identified and mathematical

relationships are established between them. Results, analysis, and recommen-

dations are discussed to conclude the chapter.

Chapter XI explores the concept of enterprise, or organizational mobility. The

authors examine how mobility in a business can provide a competitive advan-

tage and enhanced sustainability. Potential industry applications for mobile tech-

nology are discussed. The authors delve further by exploring the growth areas

of mobile technologies and outline key success factors for the stakeholders in

the mobile technology arena. The many opportunities mobile technology brings

to various businesses are assessed. Furthermore the impacts of mobile technol-

ogy on organizations and society are evaluated. The chapter concludes by out-

lining various competing mobile technologies available to the market both today

and in the future.

Chapter XII reviews the components of e-business from a procurement per-

spective in order to explore the key value propositions of e-business practices

in the global automotive industry. Using an exploratory case study of the auto-

motive industry, the key questions for identifying a true value proposition of e-

business are identified, including their e-procurement, e-catalog order process-

ing, e-auction, and e-capacity systems. It is undisputed that e-business will bring

at least some level of benefit to a vast majority of organizations, regardless of

size or industry. This chapter intends to be valuable for evaluating and imple-

menting a successful e-business strategy, structure, and solution.

Chapter XIII discusses how globalization in the publishing domain is achieved

through global information and communication systems. Global information sys-

tems (GIS) enable not only integration of applications within an organization but

also enable extensive connectivity between applications across varied platforms

and software domains both within and outside the organization. This timely

connectivity has created tremendous opportunities for the publishing industry

- increasingly dependent on split-second timing to report news - to integrate

ix

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !its business processes as well as devise new and innovative ways of collecting,

assimilating, and disbursing information. This chapter is based on the experi-

ence of the lead author in one of Australia's largest publishing groups, John

Fairfax Holdings Ltd.

References

Clinton, B. (2002). Transcript of Bill Clinton at UC Berkeley, January 29, 2002.

Retrieved July 20, 2002, from http://www.berkeley.edu/news/features/

2002/clinton/clinton-transcript.html

Lan, Y. (2003). A framework for an organization's transition to globalization -

Investigation of IT issues. In S. Kamel (Ed.), Managing globally with

information technology (pp. 1-11). Hershey, PA: IRM Press.

Lan, Y. (2003). An investigation of GISM issues for successful management of

the globalization process. In S. Kamel (Ed.), Managing globally with

information technology (pp. 82-103). Hershey, PA: IRM Press.

Palvia, P.C., Palvia, S.C, & Whitworth, J.E. (2002). Global information tech-

nology management environment: Representative world issues. In P.C.

Palvia, S.C. Palvia, & E.M. Roche (Eds.), Global information technol-

ogy and electronic commerce: Issues for the new millennium (p. 2).

GA: Ivy League Publishing, Limited.

x

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !xi

%&'

The editor would like to acknowledge the help of all involved in the collation

and review process of the book, without whose support the project could

not have been satisfactorily completed. A further special note of thanks

goes also to all the staff at Idea Group Inc., whose contributions through-

out the whole process from inception of the initial idea to final publication

have been invaluable.

Thanks go to all those who provided constructive and comprehensive reviews.

Special thanks also go to the publishing team at Idea Group Inc., in particular to

Michele Rossi, who continuously prodded via e-mail for keeping the project on

schedule, and to Mehdi Khosrow-Pour, whose enthusiasm motivated me to ini-

tially accept his invitation for taking on this project.

In closing I wish to thank all of the authors for their insights and excellent

contributions to this book. I also want to thank all of the people who assisted me

in the reviewing process. Finally I would like to give my special thanks to my

wife Anna, my son Bruce, and my daughter Emily for their love and support to

enable me to complete this project.

Yi-chen Lan, PhD, MACS

Sydney, Australia

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 1

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter I

The Taxonomy of

Information Societies

Andrew S. Targowski

Western Michigan University, USA

Abstract

This chapter introduces the taxonomy of 14 information societies from the

data society to the self-sustainable society: surviving members. Their

essence and role in civilization is characterized and their paradigms and

measurements are defined. The information society is considered as the

force of change and a question is raised: is it a new tool of thought or a new

way of life? The future trends of the information society are reviewed, and

in conclusion there is a hope that the information society will make

humankind more aware of its being.

Introduction

The purpose of this chapter is to define the evolution and key indicators of the

information society, which is being triggered by the information wave in the last

25 years. Several aspects of the information society will be reviewed, and their

developmental path will be defined. The fast development of the global economy,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !2 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

which is based on info-communication technology (ICT), is supported by the

information society. Depending on the different levels of a given country's

development, the information society has different levels of complexity and

influence on the global economy and vice versa. Hence it is important to

recognize the information society's different phases of development and their

solutions and internal and external consequences. The question arises whether

the information society is a new tool of thought or a new way of life. The answer

to this question is provided by this chapter.

The Forces of Change

The "information society" is a fuzzy concept. It is considered the answer to the

problems created by the postindustrial modus operandi. In a modern economy

growth is owed to advances in info-communication technology. By the beginning

of the 21st century, the need for information handling and processing in world

societies is being shaped by the following trends:

1. Politics in the post-Cold War Era. A new world order may lead to the

formation of 1,000 countries and a highly decentralized "international

society." This physical disintegrational trend will require tools to integrate

these entities informationally. Eventually this new system of nations will be

based on a new info-communication infrastructure, which needs new info-

communication systems and services.

2. Democratization and peacemaking. Societies would like to be better

informed, therefore they need more communications based on free speech

and solutions, like the Internet.

3. Globalizing information. This is caused by the proliferation of ICT and is a

major driving force in the transnationalization of the world economy.

Estabrooks (1988) predicts that programmed capitalism in a computer-

mediated society will integrate all national markets and create one interna-

tional market.

4. The globalizing economy. A network of 50 global corporations now "rule

the world" because they apply the global information infrastructure. ICT is

at the core of the current process of economic globalization (Madon, 1997).

5. Population growth and health threats. In 2025 there will be about 9 billion

people, which will generate at least twice as many transactions as currently

processed today. This means more needs for the ICT capacity.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 3

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

6. Global environmental threats. If these threats are considered seriously,

then there is a need for planetary management and ecology. This new

management and ecology will require more monitoring info-communication

systems and services.

7. A new path for development. Since the gap between rich and poor nations

continues to widen, a world focused on people is being created. This

undertaking requires new concepts of human security, new models of

sustainable human development, new partnerships between state and

market, new patterns of national and global governance, and new forms of

international corporations (Boutros-Ghali, 1994). This trend requires more

education and research, which will necessitate the formation of "knowl-

edge" and "learning" societies (Marien, 1995).

As society, particularly the information society, becomes more interconnected,

we face a loss of boundaries, throwing into question the basic conceptual

distinctions we use to make sense of the world. As society becomes more

complex and takes on more variety and configurations, the capacity of existing

regulatory (governance) systems is being overwhelmed. A group of 14 Canadian

public servants offered the following new focus for how to govern in the

information society (Rossel, 1992):

• Information-based ways of organizing to include more players to innovate

and learn.

• Forging consensus.

• Strategic use of information to provide leadership in the continuing process

of learning.

For example, the Japanese information society's purpose is the transformation

of homo sapiens into homo intelligens in the spirit of globalism through

transparent networks and an open educational system. This purpose pretends

that anyone, anywhere, at anytime in Japan should be able to easily, quickly, and

inexpensively get any information. We see these premises treat the information

society as "computopia" and as a rebirth of technological synergism (Masuda,

1971). Perhaps we expect too much from the information society, which can

provide "computopian" platforms for info-communications but does not

necessarily mean that people will use them.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !4 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Information Society: A New Tool

of Thought or a New Way of Life?

The impact of info-communication technology on individuals and organizations

has been analyzed under the rubric of the information society since the beginning

of the computer revolution in the 1960s (Masuda, 1971; Bell, 1973). It is a socio-

economic view of the impact of computers on society in general. The increasing

role of computer and network applications affect almost every facet of human

life. Sociologists and computer pioneers tried to rationalize the computer's role

in society.

The term "information society" was applied for the first time by Koyama in 1968

and subsequently by his compatriot Masuda in 1971 in his master plan of building

the Japanese information society. The "information society" evolved from such

slogans in the 1960s as computer-serviced society (Sackman, 1967) and in the

1970s as the age of cybernetics, information era (McLuhan, 1968), knowledge

society (Drucker, 1968), technotronic society (Brzezinski, 1971), computer

revolution, wired society (Martin, 1978), telematic society (Martin, 1981), post-

industrial society (Bell, 1973), and Gutenberg two (Godfred & Parkhill, 1979).

The "information society" was coined in order to intellectualize the change in

social behavior that transformed capitalism with "capital and material" into a

new political and social order based on "information."

In Eastern Europe, specifically Poland, these ideas were almost implemented in

1971-1974 under the form of a national information system whose purpose was

to transform a totalitarian society into an informed society (Targowski, 1991). A

similar project, though only a tool of central planning, was a subject of

experimentation in Chile. President Allende invited famous British cybernetician

Stanford Beer to apply his ideas of feedback to reduce planning complexity, but

the assassination of the president also killed the cybernetic society in South

America.

Pawlowska (1992) offers the following five characteristics of the information

society, which are agreed upon by most authors:

1. Information materialism - information as an economic good that can be

sold, bought, and possessed.

2. Widely applied information technology.

3. Integration of different types of information technology.

4. A national economy dominated by the information sector (information

economy).

5. Special status of knowledge.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 5

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The information society, with its information economy, occurred as a result of

industrial evolution rather than resulting from the information revolution. Al-

though it is the same capitalistic society with the same values, the focus on

information increases human cognition and changes the future of mankind and

its environment, particularly its infrastructures, and perhaps brings along a

change in societal values. The information society requires that the human

process of cognition is no longer limited to reductionism, mechanism, and

analysis. The process in this new society can be more open, more expansive in

generating ideas and solutions channeled by a better focus (aims) and synthesis

of system thinking.

The strong development of media in the information society, particularly inter-

active ICT, facilitates the communication of one's message. It may lead toward

participative democracy, which should assure an equal access to power and the

right to decide one's fate. These are the new values that can be implemented in

the information society.

Sociologists perceive the information society as a dream society of idealistic

values and clean hands not involved in the "dirty" material economy. Is it

realistic to expect so much from the information society or even think that such

a society can exist? The answer is no. The post-industrial economy, also known

as the service or information economy, has been reduced by Daniel Bell (1973)

to the economy of the elite (lawyers, financiers, and researchers). Such an

economy cannot sustain the national economy in the long-term since it exports

"jobs" and disharmonizes the development of a mature economy.

A narrow interpretation of the information society as a culture based on

information materialism makes the concept of the information society more of an

unfulfilled, even misleading, premise and science fiction. However if the

information society is conceived as a tool of making more informed, knowledge-

able, and wise decisions, then such a society can pass a reality check and its

development should be supported. Such a society has the chance of becoming the

"conscious society" on the way to developing into the "wise society," driven not

only by information and knowledge but also by the wisdom of how to survive and

be satisfied.

If the information society applies electronic mail, telecommuting, electronic

commerce, and/or distance learning on a wide scale, then these technologies lead

to new ways of human behavior in civilization.

The politics of information should also be as important as "computer literacy."

We pay a lot of attention to applying computer tools, but do we scrutinize the

application systems' design and operations of the information society? This lack

of application design checks may lead to the abuse of social activities, and ICT

may become unwanted technology.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !6 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Essence of the Information Society

The social framework of the information society defined by Bell (1979) is a new

integrated computer-telecomunication infrastructure that transmits structured

facts, ideas, judgments, or experimental results. Bell's view that technology is

the main agent of change has been questioned by several authors; for example,

John McCarthy (1979) argues that the new technology is not the main cause of

change in our society today. On the other hand Bell, perhaps, thinks the same

way when referring to Machulp (1962) and Porat's (1979) thesis that the

information society is defined by the proportion of information/knowledge

activities to material ones. If the latter activities are greater than the former, then

the information sector becomes the primary one (information products and

services) with another two deviated information sectors (public and private

bureaucracies). The three remaining sectors are: the private productive (produc-

ing goods), public productive (building roads, dams, and so on), and household

sectors.

Beninger (1986) hypothesizes that the information society is the answer to the

control crisis, caused by the Industrial Revolution. Hence he concludes that

"control" is the engine of the information society.

Where are the real roots of the information society? They are in the concept of

"information" rather than in "material control." Information is a process of

forming a new idea, concept, event, material, energy, product, service, and so on.

By forming some idea or description we inform it. This meaning is called "to

inform." Peters (1987) argues that with the decline of scholasticism and the rise

of empiricism around the 17th century (the rise of natural sciences), information

gradually came to refer to "the information of senses" (such formulations are

found in Bacon, Locke, Berkley, and others). Once information referred to the

defining of universals; nowadays it also describes the processing of particulars

(data, information, concept, knowledge, wisdom).

Instead of defining the information society by its dominant product, information,

we perceive the information society through its general structure of social and

economic relations.

An investigation of the general structure of social and economic relations must

lead to the analysis of civilization. Civilization is an info-material structure

developed by humans to effectively cope with themselves, nature, and their

creator. The mission of civilization is to improve human existence. The civiliza-

tion model (Figure 1) has the following components:

• Human entity - organized humans

• Culture - a value-driven process of developing patterns of human behavior

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 7

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Infrastructure - technology-driven additive process of acquiring and

applying material means

A human entity in the political sense is a family, tribe, ethnos, people, proto-

nation, nation, international community, global society, and so forth. A society is

an organized human entity on the same territory in order:

• to support their own existence through the exchange of specialized services

and goods via infrastructures; and

• to develop the human race by the development of culture and infrastruc-

tures.

The role of a society in a civilization context must take into account the stage of

civilization development. The first civilizations (Mesopotamian, Egyptian, Minoan,

Indus) were societal civilizations that organized society. Based on this civilization

the next civilizations (Hellenic, Roman, Sinic, Japanese, Buddhist, Islamic,

Eastern, Western, Sub-Saharan, and Maghrebian in B.C. times) were organized

around cultural issues. Hence we can call them cultural civilizations. The third

generation of civilizations (Japanese, Buddhist, Sinic, Hindu, Islamic, Eastern,

Western, and African in A.D. times) are organized around the issues of

developing infrastructures, therefore we will name them the infrastructural

civilizations.

Figure 1. A model of civilization (The Targowski Model)

Technology-driven

additive process

Value-driven

continuum process

Entity

Infra-

structure

Culture

Civilization

Existence-driven

human community

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !8 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Among civilization infrastructures, one can recognize the following configura-

tions:

1. Core infrastructure (authority I., economic I., military I.)

2. Foundational infrastructures (urban I., rural I., health I.)

3. Integrational infrastructures (transportation I., knowledge I., communica-

tion I., information I.)

Does the level of development in a society depend on the era in which the

civilization existed? Although all eight civilizations developed infrastructures,

each one put a different emphasis on a particular category of an infrastructure.

Most literature describes the societal development in Western civilization. In

fact, its emphasis is on the integrational infrastructure that is being developed for

the purpose of pursuing the culture of management, media, education, and

entertainment as well as strengthening the economic, military, and health

infrastructures. Of course societies from other civilizations have different

priorities.

The Western societies develop the integrational infrastructure not for the sake

of infrastructure but for the purpose of developing the aforementioned cultures.

In other words an information society emerges when a society's purpose and

primary means of solving problems are focused on information handling and

processing.

For example, the level of ICT advancement in both the United States and Singapore

are at a high level. However the proportion of information to material activities in the

U.S. is much higher than in Singapore, the hub for manufacturing American goods.

Does it mean that there is not an information society in Singapore? Singapore is an

automated state-city with some solutions that are not conceivable in the U.S. Are

both states at the level of an information society? Certainly not; these societies

require further differentiation. At this moment we may say that the U.S. enters the

"informed" society level while Singapore is at the level of "informative" society.

Alvin Toffler (1980) offered a very elegant concept of civilization development

through three waves of agriculture, industry, and information. However later Alvin

and Heidi Toffler (1994) became advocates of the "new civilization" because they

perceived the information wave as replacing the agricultural and industrial waves.

Is bread being replaced by Windows XP or a car by the Internet? It will not happen.

The next wave includes the previous ones as illustrated in Figure 2. The quality of

any information society depends on the quality of the previous societies. In other

words the information society is not autonomous, it is rather inclusive. The

relationships among these societies determine the quality of life in the information

society.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 9

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Figure 2. The inclusiveness of civilization wave (The Targowski Model)

Information Wave

Industrial Wave

Agriculture Wave

The Types of the Information Society

The term "the information society" was good enough when it was first described

30 years ago. Nowadays the information society is being developed in several

mutations. The types of information society are:

The Data (Dossier) Society: A Big Brother Control

The Industrial Revolution made it possible to "process" materials such as coal,

metal, and textile at unprecedented volumes and speeds. Such acceleration of

material processing increased the demand for control of industrial operations.

For instance, the many problems of scheduling and coordinating in the early days

of the railroads resulted in missed connections or accidents. According to

Beniger (1986), the control revolution is a watershed transformation in capacities

of "information processing," as the Industrial Revolution was in material

processing.

The control revolution created punched cards machines in the 19th century and

computers in the 20th century. Almost the first 100 years of mediated informa-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !10 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

tion processing was involved in data processing for the purpose of accounting

and management. As the Industrial Revolution marked the discontinuity of

coupling energy, data processing played the same role by exploiting business

data/information. The emergence of information processing equipment, whether

punched cards or computers, led to the development of transaction processing

and later in the 1970s to on line transaction processing applications (OLTP).

With computers quickly becoming modus operandi of government and business,

a number of questions arose. How do they fit into the political landscape? How

are they designed and implemented? How are ethical and policy judgments

made? The dossier society defined by Laudon (1986) places computers in the

context of the Constitution.

The genius of American politics is its balance more in favor of individual freedom

and diversity than organizational demands for control and efficiency. Contempo-

rary ICT can radically alter the organization of power in the United States and

with it our traditional conceptions and experiences of individual freedom,

security, and privacy. The other side of the data society is a "dossier society."

According to Kenneth Laudon, from a technical point of view, the dossier society

is the integration of distinct files serving unique programs and policies into a more

or less permanent national database. It may lead to an aggregation of power in

the federal, state, and local government without precedent in peacetime America.

The dossier (data) society can expose the life of an individual to governmental

screening and composite analysis that can be analytically "right" but is not

reflective of the reality of the individual's life. Even if the analytical screening

is right, may the government penetrate the privacy of the individual? Do we not

have the right to shadow some of our citizens' lives?

Most Americans want a society where criminals are effectively brought to

justice. Most Americans want a society where government programs are

effectively and efficiently administered using, where necessary, advanced ICT.

Power is limited by segmental authority, segregation of information flows,

creation of multiple checkpoints, and encouragement of lengthy and slow

deliberation. These practical principles are at odds with the capabilities and

premises of contemporary ICT applications.

In 1984 Congress signaled a virtual retreat from the Privacy Act by passing the

Deficit Reduction Act of 1984, which contained provisions establishing a de

facto National Data Center capability. Congress required all states to participate

in file merging, matching, and linking programs to verify the eligibility of

beneficiaries in food stamps, Medicare, Aid to Families with Dependent Children

(AFDC), and a host of other "needs" and insurance-based programs. Involved

here is the systematic merging and linking of Social Security, medical, and

personal data with Internal Revenue and private employer data. These "match-

ing" and "linking" programs are "limited" to about 50 million Americans (Laudon

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 11

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

1986). There are no technical barriers to extend them to corporations like Ford,

CitiBank, Coca-Cola, Kellogg, or the American Medical Association and other

professional interest groups. Then the dossier society will become a reality.

The Computer Society: A New Social Tool

In the 1960s the evolution of computer applications progressed from mathemati-

cal computation to information processing and even to real-time control. Com-

puters increasingly catalyze the growth of scientific information and human

control through computer-aided system development. By the end of the 1960s,

with the development of online terminals, computer access had been broadening

along with the idea of the computer-serviced society. The emergence of the

computer society was a result of social information systems. The trend of these

applications was charted through three stages: human information systems

(libraries), industrialized man-machine systems (factories), and man-machine

digital systems (online banking). The first stage corresponds to primitive and

underdeveloped societies, the second to the advent of machines operated

through controlled power, prominent through the first Industrial Revolution, and

the third to the progressive computerization of advanced industrialized societies

since World War II. The computer society was then projected as a possible new

utopia, destined for oblivion or success in proportion to man's capability to chart

and control his own evolution (Sackman, 1967).

From today's point of view the computer society is mostly preoccupied with the

issue of how to apply computers. This issue was particularly popular in the United

States in the 1980s with the advent of personal computers. This issue is still

popular in developing and less developed nations that are at the early stage of

computer literacy.

The Informative Society: A Way of Processing Information

A composition of the data-dossier society, industrial society, and computer

society features create the informative society. The informative society trans-

forms the way business, government, and citizens work. It is helping organiza-

tions get leaner, smarter, and closer to the customer. Those who seize the

opportunities inherent in this revolution are capturing important competitive

advantages. Those who lag behind are forced to scramble breathlessly in the

race to catch up.

The informative society is the result of the merged data and computer societies

based upon advanced software such as on line analytical processing. OLAP

software such as data warehousing and mining transforms OLAP into value-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !12 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

added information. In the mid-1990s data warehousing became one of the

buzzwords of the ICT industry. However it was invented by real companies to

make use of vast volumes of databases. From 1965-1999 almost every aspect of

data processing had been automated in the name of efficiency. With the

increased power of ICT more complex systems could be implemented. For

example, from simple bookkeeping applications, the banking industry moved to

ubiquitous automated teller machines (ATM), which can provide a good base for

customer behavior analysis and further the development of relation banking.

In the 1990s IBM evaluated how to move from a computer-based business to

managing a business based on information. This led to the concept of data mining

in order to extract a new value of information in the business context. The

solution to this quest is data warehousing software, which is a single, complete,

and consistent store of data from internal and external sources delivered to end-

users who can process data into information in the business context (Devlin

1997).

Informative systems was defined by Zuboff (1988) in her popular book In The

Age of The Smart Machine. The Smart Machine is applied to transform the

nature of work and can provide negative (alienation) and positive (empower-

ment) results. However that same technology may "informate," empowering

ordinary working people with a broad knowledge of the production/service

process, making them capable of critical judgment about production/service. The

author argues that systems should be informated rather than automated.

The informative society is a community of developers and users who understand

what data/information to process in order to achieve added value in decision-

making, either at the personal or organizational level. This elite community, which

is no longer in the computer society, struggles with the issue of how to apply

Windows XP or a scanner. Members of the informative society are better

informed than members of the previous societies, since they use meaningful

information in a given context instead of merely applying data to decision-

making.

The Networked Society: A New Social Superconnectivity

In the networked society, home computers are as common as the telephone.

These electronic appliances link people to people, shrinking time and distance

barriers among them and nearly eliminating those barriers between people and

information. In its simplest form the networked society is a place where thoughts

are exchanged easily and democratically and intellect affords more personal

power than a pleasing appearance does. In The Network Nation Hiltz and

Turoff (1993) write: "The Network Nation or Society is a collection of commu-

nities with overlapping networks for actual and potential communication and

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 13

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

exchange. We will become the Network Nation, exchanging vast amounts of

both information and social communications with colleagues, friends, and

'strangers' who are spread out all over the nation and share similar interests,

Ultimately, as communication satellites and international packet-switching net-

works reach out to other cities and villages around the world, these social

networks, facilitated by computer-mediated communications, will become inter-

national; we will become a 'global village' whose boundaries are demarcated

only by the political decisions of those governments that choose not to become

part of an international communication."

The networked infrastructure can be utilized to substitute for the use of limited

physical resources. In the 21st century we will probably see:

• Increased scale and distinction of community-oriented networks for

academia, government, business, politics, social aspects, and other pur-

poses.

• A variety of virtual educational institutions.

• "Networked" organizations with flatter, more consolidated, and connected

structures of firms, and changes in the nature of work ("End of Job").

• The integration of ICT resulting in "superconnectivity" for all those users

with an access to networks.

The network society applies ICT to produce a culture and systems supporting

service-material base. Analyzing the potential for conflict among new informa-

tion and communications opportunities, one can identify five major areas in which

public policy issues are likely to arise [1]:

1. Equitable access to information and communications opportunities.

2. Security and the survivability of the network infrastructure.

3. Interoperability of the network infrastructure.

4. Modernization and technological development of the network infrastructure.

5. Jurisdiction in formulating and implementing national information policy.

The network society operates in a cyberspace, which is a new social space,

shaping networks into "networlds," the global matrix of minds stipulated by

interconnected computer networks. Komito (1998) perceives the following

categories of the networked society: moral, normative, and proximate commu-

nities. These communities are generated by the networked society, which

becomes a foraging society of flexible communities.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !14 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Network diffusion modifies the operation and outcomes of trade (e-commerce),

production (computer integrated manufacturing), experience (end user com-

puting), power (e-republic), and culture (icons). Castells (1996) argues that

presence or absence in the network society and the dynamics of each network

vis-a-vis others are critical sources of domination and change in our society; a

society that is characterized by the preeminence of social structure over social

action. In other words the power of flows takes precedence over the flows of

power.

The Mass Media Society: Provided Consciousness

The term mass media means communication by the media such as television,

radio, newspapers, and books. The most distinguished characteristic of mass

media communication is that it is mostly one-way. To attract as large an audience

as possible, the media are addressed to the largest number of people, very often

at the lowest denominator.

Since the advent of television, mass media created the mass media society, which

is stimulated by the media as informers, interpreters, persuaders, entertainers.

The mass media democratic society is strongly influenced by the media that

becomes the fourth power, after the executive, legislative, and judicial branches

of governance.

Today in developed nations electronic voting and opinion-registering technolo-

gies make a two-way flow of what was once a one-way pipeline, with

information no longer going just from the top down, from lawmakers to people,

but now also from the bottom up, from the people back to the lawmakers. A new

political system is emerging as the mass media society enters the electronic

republic status (Grossman 1995).

America is turning to an electronic republic, a democratic system that is vastly

increasing the people's day-to-day influence on the decisions of the state. This

transformation is triggered by the remarkable convergence of television, tele-

phone, satellites, cable, and personal computers. The electronic mass society is

heading from participative democracy toward direct democracy, a form that

originated in the fifth century B.C. in small, self-contained Greece. At the

beginning of the 21st century, in democratic nations, the electronic mass media

society is transforming an isolated citizen into an electronic citizen who feels that

his/her vote may have some meaning in pursuing the common good.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 15

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Virtual Society: Anyone, Anywhere, Anytime

The virtual society is a community that operates in cyberspace, generated by

computer networks, software, e-files, and interactive dialogues among the

participants. The virtual society's members interact among themselves without

physical presence and interact with organizations that are digital. Virtual

corporations, communities (for example, WELL in San Francisco), shops,

schools, and agencies broaden and intensify the social and business interactions

of the virtual society. Agres, Edberg, and Igbaria (1998) argue that the "virtual"

empowers an individual who can easily interact within the digital environment.

The individual can be electronically present in more digital places than he/she

could manage to be in the same range of physical localities. The virtual society's

members are better communicated and informed. Virtual cyberspace may

enhance job performance and training, improve product design, assist surgeons,

and create interactive forms of entertainment. But it will be years before that

becomes a reality, if it ever happens at all.

The Communicated Society: Familiarity of Events and Facts

The application and dissemination of omnipotent ICT may transform the United

States, Western Europe, and Japan into a "technopoly," which has sovereignty

over social institutions and national life and becomes self-justifying, self-

perpetuating, and omnipresent. Postman (1992) traces the historical movement

of technology from a support system for a culture's traditions to competing with

them, and, finally, to creating a totalitarian order with no use for tradition at all.

However, with strong insistence on the value of free speech, ICT may make

citizens better informed. Of course to do so, the communicated society should

pass the stages of mass media, networks, and virtual societies.

The Informed Society: Awarded Members

The informed society is formed when the informative and communicated

societies achieved the status of mature entities. The informed society's members

are characterized by a good level of awareness and sense of what is going on in

the society and the economy. The members of such a society can make wise

decisions based on their own judgment, which is supported by data mining

technologies as well as networked and enterprise-wide systems and services.

This society is a computerized society at the level of social sophistication and

finesse.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !16 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Robotized Society: Automated Judgment

The robotized society is composed of robots, even thinking robots. These robots'

behavior is based on the rules of artificial intelligence. Robots may not be the best

of musicians, but they can be used for testing instruments as if they are

manufacturers. If we are to use robots on a wide scale, and if technological

advances toward the "thinking" computer continue, it will become necessary to

lay down guidelines governing where and how they are used. Isaac Asimov

proposes Three Laws of Robotics:

1. A robot may not injure a human being or, through inaction, allow a human

being to come to harm.

2. A robot must obey the orders given to it by human beings except where such

orders would conflict with the first law.

3. A robot must protect its own existence as long as such protection does not

conflict with the first or second laws.

Robots in the real word do not look a bit like some of the robots we have grown

used to in films and stories. But they are still extraordinary devices and far

cleverer than machines of earlier times Asimov (1985). The robots do not pay

taxes and therefore on a broad range of applications they may cause unemploy-

ment and a demand for highly skillful workers. On the other hand if they are

applied in very complex systems and prove to be highly reliable, then their

applications can be useful and recommended.

The Knowledge Society: Understanding Members

In Post-Capitalistic Society, Peter Drucker (1993) describes how every few

hundred years a sharp transformation has taken place and greatly affected

society - its worldview, its basic values, its business and economics, and its

social and political structure. According to Drucker, we are right in the middle

of another time of radical change, from the age of capitalism and the nation-state

to a knowledge society and a society of organizations. The primary resource in

the post-capitalistic society will be knowledge and the leading social groups will

be "knowledge workers." The industries that moved into the center of the

economy from 1958 to 1998 have as their business the production and distribution

of knowledge and information rather than the production and distribution of

things. Microsoft's market value exceeds the market value of three big carmakers,

General Motors, Ford, and Chrysler. Why? Microsoft employs only 50,000

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 17

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

workers, but they produce $400,000 per capita per year. Their knowledge is so

costly. The super-rich of old capitalism were the 19th-century steel barons like

Andrew Carnegie, robber barons like Jay Gould, oil barons like John Rockefeller,

and transportation barons like Cornelius Vanderbilt. The super-rich of the

knowledge society are computer makers (Steve Wozniak, Steve Jobs), software

makers (Bill Gates), systems developers (Ross Perot), and others.

Knowledge becomes an economic resource and a tool of genuine innovations

that provide a competitive advantage in business. Knowledge is a set of rules,

laws and their systems that communicate by information handling and process-

ing. The major driver of the development of a knowledge society is a demand for

innovations in the marketplace and lifelong learning, which require permanently

improving work conditions and demand higher productivity and effectiveness.

The knowledge society applies tools needed for problem solving. Among these

tools one can mention high-speed computers, information retrieval services, and

networks of talent groups.

The Learning Society: Developing Members

The development of the knowledge society requires constant discovery, assimi-

lation, and organization of knowledge. These processes constitute learning

activities, which at the beginning of the 21st century requires skillfully swimming

in the ocean of information, artfully using information-rich sources, and using a

supportive learning environment to self-pace and self-structure users' own

programs of learning. The learning society gets its major input from higher

education and provides its output to employers (MacFarlane, 1998).

The learning society is created not only by higher education institutions but also

by "learning organizations" in business, industry, government, and nonprofit

units. "Learning organizations" overcome learning disabilities to clearly under-

stand threats and recognize new opportunities. Not only is the learning organi-

zation a new source of competitive advantage, it also offers a marvelously

empowering approach to work, one that promises that, as Archimedes put it,

"with a lever long enough ... single-handed I can move the world" (Senge, 1990).

The paradigm of the learning society is understanding, and its purpose is to

strengthen human planning and behavior in complex environments, such as the

modern global economy, steered by the new world order and often unclear to

many people.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !18 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Global Open Society: Justice for Whole Planet

As a result of learning, people and their governments who promote a global

economy may try to create a formal, global, and open society. The global

economy is based on free movement of goods, services, capital, and ideas. The

globalization of financial markets means that the movement of exchange rates,

interest rates, and stock prices in various countries are intimately intercon-

nected. Global integration has brought the benefits of the international division

of labor, economies of scale, and the rapid spread of innovations from one

country to another. However the global economy is the global capitalistic system,

which is not without problems as Soros (1998) writes in his quest for the global

open society.

The organization of the global open society is needed because such a society

must regulate deficiencies in the global capitalistic system. Among these

deficiencies, Soros lists the following: the uneven distribution of benefits, the

instability of the financial system, the threat of global monopolies and oligopolies,

the ambiguous role of the state, and the question of values and social cohesion.

Since global markets reduce everything to commodities, we can have a market

economy but we cannot have a market society. Globalization increases the

demands on the state to provide social nets while reducing its ability to do so. This

sows seeds of social conflict. This may lead to a new wave of protectionism and

the breakdown of the capitalistic system, as happened in the 1930s.To prevent

the next breakdown of the capitalistic system, one must organize the global open

society, which is governed by the rule of law: respect for human rights, respect

for diversity, respect for minorities and minority opinions, division of power, and

a market economy. Of course the global open society is a society organized

around information and by networks. This society requires many alliances

(including virtual) that will establish a code for international patterns of expected

behavior. Such alliances will apply information and computerized networks to

disseminate and enforce these standards. Some such alliances are the World

Trade Organization, North Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO), and the World

Tribunal. Unfortunately the United Nations is an organization designed only for

peace keeping not for planet management. This global society should be open.

According to its promoter, George Soros, this means that it should be based on

democratic principles and global justice for all habitants and their natural

surroundings.

The Self-Sustainable Society: Surviving Members

The death triangle of mankind composed of the expected bombs in population

(2050), ecology (2050), and resource depletion (2300), is two generations away

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 19

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

from the generation of 2000 anno domini. The next 50 years (2000-2050) are

crucial for the survival of mankind. If we look back into the last 50 years, we

see that this period passed quickly and produced positive results never known in

world history. It also created the threat "to be or not to be" for humans on Earth.

The next 50 years is just a period of two generations. If we miss these

generations, we also will miss the opportunity to educate these generations, and

we will be overwhelmed by the complexity of the coming crisis and probable

failure of human civilization. Although people, cultures, and nations have done

this for centuries, the death triangle of mankind has never been so close to us.

A new society with new politics should be defined in the first part of the 21st

century and implemented in 2025-2050 of the same century. Otherwise mankind

may disappear from the Earth. The targets for the 21st century can be defined

as follow:

• To achieve sustainable and diversified culture.

• To achieve mass consumption of green products from regenerative food

and fiber systems through biodiversity (Dalhberg, 1993).

• To achieve these targets through the development of the nonmaterial

society (value-driven) and self-sustainable society (survival-oriented).

The modern scourges of Western civilization, such as youth suicide, drug abuse,

and crime, are usually explained in personal, social, and economic terms:

unemployment, poverty, child abuse, family breakdown, and so on. However the

author suggests that these trends are to certain degree independent of such

factors. These curses are rather caused by a failure to provide a sense of

meaning, belonging, and purpose in our lives, as well as a framework of values.

People need to have something to believe in and live for, to feel they are a part

of a community, a valued member of society, and to have a sense of spiritual

fulfillment - that is, a sense of relatedness and connectedness to the world and

the universe in which they exist.

The self-sustainable society should be the next step in social development. It

should provide an orientation on values (for example, family), norms and

attitudes, and the spiritual life. In other words we have to reinvent culture in such

a way that it will be sustainable. Moller (1993) argues for the need to emphasize

an input from different cultures in order to amalgamate a single concept for all

of us. This transformation can be achieved if the learning and global open

societies form a mature mankind.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !20 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Monitoring Society: Limited Communication

If we will not secure feeding and caring for the 10 billion people who are likely

to be alive within a couple generations, then we have to secure the minimal means

of social communication. It can be organized through the application of satellites

or by primitive monitoring by the sound of tam-tam drums. Such an environment

will be managed by the monitoring society, which will be very limited in

technology and other resources. It may be the beginning of the end of mankind.

IS Type Paradigm Purpose Main Information

Solution

Measures

Per 1,000 population

Data (Dossier) Measurement Reduction Mechanization and

Automation, Off-line

systems

Number of data entry

personnel

Computer Measurement Reduction Automation and How

to compute? Off-line

systems

Number of computers

Mass Media News Dissemination Printing Number of newspapers

and Number of TV sets

Networked Connection Exchange Internet, Intranet

Networked enterprise

Number of Internet

Users, Number of

Intranet servers

Virtual Electronic

presence

Exchange and

Opinion

Internet, Intranet

Virtual enterprise

systems

Number of bulletin

board systems (national

and organizational)

Informative Optimization Decision-

making

What to process?

Data mining Online

systems Application

Portfolio

Number of OLAP

software per

organization, % of GDP

spent on IM, % of I-

workers in the labor

force

Communicate Familiarity Planning Networking

Online systems

Networked enterprise

Number of Internet

users, Number of

telephones, Number of

TV sets and Number of

newspapers, % of GDP

spent on telecomm.

Knowledge Rules Understanding Research, education

Information retrieval

Number of scientists

Number of professors,

Number of students

Robotized Rules Decision-

making

Automation of

judgment

Number of expert

systems

Informed Awareness Decision-

making

Data mining

Networking

Enterprise-wide

systems

Number of OLAP

software, and Mass

Media and Network

Indexes, Free press

Learning Understanding Planning and

acting

Computer-aided

instruction,

Information retrieval

Digital library

Number of published

books, Number of

digital books and

scientific documents

Global Justice Operations Virtual government

Global systems

Number of applied

virtual global agencies

Self-sustainable Optimization Survival Green economy

Ecological systems

Amount of energy from

renewable sources

Monitoring Warning Survival Satellites or tam-tam

drums

Number of served

people

Table 1. The paradigms and measurements of information societies

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 21

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Paradigms and Measurements

The issue of how to measure the information society preoccupies the research

of several authors. Measurements of the information economy were offered by

the previously mentioned authors, Machulp (1962) and Porat (1979). Hudson and

Leung (1988) applied Porat's method to measure the information society of

Texas. The Jahoda Index (Ito, 1981) applied by Japan's Research Institute of

Telecommunications and Economics (RITE) has 10 components, which do not

even include such words as computers, software, or networks. The index is

almost 20 years old and does not reflect the ICT and IM solutions that are fruits

of the information age and telecommunications age. About five years later, the

Japanese Information Processing and Development Center offered the JIPIDEC

Index. This index applies to such categories as hardware, software, and

transmission.

Do these measurements define the information society (Dordick & Wang,

1993)? To answer this question, a new set of measuring indexes has been

offered in Table 1. These measurements are from the citizen's (user's) point of

view and explore how ICT penetrates the population and what type of paradigm,

purpose, and main solutions are provided by each type of information society.

Of course the information society can be perceived at different levels of the

population. The most popular level is a nation; however, one can analyze the

information society at the level of a region or city as well as at the level of an

organization. In other words in the same nation there can operate different types

of information societies, as well as in the same, large organization.

The Developmental Paths of Information Societies:

Future Trends

The developmental paths of information societies are presented in Figure 3. The

model is self-explanatory with the exception of the expert society. The main idea

of the model is based on the prerequisites required in order to move to the next

developmental stage. For example, the informed society can launch its opera-

tions if its members pass through the stage of the informative and communicated

societies. The application of artificial intelligence may help in many areas of

civilization; however, it requires advanced knowledge among developers and

limited skills among operators of expert systems. Therefore, too many applica-

tions of robot systems may lead backward to the computer society, where the

main challenge is how to apply the system. On the other hand some limited

applications of expert systems in technological environments that are too

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !22 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

complex may help the informative and learning societies in their operations and

developments.

Conclusion

1. The study of the information society types should influence the methodol-

ogy of application systems design, since each type will have its own

requirements that are appropriate for a given level of the society's

information maturity.

2. As nations build their presence in the global economy, they need a national

information policy to allocate and coordinate organizational responsibilities.

This policy should include direct governmental involvement in developing

an information infrastructure similar to urban and rural infrastructures.

Some indirect incentives for the development and modernization of the

information infrastructure should be provided too. A regulatory environ-

ment should be established to provide more conducive decisions on the

modernization of the information infrastructure.

3. The information societies emerge as a neutral tool of social development.

It does not support any politics, either liberal or conservative. They close the loop

of man-to-information and information-to-man. Their mission is the present and

future of humankind equipped with the ability and tools of information and

Figure 3. The path of information's development (The Targowski Model)

Data Society

Computer Society

Mass Media Society

Networked Society

Informed Society

Learning Society

Informative Society

Robotized Society

Monitoring Society

Learning Society

Knowledge Society

Self-sustainable

Society

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 23

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

communication processing and handling. This may lead to more aware social

decisions and actions. Nowadays knowledge, learning and consciousness is at

the mercy of ICT tools that well or poorly control the development of civilization.

This civilization's current mood is based on the importance of a sense of being.

References

Agres, C., Edberg, D., & Magid, I. (1998). Transformation to virtual societies:

Forces and issues. The Information Society, 14(2), 71-82.

Asimov, I. (1985). Your world 2000: Technology. New York: Facts On File

Publications.

Bates, B.J. (1984). Conceptualizing the information society: The search for

a definition of social attributes. Paper presented at the meeting of The

International Communication Association, San Francisco, CA.

Bell, D. (1973). The coming of the post-industrial society: A venture in social

forecasting. New York: Basic Books.

Bell, D. (1979). The social framework of the information society. In M. Dertou-

zos & J. Moses (Eds.), The computer age: A twenty-year view (pp. 163-

211). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Beniger, J.R. (1986). The control revolution. Cambridge, MA: Harvard

University Press.

Boutros-Ghali, B. (1994). An agenda for development. New York: United

Nations.

Brzezinski, Z. (1971). Moving into a technotronic society. In A. F. Westin (Ed.),

Information technology in democracy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Uni-

versity Press.

Castells, M. (1996). The rise of the network society. Malden, MA: Blackwell

Publishers.

Dalhberg, K.A. (1993, June 27-July 1). Transition from agriculture to regenera-

tive food systems. Proceedings of Key Elements of Sustainability,

World Future Society General Assembly, Washington, D.C.

Devlin, B. (1997). Data warehouse. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

Dizard, W.P. (1984). The coming information age. New York: Longman.

Dordick, H.S, & Georgette, W. (1993). The information society. Newbury

Park, CA: SAGE Publications.

Drucker, P. (1968). Technology, management and society. London.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !24 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Drucker, P. (1993). Post-capitalistic society. New York: HarperBusiness.

Eastabrooks, M. (1988). Programmed capitalism: A computer-mediated

global society. Armonk, NY: M. E. Sharpe.

Goban-Klas, T., & Sienkiewicz, P. (1999). Speleczenstwo informacyjne:

Szanse, zagro¿enia, wyzwania. Kraków: Wyd. Fundacji Postêpu

Telekomunikacji.

Godfred, D., & Parkhill, D. (1979). Gutenberg two. Toronto, Canada: Press

Porcepic.

Grossman, L.K. (1995). The electronic republic. New York: Viking.

Hiltz, S.R., & Murray, T. (1993). The network nation. Cambridge, MA: MIT

Press.

Hudson, H.E., & Leung, L. (1988). The growth of the information sector. In F.

Williams (Ed.), Measuring the information society. Newbury, CA:

SAGE Publications.

Ito, Y. (1981). The 'jahoka shakai' approach to the study of communication in

Japan. In G.C. Wilhoit & H. de Bock (Eds.), Mass communication review

year book. Beverly Hills, CA: SAGE Publications.

Kling, R. (1991). Social controversies about computerization. In R. Kling (Ed.),

Computerization and controversy (pp. 10-15). San Diego, CA: Aca-

demic Press.

Komito, L. (1998). The net as a foraging society: Flexible communities. The

Information Journal, 14(2), 97-106.

Laudon, K.C.(1986). Dossier society. New York: Columbia University Press.

MacFarlane, A. (1998). Information, knowledge and learning. Higher Educa-

tion Quarterly, 52(1), 77-92.

Machlup, F. (1962). The production and distribution of knowledge in the

United States. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Madon, S. (1997). Information-based global economy and socioeconomic devel-

opment: The case of Bangalore. The Information Society, 13(2), 227-243.

Marien, M. (1995). World futures and the United Nations. Bethesda, MD:

World Future Society.

Martin, J. (1978). Wired society. Englewood, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

Martin, J. (1981). Telematic society. Englewood, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

Martin, J. (1984). Viewdata and the information society. Englewood Cliffs,

NJ: Prentice Hall.

Masuda, Y. (1971). The plan for information society: A national goal toward

the year 2000. Tokyo: Japanese Computer Usage Development Institute.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Taxonomy of Information Societies 25

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Masuda, Y. (1981). The information society as post-industrial society.

Bethesda, MD: World Future Society.

McLuhan, M. (1968). War and peace in the global village. New York:

Bantam Books.

Moller, J.O. (1993). Europe, the coming of the 'nonmaterial' society. The

Futurist, 27(6), 23-27.

Nora, S., & Minc, A. (1980). Computerization and society. Boston: MIT

Press.

Parker, E.B. (1981). Information services and economic growth. The Informa-

tion Society, 1(1), 71-78.

Pawlowska, A. (1992). Conditions of preserving the universal values in informa-

tion society. In L. Zacher (Ed.), Spoleczenstwo informacyjne. Lublin-

Warszawa: Warszgraf.

Pol, I.S. (1983). Tracking the flow of information. Science, 221, 609-613.

Porat, M.U. (1978). Global implications of an information society. Journal of

Communication, 28(1), 70-80.

Postman, N. (1992). Technopoly. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.

Rossel, S. (1992). Governing in an information society. Montreal, Canada:

Institute for Research and Public Policy.

Sackman, H. (1967). Computers, system science, and evolving society: The

challenge of man-machine digital systems. New York: John Wiley.

Salvaggio, J.L. (1983). The social problems of information societies. Telecom-

munications Policy, 7(3), 228-242.

Salvaggio, J.L. (1989). The information society, economic, social, & struc-

tural issues. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers.

Senge, P.M. (1990). The fifth discipline. New York: Doubleday Currency.

Soros, G. (1998). The economy: Toward a global open society. The Atlantic

Monthly, 281(1), 20-33.

Targowski, A. (1991). Computing in totalitarian states: Poland's way to an

informed society, Information Executive, The Journal of Information

Systems Management, 4(3), 10-16.

Toffler, A. (1980). The Third Wave. New York: Batman Books.

Toffler, A., & Toffler, H. (1995). Creating a new civilization. Atlanta: Turner

Publishing.

Tonn, B.E. (1985). Information technology and society: Prospects and problems.

The Information Society, 3(3), 241-260.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !26 Targowski

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

U.S. Department of Commerce (1977). The information economy: Definition

and measurements. (Office of Telecommunications). Washington, D.C.:

Porat, M.U.

Zacher, L. (Ed.) (1999). SpoBeczeDstwo informacyjne. Warsaw: Transformacje.

Zubbof, S. (1988). In the age of the smart machine. New York: Basic Books.

Endnotes

1

Adapted from U.S. Congress, Office of Technology Assessment, Critical

Connections: Communication for the Future, OTA-CIT-407, Washington,

D.C.: Government Printing Office, January 1990.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 27

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter II

Organizational

Structure Without

Hierarchy in a Dynamic

Global Business

Environment

Toma Kern

University of Maribor, Slovenia

Abstract

The chapter deals with the inefficiency of classical business systems in a

dynamic global business environment. The main reasons for inefficiency

are complicated processes, which are limited and influenced by inadequate

classical business structures. But in new circumstances business structures

must be designed according to process needs. Classical business systems

should be urgently renewed to survive. Furthermore the author concludes

that a single business system re-engineering project is not the definitive

answer. In the global business environment, changes are constant. The

efficiency of business processes can be maintained and increased in the

long term only by constant but effortless adaptation of structures. This is

possible by the introduction of the organizational structure without hierarchy

and the mechanism for dynamic adaptation of structures to business

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !28 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

processes. The model of "process organization," which includes those

elements, is described in this chapter.

Introduction

The contribution summarizes the research that deals with the problem of

inefficiency of classical business systems in an era of dynamic changes of global

business environment. By analyzing business models on the conceptual level, it

is proven that business structures (structures of business objects) in classical

business systems significantly influence the shaping and performing of business

processes. However, from the organizational efficiency point of view, it must be

vice versa: the performing of the process should determine and shape business

structures. Business systems should be designed from the process point of view

and supported by adequate information systems, which are at the same time the

enabler for efficient business processes. There is also no doubt that only mangers

and employees with eligible knowledge and skills can improve the organization

(Ferjan, Vukovi , & Kern, 2004). Only they can run renewed processes

successfully, so it is necessary to build process-dependent human resources

systems.

It is obvious that inefficient business systems should be urgently renewed, if they

are intended to survive in the dynamic global business environment. It is also true

that all business structure changes, informational changes, and human recourse

changes should be based on modernized business processes. But in globalization

circumstances it is also true that changes are constant.That means that a

renewed business system can be efficient only until the business environment

imposes new requirements, implying the alteration of processes and the need for

the reconstruction of the structures, information system, and human resource

system.

That means that businesses system reengineering project is not the definitive

answer. In the dynamic global business environment, it is necessary to set up a

"mechanism" enabling constant, fast, and efficient adaptation of business

systems to the changing processes.

Background of the Research

One of the characteristics of the global business environment (which is caused

by great dynamics of changes of clients' demands) are smaller batches of

products (or services) of the same sort. At the same time the assortment extends,

and therefore more and more small batches need to be produced. This means the

change of continual production (or service) processes into intermittent processes

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 29

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

with less and less repetitions (Kern, 1998). Customers also demand shorter

delivery times and last-minute changes. At the same time stakeholders expect

larger profit, which demands cutting operating costs (that is, costs of work,

equipment, stocks).

Such crossing demands cause organizational difficulties and lessen efficiency

and, consequently, the competitiveness of the business system. Managers

therefore face a demanding problem, which is being intensified. They are trying

to achieve the competitive advantage by investing into equipment and technologi-

cal development. However the great dynamics of changes in the environment

and their radicalism often lessen or even nullify the effect of these efforts. There

are many known cases of longer production times (and hereby costs) despite the

automation of processes after introducing the expensive information technology

(IT). The reason is the performing of additional activities that do not add value

to the business system (preparation, waiting, finishing work, and transference of

documentation and material among individuals). Plenty of time (energy, re-

sources, and money) is spent on the adjustment of sequent or simultaneous

activities and their mastery. The analysis shows that the majority of superfluous

work is done due to the demands of the existent structures in the business system,

which were formed in completely different circumstances from the present

ones. It is shown that there was no such organizational gap in the time of shaping

of business processes; the dysfunction between structures and processes

appeared when processes were changing and structures did not manage to adapt

to them. The experience has also shown that improving of the performing of

individual activities usually does not contribute much to the increase of efficiency

of the business system as a whole (Keen & Knapp, 1996; Kern, 1998).

Figure 1. Model of a classical business system in a stable environment. It

shows the efficient performing of the main business process because the

organizational structure is formed according with process needs.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !30 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

In the described circumstances it is often shown that the main reserve the

company still has is in changing the manner of work and relationships in the

business system, therefore the change of organization. However companies

have bad experience with various "reorganizations." These "achievements"

were in the past a synonym for the change of the organizational structure, thus

especially for the change of the executive staff competence and for reducing

staff. The results were often even negative as the broken organizational

structure, increase of formalization, and interruptions of existent communica-

tions even more complicated the processes performing (Kern, 2004).

The new-days answer is so called "process approaches to reengineering."

Several variants have been developed and described in the last years (Keen &

Knapp, 1996; Kern, 1998). The best-known and the most controversial perhaps

is "business process reengineering" (BPR) (Hammer, 1996). All approaches are

based on the same paradigm: increasing the efficiency of processes' performing

by introducing process teams and generalists (Srica, 1997), simplifying complex

processes, eliminating superfluous activities, standardizing activities, and per-

forming adequately in shaping support (Keen & Knapp, 1996).

Business process improvement increases the efficiency of the redeveloped

process. This is proved by many actual examples (Hammer, 1996). However the

improvement by itself does not increase the business system efficiency in the

long term. The reengineering demands elimination of the existent organizational

structures and therefore the coordination problem of several intermingled

processes arises. This causes the establishment of a new organizational struc-

ture, which again becomes inadequate in the next cycle of changes in the

environment and consequential changes of processes (Kern, 1998).

Figure 2. Model of a business system in a turbulent environment. It shows

the inefficient performing of the transforming process after the change of

the process, to which the organizational structure did not adapt.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 31

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Definition of Research Area

The success of the business system can be measured by many criteria. The

business system functions on the basis of intermingled processes that are carried

out in it. One of the measurable criteria of success is efficiency, which is defined

as the ratio between the outputs we get from the system after the performed

process and inputs in the process. The business system is understood as "the

whole of mutually linked business occurrences which enable business processes

and they more or less influence each other." The business process is, regarding

the general definition of process, defined as "dynamic sequence of dependant

occurrences in the business system." The term "occurrence in a business

system" is used for everything that can be perceived in the business system of

business environment, irrespective of whether it is manifested in the physical

sense or not (Kern, 1998), and it can be modeled by business objects. The

business objects represent the copy of the occurrence from the real world into

the model. The necessary (although not also sufficient) condition for the efficiency

of processes is their natural and free flow from the entrance into the system to their

exit. This means that the processes must not be limited with inadequate character-

istics of business objects or inadequate relations among them.

Figure 3. Model of a redesigned process, which is performed by tree

process teams and an individual - a generalist

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !32 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Among all modeled objects we must choose those that are similar regarding the

chosen characteristics and unite them into aggregated objects. The term

"aggregated object" indicates a construction that does not exist in the real world

and is introduced into the model to understand business systems and business

system processes. Among individual objects of aggregated object we can

identify relations we will observe and transform them into the structure of an

individual aggregated object. The individual aggregated object therefore repre-

sents the structure of chosen business objects.

Regarding the problem description and the abovementioned starting points, the

research question is the following: We maintain that in the business system it is

possible to shape and perform efficient business processes that will fulfill defined

demands of clients. This is possible despite limitations represented by the

availability of business objects. However this is possible only under the condition

that relations among business objects are not considered. Newly shaped

processes formed in such way can influence back on business objects, and

especially significantly influence their relations (thus the structure of an indi-

vidual aggregated object). The process organization is defined in this manner,

where the aggregated object structure becomes a business process function and

no more vice-versa! The existence of process organization needs assured

dynamic and efficient adjustment of business system structures to changing

processes, which can be accomplished by "the organizational structure without

hierarchy."

Possible Solution: Forming the

Organizational Structures Without

Hierarchy

The objective of the business redesign is the shaping of such organizational

structure that will not obstruct dynamic process changes and at the same time

will enable the mastery of intermingled processes and resources. For this

purpose business objects in the business system are classified into three

aggregated objects. The aggregated objects are selected according to the

common characteristics of objects forming these aggregated objects. The

chosen aggregated objects are: resources, activities, and messages. The re-

search limits itself to discussion of the aggregated object "resources," which is

comprised of "human resources," machines and devices, material, and so forth.

If we focus on the class of "human resources" and human resources structure,

we actually observe the complexity of the organizational structure. This is

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 33

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

(according to Mitzenberg) the most important standpoint of the organization.

Human resources are the most general resources; we can attribute to them very

heterogeneous characteristics, and at the same time it is hard to define their

behavior. Therefore the model can be relatively simply generalized and applied

also to other resource classes, and even more generally to all business system

objects.

A human being, who is discussed with all his characteristics, takes part in the

process as a whole individuum and is the basic element of the organizational

structure. Problems arise when human resources are grouped on higher levels.

From the very beginning structures were formed according to the needs of

processes that were taking place in business systems when creating the system.

Later on they did not adjust adequately to changes. The gap between the existing

structures of business objects and the adequate structures (for the needs of as-

is processes) is the main reason for inefficient processes.

The necessary condition for the performing of each process is the mastering of

the process and business objects that are needed for the performing. The

required business process outputs can be achieved in various ways; therefore a

process with the same objective can have various versions. The selection of the

required objects, which can be substantially different regarding the chosen

process version, is followed by the identification of available objects in the

business system (especially available resources). The identified resources of an

individual kind need to be defined according to their quantity and quality. The next

step is assignment of the adequate (but available) resources to activities in the

framework of processes and their time and quantitative allocation. The proce-

dure must be performed before the beginning of each process that is newly

implemented in the business system. The procedure is relatively complex and

demands considerable inputs. This consequently lessens the efficiency of the

business system as a whole. The problem becomes acute because there are

several processes taking place in the business system at the same time and they

differ among each other regarding the number of repetitions. In this case it is

necessary to consider the actual and the planned assignment (or occupation) of

all resources in all activities. The structure adjustment procedure described

above is under these conditions in the classical business systems practically

unattainable in the real time. In classically formed business systems this is the

main reason for structuring and grouping. The process preparation is transferred

to a lower level in such a manner, and there is no need for the whole system

coordination. This enables the process preparation in the real time, however, on

the account of lesser efficiency (the sum of individual parts optimums is not equal

to the optimum of the whole). Therefore the organizational paradox arises: the

existing structuring manner is not acceptable from the standpoint of business

systems' efficiency; however, business systems in general cannot function

without proper structuring.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !34 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The solution of the problem "of business objects adjusting structures to the needs

of processes" is not in canceling structures in the business system and then

creating new ones, which would again become inadequate in short time. The

solution of the problem and the consequential increase of a system's flexibility

is in structuring business objects on different bases. Business objects in the

reengineered business system are structured exclusively on the basis of their

characteristics, which are relevant from the standpoint of processes going on in

the business system. This way a business object can belong to any number of

classes, depending on the characteristics it has.

There is no hierarchy in the suggested model as we know it in the classical

organization models. However all resources, and consequently all classes, to

which resources belong are on the same organizational level. The business

system organizational structure is basically hereby absolutely flat. The relation-

ships in such a system are absolutely multilateral. However hierarchy does not

exist, only in those time intervals when there is no process going on in the business

system and business objects are passive. When a process is going on in the

business system, certain business objects become active and relationships

among them are established. In the next interval these relations can be totally

different. After ending the process, business objects break the relations with

other business objects, which were needed in the time of the performing of the

process.

However it is not enough only to structure resources on the basis of character-

istics needed for the performing of activities in the basic transforming process.

To make the dynamic adjustment of structures possible, the definition of special

characteristics or special competence of human resources is also needed. Those

special characteristics enable and allow the organization of other resources and

their management.

These characteristics classify human resources into three main classes:

• Basic human resources, in the framework of the reengineered process,

take part in an individual work or sequence of activities, which add value

to the process.

• Process owners can be a human resource with characteristics that enable

him to understand the process and at the same time with competence that

permit him to shape and perform the process. The process owner has no

control over the resources performing the process until it actually takes

place. The process owner has the characteristics and competence that

enable him to shape the new process version, creating a process team,

launching the process, monitoring, and finishing the process.

• Resource owners are grouped according to their characteristics and

competence over the resources. They are competent for each resource

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 35

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

group (resource class). That means each is competent for managing and

coordinating the characteristics of resources, which are in a certain class,

and therefore he is not a functional leader and not hierarchically superior

to resources. An individual resource owner can be competent for any

number of classes of basic resources.

Interactions among these classes of resources are the basis of the reengineered

business system and enable changing business object structures, which theoreti-

cally don't have permanent structures.

Dynamic Adaptation of the Structure

Without Hierarchy to Changing

Processes

The processes in the model are defined as the usage of business objects in an

observed time interval. The application of a business object signifies that it is not

"passive" anymore and becomes "active." When the business object is in the

Figure 4. Schematic figure of resources and their classifications into

classes according to the characteristics of resources

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !36 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

passive interval, we can say that it is in a certain state, and when the business

object becomes active, this means that it is being transferred from one state to

another. Therefore the process can be modeled as the sequence of changes of

business-object states in time.

The business objects of the same main class are always in a certain mutual

relation - they form a structure. It is possible to define for any process such a

business object structure that the process efficiency will be maximal. As

processes change during time, the optimal business object structures are

different in different time intervals. Therefore it is true that business object

structures depend on the use of business objects and have to adapt to processes

continuously. On the other side we cannot use too much time for adaptation due

to searching common efficiency, for this would significantly lessen the efficiency

of the system as a whole!

The mechanism, which enables efficient adjustment of business system struc-

tures to changing processes, is built on tree bases: repository, where all business

Figure 5. Main classes of human resources and their placing into the

described model

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 37

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

objects and process models are stored, meta process, by which new processes

and proper structures are formed in the real time, and time schedule, for

assigning and allocating resources.

Business System Repository

The repository is defined as a unique collection of meta data, data, object

descriptions, business models, algorithms, rules, conditions, instructions, and so

forth (Jacobson, Ericson, & Jacobson, 1995; Sheer, 1999; Taylor, 1995). The

process models are classified in the repository according to the expected output

(a product or a service). The same business objects can appear in any number

of processes; however, each object is defined in the repository only once:

• The repository is available to process owners, resource owners and basic

resources through the appropriate information technology (Kern, 1995).

• Process owners identify the existing processes and all process versions

using models in the repository. They can also form models, complement,

and update them.

• Resource owners can, by comparing the available and the needed resource

characteristics, which are written in the repository, suggest the assignment

of resources to individual processes and their allocation to individual

activities. Resource owners can assign characteristics to resources and

change them, and in this way they update the repository.

• Basic human resources receive messages through the repository regarding

the belonging to the process team and the performing of the assigned

activities in individual time intervals. The basic resources inform the

repository about the level of completion of the assigned activities and

hereby update data on their availability.

Meta-Process

It is necessary to define a new process for accomplishing simultaneous adapta-

tion of business object structures to the changes of processes. It is called "meta-

process." The meta-process describes securing the required business objects

that enable the shaping and performing of any process in a process-oriented

business system.

• The meta-process starts by receiving a message (stimulus) from the

environment or the system itself, which contains a demand for a product or

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !38 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

a service. The message is sent by a customer and received by the process

owner in the system (step one).

• The very first activity in the meta-process is the identification of all process

versions, which can provide the demanded product or service. Models of

all process versions that are possible in the discussed business process are

stored in the repository. The process owner selects the appropriate process

versions and classifies them according to the level of their suitability (step

two).

• The calculation of resources is carried out in the repository, and it adjusts

to the available resources. The calculation result is the suggestion of one

process version, which is the most appropriate regarding the system

limitations (step three). The list of available resources with proper charac-

teristics is suggested.

• Resource owner confirms or rejects the proposal for the resource assign-

ment from the class he is assigned to (step four).

• The process owner gains the necessary resources and forms a process team

without hierarchy. The process team comprises all resources needed for

the process performing. The process owner can also be a part of the team

if the selected process version demands it and the process owner has proper

characteristics (step five).

• The process team exists as long there is the need for it, until the process is

finished. When the process is finished, the process team is dissolved.

The most complicated case of meta-process is described above. In practice the

meta-process can be fundamentally simplified for those processes, which are

carried out in the system continually or their repetitions accurately anticipated.

This enables dynamic changing of the organizational structure in the process-

oriented business system.

Resource Assignment and Allocation Scheduling

In the proposed model there are no limitations of process performing due to

unsuitable structures; however, the availability of individual business objects

(especially human resources) in a certain time interval remains an important

limitation. The dynamic adaptation of structures is based on leveling the resource

availability with known characteristics in a time interval and the needs for certain

resource characteristics in the same time interval. For the performing of the

observed process, the resource availability has to be higher or equal to the needs

in each time interval. This condition has to be met in all processes in the system

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 39

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

and in all the resources taking part in processes. The condition to achieve

dynamic adaptation of structures is the introduction of resource assignment and

allocation system and time schedule of the performing of all processes in the

system.

Certain conditions have to be fulfilled for this (as described in step three in

meta-process):

• Repository with process models must be updated;

• System for setting process performing priorities must be arranged;

• Data on the degree of active process realization must be updated; and

• Scheduling has to be implemented simultaneously for all active and planned

business system processes in real time.

We can describe scheduling and resource leveling only conditionally. The

essential difference between the classical scheduling and the described way of

scheduling is that in the suggested model we deal with resource classes and not

directly with resources. Therefore we schedule the resource characteristics and

resources as objects, and this essentially increases system's flexibility. This is

true for all types of resources (human resources, machines and devices,

materials). Another difference is the option of several process versions, which

result in the same outputs, and choosing that one for which we have available

resources with proper characteristics.

Model of the organizational structure without hierarchy enables adjusting

structures to changing business processes, and it also has some additional

advantages:

• It enables the mastery of the business system in the situation of big resource

fluctuation;

• It enables the mastery of the necessary and available resource character-

istics in the business system;

• It stimulates resource generalization as it enables promotion only over

increasing belonging to several resource classes;

• It enables a high degree of business system self-control; and

• It enables simple business system adjustment when business system grows.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !40 Kern

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Conclusions and Future Trends

We can conclude that business system efficiency can be improved by adjusting

structures to business processes. But in a dynamic global business environment

with the great dynamics of changes, the efficiency can be maintained and

increased in the long term by the introduction of the organizational structure

without hierarchy and the mechanism for dynamic adaptation of structures to

business processes, therefore by establishing a "process organization."

The condition for the successful introducing of the model into practice is an

appropriate process order. The paradox, that we are introducing an even stricter

order than it is in the classical hierarchical organization into the process

organization, which is based on independence and innovations, is only apparent!

The prescribed behavior of resources is demanded outward, as the communica-

Figure 6. Model of the organizational structure without hierarchy and

mechanism for structure adaptation to the needs of processes

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Organizational Structure Without Hierarchy 41

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

tion intensity is greater than in the classical hierarchical organizational structure.

Inward (for example, inside the process team) freedom is higher than in the

classical organization. Rules are defined on the system level for all participants

and observing them lessens the level of system entropy. This signifies that the

system anarchy is lower and this is the necessary condition for a higher level of

democracy and consequently higher level of individual freedom.

All this can be achieved in the dynamic global business environment. Such an

environment is sometimes defined with the term "urban chaos." The suggested

model enables business system efficiency in chaotic circumstances.

References

Ferjan, M., Vukovi , G., & Kern, T. (2004). Influential factors of employee

careers in Slovenia. Journal of Economics, 52(1), 91-107.

Hammer, M. (1996). Beyond reengineering: How the process-centered

organization is changing our work and lives. London: Haperr Colins

Business.

Jacobson, I., Ericson, M., & Jacobson, A. (1995). The object advantage

business process reengineering with object technology. Greenwich:

Addison-Wesley.

Keen, P.G.W., & Knapp, E.M. (1996). Every manager's guide to business

processes. Harvard Business School Press.

Kern, T. (1995). Development of structured flowchart technique for business

process re-engineering. In H. Becva (Ed.), Strategic management and its

support by information systems (pp. 43-49).

Kern, T. (1998). The process organization: Designing of the structure of the

business systems based on renewed business processes. Doctoral

dissertation, University of Maribor.

Kern, T. (2004). Participation of employees in business process improve-

ment projects. Econ'04: (Selected research papers). Vol. 11. Ostrava:

Technical University. Faculty of Economics, 194-201.

Scheer, W.A. (1999). Aris - business process modeling (3rd ed.). Springer

Publishing.

Srica, V. (1997). Inventivni manager. Croman & MEP Consult.

Taylor, A.D. (1995). Business engineering with object technology. New

York: John Wiley & Sons.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !42 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter III

The Organizational

Transformation Process

to Globalization

Magdy K. Serour

University of Technology, Sydney, Australia

Abstract

The topic of globalization is increasingly attracting the attention of

software engineers, system researchers, and, most interestingly, business

practitioners. In recent years there has been a perceptible increase in

demand from business companies, services, and non-profit organizations

and even from government bodies around the world to adopt and utilize

Internet-based technologies in order to transform their traditional business/

service activities into an electronic business environment. Such a

transformation empowers organizations to expand their business processes

beyond their local borders and move the entire business from localization

to globalization. This chapter introduces and investigates the entire

organizational transformation process to globalization. It starts with

emphasizing the necessity of moving local businesses' practices to a global

market with the highlight of the major driving forces for globalization.

Furthermore this chapter examines a number of vital issues that may

strongly impact the final outcomes of the entire transformation process.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 43

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

These issues include main obstacles, resistance to change, and risk factors

associated with the transformation process. Moreover this chapter proposes

a conceptual framework with the objective of providing a good

comprehension of the involved factors in transformation with their

relationships. The last section of this chapter focuses on examining and

exploring the foremost transformation maturity stages, readiness, adoption,

diffusion, and retrospective.

Introduction

For the past decade, globalization has been a universal and popular topic in a wide

range of academic teaching and research and also of some organizational

experimentation. In today's economical environment, the word "globalization"

became one of the most attention-grabbing and frequently used terms and

recently engrossed a great deal of consideration not only from business sectors

but also from governmental institutions, academia, and even non-profit organiza-

tions around the globe. From a purely business perspective, globalization is

necessary for organizations to gain a competitive edge and to take advantages

of the new ever-growing Internet global market.

Globalization occurs when business companies decide to expand their business

practices and processes beyond their national or local boundaries and take part

in the emerging global economy. As a result, organizations will present them-

selves in foreign markets whether physically and/or virtually to target and reach

global customers and compete internationally. Hence globalization is the name

that has been given to the social, economic, and political processes that have

produced the characteristic conditions of contemporary existence. This percep-

tion has made it possible to begin to imagine the world as a single, global space

linked by a wide array of technological, economic, social, and cultural forces

(Appadurai, 1996).

So globalization can be defined as the integration of the world's culture,

economy, and infrastructure through transnational investment, rapid proliferation

of communication and information technologies, and the impacts of free-market

forces on local, regional, and national economies (Cvetkovich & Kellner, 1997).

From a business perspective, globalization is the process of internationalization

of business practices and existence to reach a global market with almost no

limitations. From past experience, it has been confirmed that this kind of

transformation process is difficult, costly, and risky simply because it involves a

number of imperative issues that must be well-planned and managed for a

successful result. Some of these issues include product/service adaptation for

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !44 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

the new global market with a wide diversity of cultures, the adoption and diffusion

of new technologies and innovations coupled with the necessary culture change,

and the essential resources needed for the transformation.

Therefore the organizational transformation process to globalization implies a

number of problems, commonly including investigating the new global markets,

complying with different international legislations and laws, adopting and utilizing

new technologies, and managing and mitigating the natural resistance to the

necessary human and organizational culture change. Hence globalization, as a

new business approach, requires a new way of thinking, understanding the new

users' requirements, and comprehending the new market environment. Global-

ization arrived on the e-world scene with a number of new concepts, such as

denationalization and virtual organizations that required a totally new way of

planning and conducting business. It also arrived with strong emphasis on a

number of the existing effective concepts, such as customer satisfaction, cost

reduction, and product quality improvement and gave them more prevalence and

prominence.

In summary the organizational transformation process to globalization is a

serious and risky procedure that may impact on the entire organization. There-

fore it must be well understood, planned, and managed for fruitful results and that

is, indeed, the focus of this chapter.

In general this chapter aims to provide organizations that are considering the

move to globalization with clear understanding of the entire transformation

process and all the prerequisites for a successful transition. It starts with a full

explanation of what is involved in the process followed by a comprehensive

investigation of the key success factors that may impact on the process. Also this

chapter discusses some of the common problems that might face management

and workers during the process. We hope that both managers and researchers

can find this chapter helpful and useful for their intended projects and use it as

a transformation guideline.

The Necessity of Globalization

Moving to a new working environment such as globalization is considered a major

organizational change. The process of the transformation to globalization is a

mission with many problems. It has been proven to be a risky, costly, painful, and

unpredictable exercise. It is a major and difficult task to achieve because it has

to deal with both organizational and human culture change. The question facing

us now is, do we need the transformation?

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 45

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Organizations that are willing to adopt a new business approach and/or introduce

a new technology to their current environment must have a very strong and good

reason(s) as to why they need to change their existing work culture. While

innovation requires creativity, it also involves a great deal of hard work

(Humphrey, 2000). Organizational changes should be introduced to answer some

needs and/or to solve business problem(s).

Consequently all people behind the transformation - adopters, senior manage-

ment, and decision makers - have to know not only "what" but also "why" they

need to go through the transformation process and, hence, they must have a

compelling and persuasive reason(s) to be able to "sell" the project to everyone

involved. People need to know "why" they have to change their way of doing

things in order to be supportive and enthusiastic to the change. They need to not

only realize the necessity and the importance of the change but also the benefits

and value of sharing that change with their organization.

Sultan and Chan (2000) declare that, over the last 20 years, many of the changes

in organizations have been predominantly driven by two factors: globalization and

technology. Hence moving businesses to global markets have increasingly

played a critical role in shaping and influencing the success of companies in many

industries.

It is increasingly clear that the move to globalization and adopting the Internet and

e-business technologies is the ultimate way to cope with the rapidly changing

business needs. Traditional localized organizations started realizing the great

benefits that others in the industry were gaining by shifting their business

activities to a global environment.

In addition adopting new business approaches and technologies has a significant

contribution in market position and business revenue. Business has only two

basic functions, marketing and innovation that produce results; all the rest are

cost (Drucker, 1974). Today and more than ever before, a strong market position

must be based on an organization's market and technical competence (Humphrey,

2000).

Driving Forces for Globalization

Globalization as a revolutionary business approach has emerged as a direct result

of many driving forces that interact with each other and establish an integrated

impact on the development of global business activities. Undoubtedly the

emergence of new communications and information technologies has signifi-

cantly reduced the existing physical, social and political barriers that may limit

business firms to exchange and trade at a global scale. These technologies have

accelerated the process of cultural, social, and environmental change toward the

new ways of thinking of trading and competing globally. Information technology

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !46 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

improves the organizational ability to conduct and manage business at multiple

locations across the globe (Robertson, 1992). The rapid development and

utilization of the international network (Internet) and associated technologies

have increased the speed of information transformation among countries in the

world that economizes the cost and time to transmit the information of the

international trade transactions.

Besides the huge advances in technology, international trade legislations and

regulations can form a strong obstacle for organizations to move to globalization

by expanding and trading in different countries. Fortunately many countries

around the world have realized the importance of globalization and its positive

role in enhancing the country's economic conditions. According to a United

Nations survey (United Nations, 2004) during the last decade, more than 150

countries have made a large number of serious changes in their law and

legislations that govern international trade. Some of these changes involved

liberalizing a country's foreign investment regulations to make it easier for

foreign companies to enter their markets. These changes have also resulted in

a considerable reduction in international tariff rates and investment parries.

Additionally, many countries have also removed or at least reduced the financial

restrictions to foreign direct investment (Jin-young, 2002).

In addition to all the above, there are many other driving forces that may

contribute to the development of globalization, including a desire by people to

take advantage of the opportunities provided by interactions with other societies

through global trades, the continuous improvements in communication and

transportation technologies, global economic growth, pressure for quality im-

provement and cost reduction, and declining international trade barriers. Buchanan

and Huczynski (1997) conclude that factors such as customer requirements,

trade barriers, competition, emerging markets, environmental concerns, political

pressures, and technology can form strong driving forces that may influence

organizations to undergo serious changes such as the transformation to global-

ization.

Moving to Globalization is Problematic

Despite the fact that the transformation to globalization has become one of the

dominant forces in the e-world today, there is still a large number of organizations

that have never considered, let alone completed, the transformation. For them

the adoption of the Internet, e-commerce, and web technologies implies a

number of problems, commonly including adoption and diffusion of new tech-

nologies and resistance to the necessary organizational culture change (Henderson-

Sellers & Serour, 2000).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 47

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Therefore the main transformation problems can be categorized further into two

main streams. The first relates to the effect and the impact of the various key

success factors, including human, organizational, technological, environmental,

business, and contextual factors. The second relates to the planning and

management of the entire transformation process. Experience shows that

improper planning and poor management are among the major reasons contrib-

uting to the transformation's failures.

Risks Associated with Transformation

Due to the fact that the process of transforming organizations to global markets

involves a considerable amount of research, investment, and organizational and

human culture change, it must have some risks associated with both the required

culture change and the technology itself with the uncertainties of the competitive

marketplace.

New technologies such as Internet, web services, and mobile computing are

considered the foremost facilitating power and driving force for globalization. As

a result, one of the most challenging issues is the possible risk involved in

mismanaging people's change during the introduction of new technologies.

Therefore management must do everything in their capacity not only to fully

understand the associated risks involved but also plan to eliminate or mitigate

those risks. Furthermore Humphrey (2000) has stated that high technology is

always risky and the search for a technical solution confronting business

problems always faces the highest risks of all. He also stated that behind any

successful project, there are invariably a few key technical decisions that can

make the difference between success and failure. Two-thirds of all new product

development funds are spent on failures (Humphrey, 1997).

Main Obstacles for Moving to Globalization

With every introduction of any new business approach and/or adopting new

technologies, there will always be a number of obstacles that prevent or reduce

the chance of pursuing the implementation of the new approach (moving to

globalization in this context) and/or the adoption of such new technologies. These

obstacles could be related to, and/or be initiated by, any number of organizational

internal and/or external factors. External factors may include the different

international political, economic, and legal systems and, also, the existence of

different cultures such as social culture, languages, and religion.

Some examples of the internal factors are inflexible organizational culture,

hierarchical organizational structure, lack of management commitment and

support, human resistance to change, and insufficient resources needed for the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !48 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

transformation. Some examples of the external factors are commitment to

external environment critical changes and constraints of regulatory, government,

and political issues. For a successful organizational move to global markets,

champions and supporters behind the move should not only identify all possible

obstacles but also work hard to defeat them or at least mitigate them to eliminate

and/or minimize their negative impact on the whole process.

Some other obstacles are:

• No compelling reasons for the transformation.

• People's resistance to change and adopting new technologies.

• The conflict of interest between stakeholders - mismanagement of expec-

tations.

• Commitment to critical environmental changes (for example, Y2K, Euro

conversion).

• Lack of globalization awareness, knowledge, education and expertise.

• The ambiguity and uncertainty of the final achievements.

• Organizations are not realizing the benefits of moving to global markets.

• Heavy investment in existing systems.

• The necessity of organizational and personal culture changes.

• Time, cost of training, and tools required to diffuse and master the new

technologies.

• The lack of well-defined transformation guidelines to assist organizations

in planning and managing their move to globalization.

• Lack of commitment.

• Lack of expertise on new technologies.

• Misunderstanding the organizational culture change.

• Misunderstanding the different human cultures in global markets.

• Changes in organization's environment such as merging or restructuring.

The Need for Transformation Guidelines

While it is clear that the transformation to globalization has been highly

successful for many companies, there are still a large number of organizations

that have not yet transformed. This is a reflection of the traditional bell shaped

adoption curve in which 50% of companies are "followers," or "laggards," in the

adoption of any new business approach and/or new technology.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 49

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Despite the above fact, there is no doubt that there is a great number of

organizations that are interested in moving to the globalization era but do not

know "what" is involved, "why and how" to do it, "where" to begin, and "what"

is the first step. And how long will it take? Therefore these organizations are in

a desperate need of guidelines to answer their questions and lead them through

the entire transformation process. It is well known, as derived from some

industrial projects, that the organizational transforming process to globalization

is not a "big bang" exercise; rather, it is a long, costly, risky, and extremely

difficult exercise. No organization can expect to move from a local to a global

business environment without high investments, productivity reduction, and the

challenge of critical risk factors.

Senior and middle management find it hard to proceed when there is (still) very

little guidance available from real-world experience. Despite the fact that the

advantages of globalization have been accepted by the mainstream of the

business industry, the process of transforming organizations to a global environ-

ment is considered a paradigm shift that requires not only the willingness and

commitment from everyone within the organizations, but also the understanding,

realization, and readiness for major culture changes. There is a need for

guidelines to get organizations from their traditional business environment to one

in which globalization paradigm is dominant.

Therefore the process of the organizational transformation to globalization needs

to be well organized, planned, phased, and very well managed. Also it can't be

ad hoc or chaotic; instead, it must be very well engineered. Thus in the context

of moving business organizations to a totally global business environment,

following transformation guidelines specifically constructed to assist them in

planning and managing their move may enhance the process of managing

people's natural resistance to change and increase the chance of a successful

adoption and diffusion of e-commerce and internet technologies. Zakaria and

Yusof (2001) emphasize the significance of following transformation guidelines

by arguing that a successful organizational transformation is a result of thorough

strategic planning, proper implementation, and cooperation by all groups, to-

gether with high commitment and minimal resistance.

The paramount guidance that could be offered would be a means by which the

technology insertion (such as Internet, e-commerce, and web services) would be

accomplished. In other words, a process needs to be used and followed to support

the transformation to global markets and also support the adoption and diffusion

of new technologies. While some companies have successfully moved to

globalization, the process they followed has never been written down, published,

or otherwise disseminated. It is likely that the transformation processes followed

have been ad hoc and are unlikely to ever be formalized.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !50 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The Transformation Conceptual

Framework

Here we propose a conceptual framework for the transformation process with

the intention of providing a good understanding of the involved components and

their relationships.

A conceptual framework is a graphical and descriptive presentation of the

process at hand. It illustrates all involved components, giving each a descriptive

name, and explores their supposed relationships (Miles & Huberman, 1984). It

is usually constructed to assist managers in defining their process focus and

boundaries as it:

• Explains the main dimensions to be studied.

• Illustrates the key factors.

• Shows the presumed relationships between factors.

Figure 1 represents a graphical and descriptive conceptual framework for the

process of the organizational transformation to globalization in order to define the

scope, the boundaries, and the main objectives of the process. It shows six

double-lined rectangles representing the main groups of factors that may

influence the transformation process and must, consequently, be well planned

and managed for a successful mission. These groups are:

• Human factors.

• Organizational factors.

• Technological factors.

• Environmental factors.

• Business and IT strategic factors.

• Contextual factors.

There are two groups of factors, human and organizational, that lie inside the

organization's boundary, and we call them the "intra-organizational" factors

(represented by lined-shaded rectangles). The other four groups of factors,

technological, business, environmental, and contextual, lie outside the organiza-

tional boundary, and we call them the "extra-organizational" factors (repre-

sented by shaded rectangles). Also, this framework specifies the relationships,

or the interactions, between all the different framework components. The

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 51

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

framework assumes some relationships between the transformation endeavor

and all other components, as indicated by the arrows. These relationships are

purely logical, such as the impact of human and organizational factors on the

process.

The following section lists the major intra- and extra-organizational factors that

may influence the transformation process to globalization.

Human Factors

• Human culture and the necessary culture change.

• Existence of transformation champions.

• Involvement of customers in the transformation process.

• Misunderstanding the critical requirement for different human culture in

globalization.

• Appropriate communications channels between the organization and its

customers.

• Appropriate communications among distributed organization's teams.

• Workflow and groupware (employees effectively working in teams).

• Need for high-quality and accepted products by global customers.

• Flexibility of work culture to change in order to master the new business

approach.

Figure 1. Transformation conceptual framework

Technological

Factors

Environmental

Factors

Business & IT strategic

Factors

Impact

Impact Impact

Contextual

Factors

Impact

The Organizational Transformation

(Readiness, Adoption, Diffusion, Retrospective)

Organizational Factors

Human Factors

Change Impact

Impact Change

Technological

Factors

Environmental

Factors

Business & IT strategic

Factors

Impact

Impact Impact

Contextual

Factors

Impact

The Organizational Transformation

(Readiness, Adoption, Diffusion, Retrospective)

Organizational Factors

Human Factors

Change Impact

Impact Change

Human Factors

Organizational Factors

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !52 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Organizational Factors

• Management commitment for the new business approach.

• Delivering products and services on-time and within budget to global

customers.

• Willingness and capability of carrying out organizational change.

• Flattened organizational structure.

• Flexibility of organizational culture.

• The existence of internal research and development policy to support and

promote the organizational move to a new technology.

• Technological awareness and its adoption.

• Resource availability includes budget and people.

• Demands on management performance.

Environmental Factors

• Critical external changes such as GST, Euro conversion, and the Y2K

problem.

• Tough competition because of new market dynamics.

• Business acquisitions such as takeovers or mergers with other businesses.

• Changes in regulatory forces such as government legislations.

• Result of investigations in regard to globalization.

• Influence of globalization success stories.

Technological Factors

• Necessity of new technologies, including Internet, e-commerce, web

services, and mobile computing.

• Availability of technology elements.

• Accessibility.

• Complexity.

• Trialability.

• Compatibility with organizational environment.

• Suitability to business requirements.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 53

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Maintainability.

• Affordability.

• Capability (an enabler of other technologies being used, such as the

Internet, intranet, and extranet).

Business Factors

• Corporate objectives and strategic plans.

• Business expansion.

• Growth in business.

• Business continuity.

• Reengineering of existing business processes to achieve radical improve-

ments.

• Cost effectiveness.

• Moving to distributed systems environment or enterprise-wide computing.

• Adoption of the Internet/intranet-based operational environment.

Contextual Factors

Contextual factors represent any other related factors that are not listed in the

above groups, but they may influence the transformation process including:

• Global market competition.

• Global cultural requirements.

• Global multilingual markets.

• Global time zones.

• Virtual existence.

• E-commerce and multi currency.

• E-commerce and human behavior with credit cards transactions.

The Transformation Process

This section focuses mainly on the theory and practice of the entire process of

moving organizations from localization to globalization. The major objective of

this section is to provide organizations with a complete understanding of the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !54 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

major stages of the transformation process lifecycle. Such an understanding can

guide organizations in planning and managing their move to globalization and

effectively competing globally.

In general going through an organizational change and/or adopting new technolo-

gies must add a tangible value to the organization that is undertaking it. The

organizational move to globalization is the process of turning new ideas and

concepts into creative and useable methods and techniques that assist organiza-

tions in expanding their marketplaces and extending their customer base around

the entire world.

In order for business organizations to solve the problem of ever-changing

business requirements, meeting the ever-increasing customer demands and

expectations and enhancing the way they do business, they need to change their

existing way of thinking to be able to achieve the most appropriate solution for

the problem(s) at hand and/or work out a better way to do things. To cope with

today's global e-market and to gain competitive advantage, organizations need

to look for new and better ways to do their business and also more effectively

to stay ahead of their competitors.

To do so, they need to plan to adopt and utilize new technologies or innovations

that may enable them to achieve their goals. First organizations need to

understand their existing culture and work out the required changes to become

familiar and comfortable with the new environment to which they are aiming to

move. Once they have succeeded with the shift to the new environment, they will

be able to adopt and utilize the new technologies much more effectively. Also,

with the achievement of culture change, they will be able to enhance the way

they do things and implement these new changes in the most appropriate way.

So the transformation process can be thought of as a road map between the

organizational current and desired states as shown in Figure 2. Organizations that

are aiming to move their traditional local business practices to a global business

environment must comprehend and be fully aware of the different maturity states

of their process.

Figure 2. Transformation process, the road map between the organizational

current and the desired states

Traditional

Business

Environment

Global

Business

Environment

Current State Desired State

The Transformation

Process

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 55

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Bridging the Gap Between Current and

Desired States

From a different perspective, the transformation process can also be viewed as

a road bridging the gap between where the organization currently is in terms of

business practices and where they are intended to be as illustrated in Figure 3.

As demonstrated in Figure 3, the transformation process aims, through its four

major stages, to move organizations from their current common practice

environment to their desired and hoped best-practice environment. Often efforts

and resources needed to adopt new technologies, such as the Internet and Web

services, to close the organization's practice gap are difficult and costly.

Additionally and as shown in Figure 3, during the process of transformation, cost,

resources, time, and effort will rise considerably and, at the same time,

productivity will drop as people are more overloaded and busy learning the new

ways. The entire process can be long, unpredictable, risky, and burdened with

troubles due to the necessary culture change and the serious decisions to be

made. All people who are involved in the transformation need to understand their

current intra-organizational culture and perform the required changes in order to

adopt and optimize the use of new approaches to conduct their new business

processes (Serour & Henderson-Sellers, 2002).

Once organizations have completed their transformation successfully, cost,

resources, time and effort will continue to drop and productivity and revenue will

escalate rapidly. At that time, the organization's desired state becomes their

current state. The transformation process will continue to achieve further

improvement and optimization and ensure people are kept up-to-date with the

Figure 3. Transformation process bridges the gap between current and

desired practice states

The Transformation

Process

Current

State

Desired

State

Readiness

Adoption

Diffusion

Retrospective

Desired state becomes Current state

Cost

Resources Time

Efforts The Transformation

Process

Current

State

Desired

State

Readiness

Adoption

Diffusion

Retrospective

Desired state becomes Current state

Cost

Resources Time

Efforts

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !56 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

newly adopted technologies. Once organizations have arrived at their new

business environment, keeping up to date with the newly adopted technology

becomes a separate yet important issue.

Transformation Maturity Stages

(Readiness, Adoption, Diffusion and Retrospective (RADaR))

To illustrate the extent and the scope of the entire transformation process, we

state that the complete process of transformation may go through a life cycle of

four maturity stages: Readiness, Adoption, Diffusion, and Retrospective

(RADaR). These stages are focusing on different aspects of the whole process

and aiming to achieve different goals. In other words RADaR has four different

stages that represent the four different transformation maturity states that

organizations may go through in an iterative and incremental manner in order to

move their business practices to global markets. The following section will briefly

introduce these major stages followed by a detailed description of each stage.

• Readiness: Focuses on transitioning both management and development

teams to a totally global business environment and achieving the necessary

culture changes.

• Adoption: Focuses on assessing, evaluating and acquiring the appropriate

and needed technology elements, such as Web services and e-commerce,

middleware, databases, and so forth to a developing organization's new

software systems.

• Diffusion: Focuses on enforcing the principles and conceptions of global-

ization, deploying and spreading out the adopted technology elements. Also

this stage aims to stop people from getting back to their old ways and habits

to perform business processes.

• Retrospective: focuses on assessing and evaluating the transformation

achievements and finding any defects for corrections. It also aims to define

any possibilities for further improvements, enhancements, and optimizations.

The process of transformation starts with the first crucial and important stage

(Readiness) that focuses on getting the organization ready for the new

paradigm. This stage involves a number of activities aimed at making the

organization familiar and comfortable with the new business and technology

environment before any attempt to implement and disseminate the new technol-

ogy is made. This initial attainment becomes the pre-condition for organizations

to successfully complete the rest of their transformation process to accomplish

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 57

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

what they have planned for moving to global markets and adopting and diffusing

new technologies.

The subsequent stages (Adoption and Diffusion) focus on the acceptance and

dissemination of global technology products such as Web services and e-

commerce. Through the final stage of the process (Retrospective), organiza-

tions will be able to assess the whole situation retrospectively and draw attention

to any area for improvement, keeping the entire organization updated with the

Table 1. The organizational transformation maturity stages

Figure 4. The organizational transformation to globalization

Evaluation and continuous improvement

Keeping up-to-date with new technologies

RETROSPECTIVE

(Post-conditions)

Deploying the adopted technologies in practice

Stop people from going back to old habits

DIFFUSION

(Technology Dissemination)

Technology assessment, selection and

implementation. Education and training on

new technologies

ADOPTION

(Technology Acceptance)

Moving organizations to a global environment

with culture change and eliminating obstacles

READINESS

(Pre-conditions)

Main Activities

Transformation

Maturity stages

Evaluation and continuous improvement

Keeping up-to-date with new technologies

RETROSPECTIVE

(Post-conditions)

Deploying the adopted technologies in practice

Stop people from going back to old habits

DIFFUSION

(Technology Dissemination)

Technology assessment, selection and

implementation. Education and training on

new technologies

ADOPTION

(Technology Acceptance)

Moving organizations to a global environment

with culture change and eliminating obstacles

READINESS

(Pre-conditions)

Main Activities

Transformation

Maturity stages

Readiness

(Moving to Global

Environment)

Technology

Adoption

(Internet, Web services,

e-Commerce etc.)

Technology

Diffusion

(Utilizing

adopted

technologies)

Culture

Change

Adopted

Technology

Deployed

Technology

Improvements

Compelling Reason(s)

For Transformation

Retrospective

(Improvement and

Update)

Readiness

(Moving to Global

Environment)

Technology

Adoption

(Internet, Web services,

e-Commerce etc.)

Technology

Diffusion

(Utilizing

adopted

technologies)

Culture

Change

Adopted

Technology

Deployed

Technology

Improvements

Compelling Reason(s)

For Transformation

Retrospective

(Improvement and

Update)

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !58 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

adopted technology. Table 1 shows our perception of the entire transformation

process with its four maturity stages.

It is worth noting here that within each stage - and sometimes between stages

- there is a degree of iterative, incremental, and parallelism. In other words the

activities and tasks within each stage can be carried out and achieved in an

iterative, incremental, and parallel manner that provide organizations with more

flexibility and process control. Figure 4 illustrates these four major stages with

their contracts.

Readiness Stage

Readiness, as the first stage of the transformation process, focuses on getting the

organization familiar with the new business environment and carrying out the

associated changes as the precondition for the adoption and diffusion of new

technologies. It is mainly related to the required organizational and human culture

changes in order to obtain and maintain people's acceptance and senior

management support and commitment. It deals with all IT professionals in terms

of changing their culture and their way of thinking about business practices. It

intends to gain people's high morals and willingness to positively participate in the

transformation process.

The main activities considered necessary to be carried out during this stage to

prepare the organization to move to a global business environment are:

• Identify and understand the compelling reasons for the transformation.

• Understand and assess the current organization state (local state).

• Understand and assess the desired organization state (global state).

• Analyze the major key success factors for the transformation.

• Realize the required organizational and human culture change.

• Obtain and maintain management and customer support and commitment.

• Provide management, workers, and software developers with formal and

adequate introduction to globalization with all associated issues and also

provide them with appropriate education and training.

• Identify the obstacles and barriers for the transformation.

• Sell to everyone the transformation project with its associated changes.

• Construct a transformation plan and secure the required resources.

• Conduct a comprehensive cost-benefit analysis and possible financial risk

analysis involved in transformation.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 59

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The pre-conditions for this stage are the existence and the full understanding of

the organization's compelling reason for moving to globalization and the official

approval from senior management as a commitment to start the process.

During this stage, management and information technology (IT) teams will carry

out a number of activities in order to define and assess their current and desired

states. They start first with assessing the current organization's state in terms

of available resources and its IT capabilities. Then it is necessary to assess the

desired state requirements in order to determine and estimate the required

resources to carry out the transformation. Further assessment activities are

focused on assessing people in terms of their skills, knowledge, and willingness.

Beside these assessing activities, there are other activities, including gaining

management support, defeating people's resistance to change, providing the

appropriate education and training, and increasing the awareness of any required

new technologies.

The major post-condition of this stage is changing the organization's and the

individual's culture to be able to adopt to their new business environment and

utilize the required new technologies. Other important deliverables from this

stage include, but not are limited to, maintaining full senior and mid-management

support, minimizing people's fear, uncertainty, and resistance to change, allocat-

ing all required resources, including people, and full analysis studies of the risk

factors involved, as well as the various key success factors that can influence

the entire transformation process.

Adoption Stage

The adoption stage usually starts when the previous stage (readiness) is almost

complete, with the release of its deliverables that become the pre-conditions for

this stage. The major activities of this stage are concerned with determining,

choosing, evaluating, and purchasing the technology products that are required

for managing the new business processes. No doubt IT plays a vital role not only

during the transformation process to globalization but also to manage and

conduct the new business processes. Information technology in general is often

seen by management as an essential means to advance and compete in the global

market. There should be a desire on the part of the organization, particularly its

senior management, to adopt new ways of doing things.

In the context of corporate business enabled by IT, as Hammer and Champy

(1994) have so concisely highlighted, IT can be a creative cause for new business

processes rather than merely supporting existing business processes. Adopting

a new technology can be used not only to simply automate what we do, but to do

totally new things to dramatically improve what we do currently (for example,

moving business practices to globalization). Choosing the appropriate technology

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !60 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

products will assist the organization to feel confident in moving to a new business

environment. In addition IT teams within organizations must select the most

appropriate and flexible technology products that can be, if needed, tailored or

customized to suit the organization's new environment and to fulfill its business

and customer needs.

An organization's perception of technology deals with the way organizations

usually select, value, and assess the new technology to be adopted. It must add

value and help the organization solve its business problems and achieve its

objectives. Technology is no value of its own; it has to be effectively integrated

within the organization to increase its competitive edge (Zahn, 1995).

The main activities that are considered necessary to be carried out during this

stage of adopting new technologies are:

• Identifying the appropriate and required technology products.

• Choosing the most proper and appropriate vendors.

• Professionally evaluating the selected products.

• Recommending the most suitable products with justifications.

• Acquiring the recommended products.

• Providing adequate education and training on the selected products.

Another important activity of this stage is providing the technical individuals with

the adequate and appropriate education and full hands-on training to enhance

their knowledge and skills, in order to efficiently and comfortably use and master

the new technology tools such as creating and marinating the organizational Web

site. Different training methods and techniques should be used to train people to

accordingly satisfy their needs (Goldberg & Rubin, 1995). For example, in-house

training and education should be conducted at the early stage of transformation

to introduce the new technology to people.

From real-life projects experience, introducing an innovation or a new technology

to people in their own environment for the first time has a positive impact on

people's acceptance and increases the chance of their continuation. After

passing the hard stage of gaining the people's acceptance and commitment,

outside training sessions and e-learning can be more advantageous where people

can be trained in a different environment, away from their daily business

interruptions.

Special consideration should be given to selecting the most appropriate training

company for the importance of their crucial role in accomplishing a successful

transformation. The organization should assess and evaluate the training com-

pany on every possible aspect and characteristic, including experience, profes-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 61

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

sionalism, reputation, reliability, accountability, availability, suitability, and their

ongoing support even after completion of the training courses.

Diffusion Stage

The diffusion stage mainly focuses on the deployment, spreading out, and

enforcing of the new business practices and adopted technology across the entire

organization. This stage usually starts when the previous stage (adoption) is

almost complete. The major preconditions for the diffusion stage are acquiring

and installing the adopted technology tools and techniques.

Before starting this stage people should be enthusiastic, feeling comfortable with

the new business practices, reengineered business processes, and Internet

technologies. Also they have received all the required and adequate professional

education and training to enhance and upgrade their knowledge and skills to

confidently think and work in the new global e-business way. At this point, the

organization should be ready to embark on its first transformation pilot project for

a particular product(s), area, or type of service. Further special training sessions,

such as just-in-time, can be conducted during this stage to handhold employees

and software the developers as they embark on their first project. The major

activities of this stage are concerned with enforcing the new way of thinking and

working in the global market environment.

During this stage, the transformation champion and the in-house support teams

will be working together closely with everyone involved to offer any support at

any time. These teams will be observing people as they are going through the first

increment of the entire transformation process to report any difficulties or

problems they might experience and plan to resolve them very quickly. For

example, if these teams realized that they selected an inappropriate tool or

technology, they may iterate back to the adoption stage to take an appropriate

action to resolve the issue. The main activities considered necessary to be

carried out during this stage are:

• Carefully selecting the first transformation project (first increment) as a

start to get everyone familiar with the new business culture. This project

must be important enough to gain management attention, and simple enough

to implement so as to enhance people's self-confidence and enthusiasm.

• Providing full training and mentoring, such as Just-In-Time, for software

application developers, system users, and customer service teams.

• Monitoring and supporting people during their first increment of the

transformation process.

• Taking any appropriate decisions and/or actions when needed.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !62 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Encouraging and rewarding people for doing good work.

• Observing and documenting everything for evaluation and further improve-

ment.

• Reporting progress and any other issues to management.

Retrospective Stage

In general retrospective (occasionally referred to as post-project review) is a

formal review of any process or project that occurs at the end of that project so

as to answer the following questions:

• Did we achieve what we set out to do?

• If not, where did we go wrong? And what should be done?

• If yes, what is next? How can we repeat what we have done again?

• What are the lessons learned and experience gained?

• Can we identify areas for improvements?

Retrospective (Kerth, 2001) is the final stage of the transformation process; it

focuses on reviewing and examining the whole process to report the achieve-

ments against the original plans and also to answer the above questions. During

this stage the organization should reward the people who were behind the

transformation, such as the transition champions and in-house support teams, as

a way of encouragement and appreciation.

Senior management should also announce and launch the new business changes

in a formal manner in order to emphasis their importance and to highlight the

achievement and their dedication to the new way of global e-business practices.

A special celebration event organized by senior management inviting everyone

within the organization, including customers, can be an effective way of getting

the management message through loud and clear to everyone involved.

In summary the major activities of this stage are concerned with examining the

whole process to identify and report the following:

• A collective understanding of what happened and why.

• All successful actions and steps to be repeated next time.

• Lessons learned and what to do differently next time.

• Any problems and/or difficulties encountered during the process.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 63

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Any lack of enthusiasm and/or self-confidence within individuals.

• All possible opportunities for further improvement.

• Acknowledgment and appreciation of accomplishments.

• Rewards for all champions involved with the transformation.

• Plans to announce and celebrate the completion of the transformation

process to globalization.

• Beyond retrospective (continuous improvement).

• After carrying out the retrospective stage and arriving at the organization's

desired state (global state), this desired state then becomes the organization's

current state. By examining and analyzing the recommendation and the

action list produced during the retrospective stage, the organization will be

able to plan for perfection and further improvement. With a successful

transformation to globalization the organization will feel confident and be

capable of assessing and adopting new business opportunities that benefit

the entire organization as a result of competing globally.

Summary

This chapter introduced the process of the organizational transformation to

globalization and e-business environment along with related concepts, stages,

and activities. The main goal of this chapter was to provide a broad understanding

regarding the entire transformation process that can assist the reader in

comprehending the effect of various factors such as human and organizational

factors in details. This chapter discussed and covered the following transition

concerns:

• What do we mean by the organizational transformation process to global-

ization?

• What and how can various factors influence the success of the whole

transformation process?

• What are the main obstacles for the transition to globalization (ethical and

technological)?

• How can we defeat these obstacles?

• What is the ultimate way to plan and manage the transformation process?

• How can we measure the outcomes or the end result of the entire process

(evaluation and lessons learned)?

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !64 Serour

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

References

Appadurai, A. (1996). Modernity at large: Cultural dimensions of globaliza-

tion, Public Worlds, Vol. 1. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.

Buchanan & Hucynski (1997). Organizational behaviour: An introductory

text. London: Prentice Hall.

Cvetkovich, A., & Kellner, D. (1997). Introduction: Thinking global and local. In

A. Cvetkovich & D. Kellner (Eds.), Articulating the global and the

local: Globalization and cultural studies. Boulder, CO: Westview.

Drucker, P. (1974). Management, tasks, responsibilities, practice. New

York: Harper & Row.

Goldberg, A., & Rubin, K.S. (1995). Succeeding with objects: Decision

frameworks for project management. Addison Wesley.

Hammer, M., & Champy, J. (1994). Reengineering the corporation: A

manifesto for business revolution. London: Nicholas Brealey Publishing.

Henderson-Sellers, B., & Serour, M.K. (2000). Creating a process for transitioning

to object technology. Proceedings of the Seventh Asia-Pacific Software

Engineering Conference (APSEC 2000), (pp. 436-440).

Humphrey, W.S. (1997). Managing technical people-innovation, teamwork,

and the software process (6th ed.). Addison Wesley Longman.

Humphrey, W.S. (2000). Introduction to the team software process. Addison

Wesley Longman.

Kerth, N.L. (2001). Project retrospectives: A handbook for team revise.

New York: Dorest House.

Miles, M.B., & Huberman, A.M. (1984). Qualitative data analysis: A

sourcebook of new methods. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications.

Robertson, R. (1992). Social theory and global culture. London: Sage.

Serour, M.K., & Henderson-Sellers, B. (2002). The role of organisational

culture on the adoption and diffusion of software engineering process: An

empirical study. Proceedings of the Adoption and Diffusion of IT in an

Environment of Critical Changes, IFIP TG8.6, (pp. 76-88).

Sultan, F., & Chan, L. (2000). The adoption of new technology: The case of

object-oriented computing software companies. IEEE Transactions on

Engineering Management, 47(1), 106-126.

United Nations. (2004). U.N. report. Retrieved on February 16, 2004, from

http://www.un.org/esa/global.htm

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !The Organizational Transformation Process to Globalization 65

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Zahn, E. (1995). Gegenstand und zweck des technologiemanagements in:

Handbuch technologiemanagements. Stuttgart, Germany: Schaffer-

Poeschel.

Zakaria, N., & Yusof, S. (2001). The Role of human and organisational culture

in the context of technological change. IEEE Software, 83-87.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !66 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter IV

Transition from

Manual to IT-Based

Documents Transacting

Business Process:

Performance Measurements

System as the Key

Parthasarathi Banerjee

NISTADS, India

Abstract

A medium manufacturing firm had since beginning organized itself around

quality-driven transactions in information documents. This learning in

documents transaction helped it in scoring large gains in productivity, in

cost-cutting, and in evolving a sound performance measurement system.

This set the norms of work. However globalization opened up opportunities

and threats. The old system had sufficient information technology (IT)

backing but it failed in motivating employees adopting a global information

challenge. In order to compete internationally through differentiated

products with high quality, this firm then reengineered its manufacturing.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 67

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Market information substituted quality as driver of information transactions.

The goal of the project was to Web-enable the firm. The IT project had to

define business transactions as the unit, which would define transactions

in information in object language first and subsequently as transactions in

documents. Changes were then brought at three levels: the first, essential

level was based on business transactions among employees supporting the

information system, which in turn generated business documents. Essential-

level business transactions formed as a second level cared for the nuclei of

business processes and could also constitute a new performance

measurement system. Browser-enabled communication proved acceptable

to employees who had previous learning in information transactions. The

firm gained immensely through this novel mode of IT application.

Background

Liberalization and globalization have sent a message to entrepreneurs that

opportunities for creating new business have opened up. There have been

contrasting views saying that threats to business increased along with globaliza-

tion. However for creating new business particularly in the form of a small

venture, globalization offered distinct new dimensions in countries such as India.

Threats exist for the old and established business. In consumer products new

business such as in zip fasteners, which we will discuss now, opportunities came

along by way of first opening the vision to a global competitive market and,

second, by exposing an entrepreneur not so much as to resources but to business

and technological opportunities. This is a story about three entrepreneurs who

floated together, in the early years of globalization of Indian economy, a new

small venture to manufacture zip fasteners. This narration testifies how with

technological learning and adoption of information technology as well as contem-

porary management a newly created enterprise could be made a globally

competitive entity. The hero, Mr. V, of this narration is one of the three

entrepreneurs.

Mr. V understood that "learning before doing" was an effective and attractive

mode compared to the "learning by doing." In the transformation of the small

organization from a domestic-centered orientation to a globally looking IT-based

medium-sized knowledge organization with globally distributed manufacturing

facility in about a decade, information-learning proved to be a boon. Previous

learning in information handling during the initial years when the enterprise was

new and small was not IT-based. However knowledge on using information

proved to be context-independent, and this knowledge helped the transition. This

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !68 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

knowledge could not have become effective unless new and novel performance

measures, based on contemporary understanding of performances in a knowl-

edge setting, affected an incentive system, as it were, to induce the employees

of this organization to bring previously learned fundamentals into the new IT

setting. The new performance measurement, known as "motivational" measure-

ment, was a system to induce and affect emotionally the people whom it was

measuring. The system employed a principle called TASK through an informa-

tion system (IS), designed to foster communication-based business transaction.

This information systems-based management thus achieved three things: first, it

utilized previous information learning based on documents transaction; second,

it employed a motivational performance measurement system; and third, this

motivational disposition was brought forth with the direct use of an IS designed

on communication based business transaction as per the DEMO (Dynamic

Essential Modeling of Organizations) model. Perhaps the ease of transition was

facilitated further by the fact that the innovator of new organization was none

other than the owner-entrepreneur, Mr. V, who shared with two other owners

having similar dispensation the leadership of the passage of their privately held

now medium-sized firm.

Background of the Firm

Close to the capital city of India, three entrepreneurs, two of whom had studied

engineering together in a premier institution, launched the firm "G" to manufac-

ture zip fasteners and components back in 1991. One of these three, Mr. V, while

employed as an engineer with a large packaging firm close by, had invented a

novel method of packaging that the firm could make into a very successful

innovation. Mr. V was always restless with new ideas, and yet he has the rare

combination of a matching meticulous care to the details of the system he is laying

out. Novel idea, when matched with detailed systematization, often meets

success. This spirited innovator organized the new unit by calling the two other

partners. With their little capital and scarce knowledge of the exact method

engineering of manufacturing zip fasteners, it was an uphill task. Technological

manufacturing of zip was established, and there was no scope for novelty.

However the organizational aspects and method engineering of the business

process were altogether new to them. Novelty was there in the mode of this

designing of an organization and its business processes. In an otherwise

technologically mundane business, these entrepreneurs set up a knowledge

organization whose key principle was management and learning of information.

This was novel because knowledge organizations are common only in the

technologically advanced areas while this business was on a backward technol-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 69

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

ogy, set up as a small unit with little capital, and the locally available human

resources were largely illiterate. Novelty and the success of this enterprise are

attributable to information-based learning, knowledge communicating, and mo-

tivated IT-based business transactions. In short its novelty has been in its

organization.

The firm G has now two factories, one of which is in the Middle East, and more

than 20 branch offices. In 1995 it had only one factory and six branch offices.

Its gross turnover increased by more than five-fold during 1990-1995, and during

1995-2000 gross turnovers more than tripled (Table 1). The number of employ-

ees, however, did not progress in similar fashion. In fact while output was

steadily rising, the number of employees not only failed to rise but also dropped

significantly in three years. Worker productivity has been rising all these years.

The number of employees had to rise again, however, in 1998-1999 when a new

factory in the Middle East was set up.

We will, however, discuss changes in the domestic manufacturing set-up alone.

Capital intensity of its manufacturing rose continuously. Most significantly upon

which as a start-up, it has remained critically dependent. However cost saving

played a significant part, and so also did the rising worker productivity. capacity

utilization of these machineries, too, rose to reach near-cent percent utilization.

Capacity utilization helped G in enlarging the internal accrual of funds This cost

Table 1. Manufacturing profile of G

Item 1991 1994 1996 1998

Gross turnover, Rs.

Million, (approx.

Rs. 45= U.S. $1)

16.3 65.2 92.4 210.2

Total value of

machinery, Rs.

Million

4.5 19.5 263.2 352.6

Total employees 142 295 270 290

Total salary bill, Rs.

Million

0.4 8.2 22.1 34.6

Energy

consumption, Rs.

Million

0.4 19.6 31.3 56.8

Cost of marketing,

Rs. Million

1.5 8.9 13.6 17.5

Cost of

communication, Rs.

Million

0.1 0.4 0.8 2.5

Capacity utilization,

%

72.5 81.8 98.2 99

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !70 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

saving has been affected through several measures (Table 2). Total input-

inventory holding cost and the total finished holding cost have failed to rise in

proportion to the turnover. Inventory has risen only marginally. Considering the

impossibility of introducing a just-in-time system by a small enterprise located in

a place where public information infrastructure is virtually absent, the achieve-

ment in G has been remarkable. Moreover costs were also saved by reducing the

value of material rejection and by minimizing the necessary movements of pre-

processed output (per unit of output) inside the factory as well as by optimizing

the movement necessary for an output to reach the customer through carefully

located branch offices. Cost of energy, too, did not rise in proportion to the

growth in turnover.

Resources are critical. Initial capital was partly from the entrepreneurs' personal

savings and was partly secured through a term loan from a development bank.

A term loan is costly. In order to expand the business, these entrepreneurs

decided such costs should be minimized. This alone would give them enough

internal accrual. The stock market in India is poorly developed, and the prospect

of raising capital through either an initial public offer (IPO) or through venture

funding was simply zero. In fact the firm G since its inception has largely built

upon internal accrual. It has used both internal accrual and term loan for new

projects while for most others, such as for creating new markets, it has employed

both cost saving and internal accrual (Table 3). The most important resource is,

however, the people. Getting the right people on low wages was impossible, and

in order to have internal accrual, G could not offer market-best salary or could

not create jobs that only graduate engineers could do. G had to start recruiting

fresh hands, not many of whom even had the right kind of education. Nearly 90

percent of their total staff has remained wage-earning workers, with the rest

distributed between marketing and administration. However in recent years

Table 2. Cost aspects of G

Item 1991 1994 1996 1998

Total variable cost,

Rs. Million, (approx.

Rs. 45 = U.S. $1)

9.6 36.1 37.2 56.6

Total input-

inventory holding

cost, Rs. Million

1.8 0.6 3.7 3.8

Total finished output

holding cost, Rs.

Million

0.8 1.4 3.1 3.5

Total value of

material rejection,

Rs. Million

2.1 3.9 3.3 2.1

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 71

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

percentages of total employees as wage-earning workers have come down and

staff engaged in marketing has gone up, though not significantly. The innovative

entrepreneur, Mr. V, quickly had to devise a production set-up that could

simultaneously act as learning benches to these workers. Table 4 indicates the

level of qualifications of the employees. Educational level at entry was in general

so poor that Mr. V devised several schemes for OJT (on the job training), multi-

skilling, design skill, repair and maintenance (RM) skill, and, above all, informa-

tion-handling skill.

Learning to Undertake Information

Transactions

Dynamic competence of an enterprise depends on both the skill base and the

deployment dynamics of the skill base (Banerjee, 2003). In fact dynamics of

deployment, which takes care of multi-tasking and multi-skilling, increases the

competence significantly. The percentage of production workforce that have

Table 3. Sourcing of funds at G

Table 4. Percentage of employees of G with educational background

Source Capital

machinery

New

projects

Development &

Creating new

marketing

Commissioning

R & D

Internal

accrual

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Sale of land,

assets, other

income

Yes

Increasing

equity base

Yes

Term loan Yes Yes

Short-term

borrowal

Yes

Financial

management

Yes

Cost saving Yes Yes Yes

Department Degree in

engineering/above

Diploma in

ITI certificates

(equivalent to

technicians'

certificate)

Less than

ITI

certificate

Design 10 30 30 30

Manufacturing 1 5 20 74

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !72 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

been working on the same or very similar work stations continuously for the last

two years was 94, for the last five years was 85, and for more than the last eight

years was only 30. As a practice nearly half of the workforce switched over to

new workstations in about six years. This took care of multi-skilling. About 10

percent of the workforce was deployed in multi-tasking. Most significantly, up

to five percent of the workforce remained in general diverted for new products

or new projects. Deployment dynamics takes a new dimension when skilled

workers are redeployed from production to the repair and maintenance (RM) and

vice-versa (Fischer, Jungeblut, & Rommermann, 1997). In fact about 50 percent

of RM jobs are taken care of by workers right on the shop floor. However, in

contrast to the Toyota system (Spear & Bowen, 1999) deployment of skilled

workers from RM to marketing never took place, partly because marketing of zip

fasteners does not involve the level of skill required in automobiles. Workers

skilled on the shop floor often get promoted first to the RM department and hence

to the design department As a result the skill component in design, fed by both

considerations of manufacturability and production-maintenance, has remained

very high, although the level of formally qualified graduate engineers in designing

remained low. The firm G could not afford to hire engineers in hordes. Experience

in manufacturing coupled with introduction to formal aspects of engineering and of

the marketing enriched immensely the competence of G in launching of the "best"

and "internationally competitive" own-designed range of products.

About 5 percent of the total employees are in design, of whom 20 percent have

design experience of more than 10 years and about 50 percent have design

experience of about five years. In fact G encouraged workers designing small

inventions right on the shop floor by putting up a system of award and recognition.

Qualification-wise only 10 percent of designers have degrees in engineering

while about 60 percent have only licentiate (lower than a diploma, which is lower

than a degree) or lower exposures. Capital expenditure and man-days spent in

design have been fluctuating, increasing in the year prior to launch of a new

product. About 10 percent of investment in capital machineries remains ear-

marked for design, including software required. Mr. V, when asked to rank the

importance he attaches to the goals of design, forthrightly suggested customer

demand as first, reliability as second, ergonomy as third, and minimal consump-

tion of resources as fourth, disregarding such other values as considerations on

competitors' products, features on incremental design, and so forth. However

this department studies intensively products on offer by competitors and passes

on this information to the manufacturing. The firm G could not naturally create

its own R&D department. Instead, it has tied up with a nearby premier

engineering research institution for both long-term and short-term designs, which

require sophisticated theoretical inputs.

Mr. V, looking after the manufacturing (the other two entrepreneurial partners

look after finance and marketing, respectively), sought to overcome the initial

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 73

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

poor quality of human resources by emphasizing training the employees in

manufacturing skill. Training intensity leapfrogged in some years; for example,

while in 1995 one in three employees received training other than OJT, in 1996

this number exactly doubled. It doubled once again in 1998 before the firm G

went in for its Middle East capacity. Mr. V ranked as most important training in

the area of existing skill while ranking of next importance training in a related skill

and of least importance training in a futuristic skill. However few of the workers

from traditional background of craftspersonship suddenly appeared to Mr. V as

repositories of skills, the much valued craft skills, and initially these workers

joined in prototyping, to be joined in later by other trainees. Craft skill was taken

up as a policy, an area where G must develop its own competency. Mr. V set

aside funds for compensating expenses incurred by an employee in getting

training in her own choice area from an outside agency. He encouraged

experimentation by providing them with additional tool kits and with the guaran-

tee that failures were not to be penalized, and he targeted communication skill

as one of the most important policy goals in training. Employees mostly shared

common mother tongue, however, there was little in common between them to

share on conceptual or theoretical planes - employees had very diverse levels

of skills in manufacturing. Mr. V clearly spelled out the importance of "manu-

facturing intelligence," a term he uses to connote an intelligence shared together

through multiple modes of communications on ideas and skills in manufacturing

competence. A close friend to Mr. V and also a consultant to G, who is a

professor in statistical quality control, became a regular visitor, advising Mr. V

on using varieties of visual tokens as symbols of information about quality,

progress of job, problems, and so forth. The workbenches turned out to be

festooned galleries transacting between them business transaction tokens.

Information Transaction with Market

However manufacturing intelligence could not be gathered only through setting

up a detailed system of transaction in information (or its tokens) on the job

progress. Business information transactions, Mr. V soon understood, ought to

involve several tiers, first between marketing and manufacturing (Hausman &

Montgomery, 1993), then between several processes in manufacturing, and

between the past data and current performance referring to the goals, and on

relative performance of an employee. In short information connectivity appears

supreme, followed by linking sources of and accessibility to information. Market

information came by deputing employees from the shop floor to trade fairs and

exhibitions. The marketing team, however, was considered as the most important

source, followed by the dealers' information, then that from the vendors/

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !74 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

suppliers. Manufacturing information proper came by prototyping; customizing

new product for specific customer need, which was followed later by mass

marketing of the same; undertaking reverse engineering and generating test-data

on certain products from competitors; and distributing information generated in

R&D funded by G and undertaken by others and also while commissioning pilot

plants/work-lines. Moreover close information transactional interfacing be-

tween manufacturing and the RM and the design enriched the information

intensity of what Mr. V thought was manufacturing intelligence. Facilitation of

such transactions happened through first setting up data bases on RM and on

servicing and second through detailing manuals on both technical-servicing and

the RM. documentation of routine production done later. In the early years

business transactions of the employees were largely oral (about 90 percent).

Over the years communication progressed through written, then more visual

toward more symbolic or database. By 1998 at least one-fourth of the commu-

nication was based on the last mode through computer terminals and another

quarter on the third mode.

It was crucial for firm G to locate its strategic competence. Once identified such

competencies could be hastened up to secure strategic gains over the competi-

tors (Varadarajan & Clark, 1994). The zip market in India is highly skewed. A

large multinational corporation dominates both the global and the domestic

market, and its products, though costlier compared to the run-of-the-mill

products, have a very high quality. As a result its brand name is invincible. Firm

G does not have a brand presence. Its resources are scarce and could not be

channeled for creating a brand. On the other side of the spectrum, there are many

domestic producers that offer unbranded inferior products at a much lower price.

Moreover the domestic zip market is extremely differentiated because few

consumers buy zips directly. Consumers depend on small retail tailors or small

producers for products with zips stitched in. The number of such small shops runs

in hundred of thousands. Demand for quality in the domestic market is not

articulated enough. Price-quality considerations often disfavor quality. A com-

petence in productive aspects alone, while it would allow it to mass produce at

lower cost and compete with the lower-end bulk domestic producers, also would

disallow the firm G to establish its future brand in the international market in

competition with the leading multinational. However if G's competence is

secured in quality and consequently in reliability as well as in diversity of products

and in its ability to reach any parts of the globe, G would surely overcome the

syndrome of a domestically entrenched sweat shop. Opportunities surely existed

for G in the latter direction.

The choice to G was clear. Mr. V did not want to set up a sweatshop for making

money. He thought that G should compete in quality with the dominant multina-

tional. However, with small production set up, there was no scale economy and

initially, during the period of learning, productivity too was rather low, resulting

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 75

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

in higher cost of the end products. The nature of the market demanded setting

up a large marketing team, but that was beyond the means. Developing

franchisees, too, required large working funds. Mr. V therefore decided to put

emphasis first on meeting and even surpassing the quality of the dominant

international brand. He knew that his marketing thrust and his advertisement

expenditure would not be able to establish their own brand in the immediate

future. Quality as the engine should determine the production set-up and inter-

alias the human resources performances measurement as well improvement

practices (Figure 1). Productivity would remain a secondary outcome of this

process. In the early years of G a quality department was set up. It established

simultaneously quality circles through project teams, initiated rewards and

recognition schemes, and began saving immediately. Savings through quality

ensured substantial gains for a few years following 1994. Employees learned

keeping and maintaining, also storing in a database the data on virtually each

process step and stage in the manufacturing first, and then later on adding

marketing as well.

Information as Key

Information appeared as the key to this direction of competency. Mr. V had by

1995 read literature on business process, its reengineering, and on IS. Now

enlightened by his statistician friend and consultant, he realized that what he was

trying to achieve, namely competence through manufacturing intelligence, was

riveted to not locating or even recording information but rather in enhancing both

information intensity and information transacting business processes and tasks.

In reality the complex processes of information transfer that he had already set

up by 1995 were the germination of business processes. Information transfer-

ence across marketing, work stations in manufacturing, RM, design, commis-

sioned R&D, servicing and quality were in germinal form, structuring process

interfaces between these departmentalized entities. In other words regular

information transactions had by then already bridged these extant sub-processes,

Figure 1. Quality as driver in business improvement

Performance Measurement System

Quality Goal As

Driver

Information

Transaction

Improvement

Practices

Documents As Production Organization

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !76 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

creating the first embryonic notion of an integrated business driven by variable

and multifarious informational transactions. Recognition of this embryonic

phasewas urgently needed. Moreover Mr. V understood that such transactions

were indeed being carried through the active agency of the employees of G. Mr.

V, as narrated above, began implementing quickly a set of incentives that would

recognize and facilitate these informational business transactions. Databases

were set up. Incentives and even promotions were related with excellence in

skills and in information communication. All this made information transaction

the life force of G.

Agenda for Transformation

By the end of 1995 the board of G took a decisive step. It was decided that export

should be the thrust area. Existing position in domestic market should be growing

at the pace it has been growing, namely about 20 percent per annum. Share of

export was nearly zero in 1994 but had an astronomical rise by more than 100

percent in 1995 (the growth appeared large because of the small volume of

export in 1994). However the experience of 1995 proved strong. Moreover the

export market had clients who procured in bulk, thereby reducing per-unit cost

of marketing. In fact, as observed earlier, because of the fragmentation in the

domestic market, per-unit cost of marketing in the domestic market was high.

Further, lack of bulk order from this market prevented G from achieving scale

economy and forced it to often run in batch mode. Export market, in contrast,

opened up the possibility of scale economy, which in turn offered drastic cost

reduction per unit and opened the possibility of opening up lines of manufacturing.

This market was highly quality conscious, thus offering the needed challenge that

Mr. V was looking for. Exporting offered several advantages: it paid prices for

quality; cash earning was much higher, improving the cash flow; bulk orders

provided volume and hence provided opportunity for building up a brand; and the

market was structured, implying cost-to-market was low. Above all, because of

higher competition in quality products, this market, while difficult to enter, was

full of potential opportunities. Designing a new product with higher reliability and

higher quality would establish now a higher assurance of acceptance. Moreover

Mr. V's practice of customizing a product prior to launching the same for the

mass market had better prospects because an international customer for bulk

volume would be readily welcoming a customized, better-quality, newly designed

product. The craft skill of G, assiduously inculcated amongst its workforce by

Mr. V, now came in very handy. Prototyping and customization with craft skill

put in designing imbued the export entrant G with a distinct competitive

advantage over other long-standing international large manufacturers. The

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 77

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

board of G understood when Mr. V explained that integration of business process

at the enterprise level would remain amiss if G were to limit itself to the domestic

market alone. Board of G decided that the next few years they would retain their

domestic market while putting all their efforts in expanding share of export.

Toward this, since now investments in quality and in business process would

possibly reap cash and higher dividend, they decided to first set up a computer-

ized browser-based information system for marketing. This would provide them

with the much-needed access to the international market. Marketing would be

responsive to the customers' queries and expectations on quality, and the entire

information system would interface with the manual information documents

transactions system through Mr. V's office.

Documents Transaction as the Base

Both Mr. V and his statistician friend/consultant were aware of concepts used

in understanding a business as a documents transaction system (van Reijswoud,

Mulder, & Dietz, 1999; Winograd, 1988). Information as the driver of the

business gets transacted across roles played by individual members of an

organization. Such information transactions take place through documents. With

this belief and with knowledge of statistical quality control, it may be recalled, Mr.

V and his friend together set up the production workstations, which were highly

dependent on communications of information stored in several media. Each such

workstation acted as a generator and receptor of information. Documents were

not necessarily in the form of a physical missive but were frames containing a

scripted or coherent bunch of information communicable in several modes. By

1995 Mr. V had set up the most detailed document transaction system. They did

not have a single computer before 1994. Excepting a handful including Mr. V,

employees had no knowledge of transacting information through computer. All

the documents were information-intensive, often based on manual recording and

oral or written or even coded documents used to be transferred across the

production set-up, driving, as it were, the production. This document-driven

production was slow initially, and the personnel took time to learn transacting

information as the driver of the production and as the controller ensuring the

quality of the output (Porter & Millar, 1985). However while internally among the

groups of workstations the information document transaction could set up a set

of business processes, it was failing in meeting the ultimate criterion. Customer

satisfaction as the defining boundary to a business process integrated at the

level of enterprise was still amiss. The domestic market being unorganized, G's

marketing team was unable to locate the type customer, information from

whom ought to have been driving the internal information document transaction

system.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !78 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

There were two more hurdles. Employees who were happily transacting

business information verbally or in other physical modes began feeling discom-

fitures with the evolving demands of databased or non-physical modes of

transactions, especially those relating them transactionally to the unknown and

not as-of-yet experienced domains of global customers. The second hurdle was

that to the management, in particular to Mr. V, it was appearing that while

information-driven processes at G appeared to be better than its domestic sweat-

shop competitors, this level of information intensity was not perhaps sufficient to

enable G as an international brand offering competition to the reigning multina-

tional. Option to G was to reorder its human resources system with new

incentives and new knowledge-driven focus in order to overcome the first hurdle

and to hire an international consultant for benchmarking its processes. An

international consultant alone can offer international benchmarking data. The

first option was costly but achievable, but the second option would cost G very

dearly, and G finances did not permit it.

Regionally Benchmarking Manufacturing Intelligence

An opportunity came by around 1995-1996. A management research institute

from the same city had at that time launched a research project on the

manufacturing competence of industries in that region, with one of the research

goals as creating a benchmark among firms belonging to different sectors of

industry sharing the same location on indicators of manufacturing competence.

Mr. V, understood the implication of the study and gladly agreed to cooperate

Firm

Enterprise

informatiz

ation

External

informati

connectiv

ity

Employee

accessing

external

informati

Information

employed for

competition

Design skill

employed for

competition

Strategic

use of

advanced

design

Quality

maintaina

bility

Skill-

shopfloor-

RM

integrat io

G 0.5 0.5 0.15 0.5 0.4 0.6 1 0.02

1 0.125 0.25 0.0025 NA 0.3 0 0.3 NA

2 0.5 NA 0.5 NA NA 0 1 0.18

3 0.125 0.5 NA NA 0.1 0 NA NA

4 NA NA 0.01 0.5 0.3 NA 1 0.01

5 1 1 0.2 0.25 0.5 NA NA NA

6 0.25 NA NA 1 0.2 0 1 0.02

7 0.25 0.5 0.0125 0.5 NA 11 NA 0.03

8 NA 0.25 0.025 0.5 0.1 0.2 1 0.03

9 0.5 0.5 NA 0.5 0.4 0 0.5 0.12

10 NA 0.5 NA 0.5 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.01

Table 5. Indicators of competence: Firm G in comparison

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 79

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

with the research team. He thought that in lieu of international benchmark data,

G could now be compared with other firms that were either units of multinationals

or were globally marketing their products. The result of this research survey was

revealing. In almost all the relevant indicators of competence, G was either at the

top or close to it. Table 5 compares eight indicators of G with 10 other firms from

the same region manufacturing various other products such as automobile,

machine tools, haulage, and so forth. Values of three indicators in connection

with employment of databases, computers, and information as such in symbolic

mode have been compared, as have indicators on application of information for

competition, design skill employed for competition, strategic use of advanced design,

the integration between skill-shop floor and the RM, and maintenance of quality.

Indicator on enterprise informatization indicates whether a firm maintains in-

house databases, maintains enterprise-wide IS, and whether it has undertaken

business process reengineering. G had a value above the mean (the distribution

of values having standard deviation at 0.3 for 53 firms) and only one firm had a

value higher than G. Similarly the next indicator on external information

connectivity based on a firm's use of EDI, Web site, and multimedia internal to

the organization shows that G is once again above the mean (with standard

deviation of 0.2 for 53 firms). Indicator on employee accessing external

information is based on percentage of employees accessing or using databases,

on the firm's use of commercial data base search (such as on a patent), and on

the firm's use of commercial engineering databases. Here again G maintained

its above-average competency. Another indicator that measures the use of

information for competitive advantage is based on a firm's use of reverse

engineering and on the firm's data generation on competitors, however, shows

G has a value a little lower than the mean (for 53 firms). Three other indicators

on aspects of manufacturing competence capture use of design skill for

competition, strategic use of advanced design, and the integration between shop

floor, RM, and the general skill pool. In all these three indicators, G maintained

a value rather high in comparison to the mean (of 53 firms). The last indicator

in Table 5 is about firm's competence in maintaining its quality profile; it is based

on whether the RM employees impart the OJT, whether the firm has a policy in

place on ensuring quality, and whether employees routinely generate and record

data on quality. G maintains the highest value here.

By 1996's end G had access to the benchmark and to the general states of affairs

regarding indicators of manufacturing competence in the region. This data

revealed to Mr. V that much was to be done. In preparation to becoming global,

Mr. V had already launched in 1996 preparations on several databases. These

were on engineering, manufacturing, inventory, and market. G began using in

1996, again as preparatory to be global, Internet, paging, and mobile telephony.

Its cost of communications, which was Rs. 0.4 million (approx. U.S. $0.1 million)

in 1994-1995 shot up to nearly double that to a figure of 0.75 million (approx. U.S.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !80 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

$0.18 million) in 1995/96. This increased to above Rs. 2.5 million (U.S $0.62

million) by 1998-1999. In 1996 G went in for purchasing software for the first

time; it had earlier in use software developed for custom use. The work for LAN

was launched end of 1996. The idea on the Web site was not yet moot. Mr. V,

looking at the comparative statistics and having attended, along with several

other entrepreneurs/managers, several brain-storming workshops organized by

the research institute, realized that the earlier strategy of quality-driven informa-

tion transactions in G could unfortunately encompass the manufacturing proper

alone - the integration of manufacturing and marketing through information

transacting businesses remained unattained. Moreover it was now apparent to

him that while previous modes of transactions and training and other human

resources aspects were well-suited to an environment having little symbolic

computerized information, now, with computerization of information transac-

tions, all this needed drastic overhaul. It was indicative enough that a strategic

change was necessary.

Performance Measurement System

Aspects of measuring and motivating human resources in the forthcoming

changed situation were showing signs of strain. The previous harmony between

Mr. V and his employees, that had grown together with the growth of G

somewhat organically, now began showing signs of displeasure if not of rupture.

The previous system, with its emphases on craft skill, verbal transactions,

performance measurement by each for oneself, and on collectively sharing the

comparative performance profile, enjoyed bonhomie. Measurement of perfor-

mance did not drive outcomes inconsistent with the intentions of the system

(Austin, Larkey, & Royo, 1998). The earlier system was simple because

measurement of performance of an individual was possible as jobs were broken

into tasks being performed by an individual; then any measured output could be

attributed causally to the actions undertaken by an individual or a group and

measured data could be used evaluatively, implying that evaluation would lead to

emergence of a set of desired norms. The last, namely evaluability, is important.

A performance measurement must, even if not intended, set up a norm. Norms

that get set up display incentives for certain kinds of jobs and tasks and

employees would be directed to undertaking those jobs and tasks, even though

the measurement was intended for evaluating the efficacy of some other existing

norms. These later norms are the written rules in the codebooks whereas the

measurement system institutes another norm unwittingly. The system would be

considered dysfunctional.

With the new emerging situation, the previously existing separation between

individual jobs and tasks began disappearing, giving way to a situation where

many employees shared a single outcome and, conversely, in many outcomes

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 81

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

there emerged the contribution from a single employee. An individual began

appearing as a set of roles. Consequently measuring the productivity of a single

individual in the previous mode appeared more and more difficult. Further, as a

result of this role, mixing attributability of the measurement system too suffered;

it was also difficult to attribute causally what factor or which individual was

responsible for the outcome. Finally the previous system of measurement,

through its evaluability, had set up a set of norms, which the employees had been

happily consenting to. Now, with new types of jobs, new modes of information

transactions seeping in - it became difficult to locate a standards of perfor-

mance against which the rest could be benchmarked. This was evident in the

research institute's reporting. In the previous system owing to bonhomie,

employees "willingly" cooperated in generating and sharing data on performance

whereas in the newly emerging situation, with the happy senses lost, it was

"irrational" to "require that workers engage in a behavior that is fundamentally

irrational on a self-interested individual basis" (Austin et al., op cit:7). Mr. V

could see that workers desired a different system. The firm G in his vision

continued to be in manufacturing, and he was designing strategies for acquiring

the manufacturing intelligence. In all this employees had to willingly participate

to transform G into a knowledge organization. A measurement system and a new

norm, which could institute motivation in the employees, was what Mr. V was

now looking for.

Manufacturing Marketing Interface

This affair seemed even more complicated because now the manufacturing had

to be integrated with the marketing, and if a business process reengineering were

to be undertaken in order to drive manufacturing through the market-provided

information, the cocooned complacence existing till that date in manufacturing

would be lost for good. The previous strategy was similar to the Japanese style

emphasizing cost reduction while increasing or at least ensuring quality (quality

as the driver). Its priorities were cost, quality, dependability, short-term flexibil-

ity, and continuous innovation (Hausman & Montgomery, 1993). The market

demanded price, quality, availability, variety, and features. Mr. V was looking

after manufacturing and another director was looking after the marketing.

Quality-driven cost reduction as the business model served several goals: less

working capital, less outgo on borrowing, profit-making though competitive cost-

based pricing, incremental innovation through quality maintenance, and product

variety through initially customizing. Integration between marketing and manu-

facturing was fracture-less.

However, if the market were to drive production and if market were to set up

units of business transactions in information with such a desirable seamless

interface that the two departments appeared as one, the previous strategy of

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !82 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

cost-cutting and so forth would be given up. Consequently hero workers - the

role models who saved costs, who incrementally innovated and who targeted

manufacturing as the outpost - would now have to listen to customers'

information, design accordingly, and need not look at cost saving alone. G could,

in the international market, now have the opportunity to look beyond cost while

pricing, and its profit avenues seemed now different. The international custom-

ers would look for more information about the dependability and reliability of not

the product alone but more about the manufacturing. Their gaze inside manufac-

turing and their demanding of alternate manufacturing scenarios turned upside

down both the interface bridging marketing-manufacturing and the human

relations system. Mr. V hoped that computerized information-based business

transactions would offer the needed strategic solution because he was confident

that previous learning in information handling would direct the new learning.

Process of Change

The board of G, consisting of the three entrepreneur directors, met for days,

consulted the statistician, and looked closely into existing literature on modern

management. It was decided that G should set a few business goals: to export

a minimum of one-third of turnover by three years while maintaining the current

growth rate in turnover; to set up another plant primarily for export in the Middle

East by two years; to not increase existing employee strength - in other words,

to increase proportionately employee productivity; to enhance quality, reliability,

and increase product varieties by minimum three-fold in the coming three years;

and to achieve all this by maximum internal accrual of resources and minimal

borrowal from term-lending institutions. Overall G hoped by 1999-2000 be in a

position to commence establishing its brand name. These were rather tough

business goals. Mr. V did not have immediate answers to the means he wanted

to employ; he had inklings, though. He thought about strategic choices between

technology as driver, quality as driver, or people as driver. He had already

consulted several strategic change management literatures; in particular he

referred to the MIT framework (Scott-Morton, 1991) and the Fujitsu framework

(Yetton, Johnson, & Craig, 1994). Change management in a small and medium

enterprise located in a developing country (Chang & Powell, 1998), Mr. V

understood, had its own peculiarities. Both the MIT and the Fujitsu framework

had referred to large corporations with very rich technological and other

resources base and located in an advanced technology competition milieu, and

these corporations were operating in advanced technology products. G did not

have any of these. MIT-Fujitsu frameworks compared differences in sequences

and in the choice of the driving element out of strategy, structure, technology,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 83

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

management processes, and individuals and their roles. However, for a small and

young business such as G, structure of business, its management processes, and

business strategy as a separate element could not be considered meaningful. In

fact business structure of G was only evolving and taking shape along with an

inseparable management process. Mr. V identified only three aspects, namely,

technology, quality, and people. Quality had been the driver and in a certain sense

had been also the management process of G. Technology that G had been using

was based on information transaction as the principle, albeit without using IT as

its instrumentality.

Strategic Change Through IT

Roger and Elvin (1999) differentiated between four modes of strategic deploy-

ment of IT. A change management may need IT to initiate, facilitate, support, or

bring in unplanned changes from the market. The intervention process in their

scheme was formed by the context, the outcome, the business content, and the

IT content. Mr. V had been facilitating changes in G through business transac-

tions of information in a manner that was slowly appropriating IT in order to

become an IT-based IS. The firm G thus did not require IT to initiate change. IT

as the channel of bringing in market led to unexpected transformations inside G

that were not suited for G. The choice was between the two: IT as facilitator or

as support. The board as a set of business goals had decided the outcome of the

change already. Mr. V's thoughts thus hovered around the context (internal and

external) of G and the business content of the change - he thought these two,

namely context and business content, should decide IT content. The external

context was globalization and international competition. The internal context was

set by employee knowledge in business transaction of information and growing

dissent, or at least disenchantment, with the prevailing performance measure-

ment system, which was now setting business norms at cross purpose with the

business goals of G. Business content had been set by goal of export, changing

from quality as driver to customer as driver with the constraint that employee

productivity would have to rise significantly. Reflecting back on his own

approach, Mr. V could see that he had begun using IT as the support for the past

year. G had a rising communication cost doubling, every year; it had launched

LAN; 70 percent of its employees had been referring to internal databases at

some point; there were several computer terminals; and in the preceding two

years G first customized software and then purchased more software for its

inventory. IT had begun supporting change. However, G required a radical

strategic change. Mr. V therefore thought of IT as a facilitator of strategic change.

Looking back Mr. V realized what had been his achievement in setting up a

document-based information transaction system as the source of improvements

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !84 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

in the business (Figure 1) had with its success become a source of inertia (Tripsas

& Gavetti, 2000). Capabilities of its personnel as captured through its perfor-

mance measurement system, in particular the coordination patterns and the

norms as how best to achieve business coordination, had after its initial success

acquired dead weight. If at this phase IT continued to be brought in, as G had been

inducting computers over nearly two years since 1994-1995, this deadweight

inertia would set up in documents transactions and the corresponding measure-

ment system would get stabilized. IT, he was afraid, instead of bringing about

changes radically and strategically, would support only continuous changes - a

mode in which any inertial system keeps changing. To facilitate change he was

looking for a radical reversal. Mr. V thought about reversing the sequence of

business transformation. A business organization, he believed, should behave

like an organic being who gets transformed as it continues its living. A business

while transacting business should receive the fillip to change from within the

mode of transacting that business. Here ideas came from several sources, and

it was not apparent to him either, although the shape that this new sequence

slowly took up can be schematically presented as in Figure 2.

His ideas on change and business process designing were very similar to the

DEMO (van Reijswoud et al., 1999). The core of business, its essential function,

is business transaction through which the business content takes up shape. This

essential level (Figure 3) is supported through information transaction. G

acquired informational competence through learning to undertake such informa-

tional transactions. The information level gets captured for structural reasons

of the business in the form of documented structure, created through

documentation.

Figure 2. Transformation in reverse sequence

Documented Structure

Documentation

Informational Competence

Informational Learning

Business Content

Business Transaction

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 85

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Business Transaction as Unit of Business Process

Mr. V faced an excessive load. However putting a very hard-working team close

to Mr. V, could effect some modest changes in both the nature of the documents

and in their process set-up, keeping in mind that changes in the manual

documents were to be minimal and work schedules did not suffer a setback. G

had by then several databases in use through several computer terminals. A

number of inventory documents were created, stored, retrieved, and even

destroyed as computerized documents. However many documentations on the

shop floor or in liaising with design, RM, and the marketing or administration were

in hard copies; in manufacturing many documents were tokens carrying informa-

tion on quality and other details. The first important aspect of the change was

thus how to minimize the turbulence created by reversing the sequence described

above. So far documents had carried the cued information, and documents thus

structured the information-based business transaction. In the present mode, if

business transactions have to constitute dynamically the documents, entirely new

sets of documents would be demanded, created, stored, and so forth. Meetings

and exposures of the employees to this new mode largely solved changing over

the problem. Mr. V and his close team understood that active human agency,

when willing, could adopt to any innovation in no time. However employees

sensed a trouble - the new system implied a radical change in the performance

measurement system. Resistance formed soon. We will get back to this aspect

soon. Turbulence could be kept to the minimum through acquiring, finally, the

concurrence of all. The board thought that because of both scarcity of capital and

rising demand on investment owing to export orientation, the marketing set-up

should launch the browser-based system immediately and initially through a

service provider. After about a year, this same should be based on its own server,

which even later, around 1998-1999, should include the production set-up

documents transaction system. The board was expecting a steady rise in export

given their quality, which often was better than the dominant international brand,

and this rising export would solve the cash-flow problem. With good cash,

Figure 3. Level, goal and activities of changes in G

Level Goal Activities

Essential level Coordination by

business transaction

Transaction types,

actors, results

Information level Change information

processors

Information sent,

received, derived

Documentation level Automate document

movements

Production, storage,

transportation,

destruction of

documents

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !86 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

expanding the production set-up could raise production quantity. Resource

accrual thus made would enable an enterprise-wide IS by 1999. Prior to that ERP

modules could be purchased and deployed.

A few Indian firms were selling ERP on the Internet, where a firm could buy one

or two modules at a time. Mr. V was hesitant in procuring ERP; he understood

ERP as a structured set of documents transacting system. He was on the move

to dismantle priority of documents in structuring a business. Documents trans-

action must be final outcome, and with process changes in the business, the

respective documents transaction system, too, should be required to be restruc-

tured. There was a perceived contrast in the change management philosophy.

The other two members of the board were, however, for ERP initially since they

had seen ERP improving performances in other regional firms. As a compromise,

a first set of modules was bought for the inventory. Inventory documentation of

G was already using customized software. Even after customizing the newly

bought module to G's need, this new documents structure caused a series of

problems. Quickly, seeing the turmoil in the production, the board sat together

and discontinued further introduction of ERP modules, empowering Mr. V alone

in this entire matter of change management.

Designing IS and Documents on Transactions

The project of Mr. V's turned out to be a business process reengineering. The

customer, in lieu of quality parameters, was now the sender of information. This

information, considered the business content, had to be established through

reciprocating business transactions inside G. Such a transaction is composed of

three phases: ordering, in which two role-actors agree on executing a future

action; executing, in which the task gets executed; and, resultant, the roles

negotiate a concurrence on the acceptability of the outcome. This transaction

therefore is based on communication. Each transaction re/constitutes the

business relations in the visible social space of G and, hence, a transaction

fundamentally re/constitutes the business process. The same transaction in the

object world of IS re/constitutes the "facts" of IS transactions. This fact of

concurrence in a transaction necessarily can coordinate the business through re/

constituting both business-processes based on social transactions and the

information transaction processes based in the world of IS. The former of these

two referring to re/constitution of business processes takes place at the essential

level (Figure 3). The latter refers to each role-actor as an information processor,

taking place at the information level in object language. This philosophy, as

adopted by Mr. V, then constitutes each time a new customer demand arrives,

the fundamental business transactions at the social level of job/task coordination,

and, thereby, business process too gets reengineered. The driver of changes in

coordination that are in the business process is now the customer.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 87

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

A change in the social-level business transaction reorders and reconfigures each

information processor, which at the social level is a role-actor and at the

information level is captured in object language (Figure 4).

A change is reflected in the information content and the relational aspect of any

information transaction. Employees of G were used to information handling but

in a non-symbolic mode. Previously changes in information transactions were

visible in changes in tokens or cues, for example. However the object language

level changes in information are abstract and invisible. This change was

significant, and employees reacted to the new situation. However, previous

learning helped them in getting over this transition quickly to abstract reality.

Employees soon responded by adopting abstract informational learning. In this

new mode each role is an information processor who sends, receives, stores,

processes, and derives (new conclusions). This is how the new IS takes shape

through being driven by the essential level-business process transactions. Once

this IS identifies an information packet, the same is compared to its existing

system of documents and, if required, some old documents are destroyed, some

created, some stored or dispatched. This document level appears as the final

outcome of changes in the business transactions/processes. Changes in docu-

mentation, which previously were the driver, are now the driven final resultant.

An ERP module could now be harmonized with this documentation.

Reengineering and Productivity

Mr. V continued on this project for about two years, until about 1999. A local

software firm developed software for this. Customization took place through

regular interactions between the team close to Mr. V. This team had experience

in customization of software, which helped it set with greater clarity the required

Figure 4. Organizational transformation at threee levels

New Business

Transaction

New IS

New

Documentation

Change

Coordination

Redesign IS Processors

Automate by IT

OIQ Business

Transaction

Old IS

Old Documentation

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !88 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

parameters. Expenditure on this software was at an affordable level. G by then

had through a server its own Web site, and its marketing team greatly benefited

from interactions with prospective customers through this site. Branch offices

of G began communicating through e-mail, which before around 1996 was the

privilege of select top few. This site did not afford, however, any capability to

transact in e-commerce. Electronic inquiries were replied to electronically and

pursued after through physically. Market information from such electronic and

physical sources then entered the IS of G. Immediately thereafter, in 1998, all the

terminals through the LAN were browser-connected. Market information could

be sent directly to or accessed by the batches of production employees, the

design employees, the finance, and so forth. Hardware purchases, primarily of

computer terminals, did not cost much. In manufacturing, where several batches

were now replacing the previous single line, each batch was given access

through a terminal. Similarly RM and design, too, were provided with several

terminals, and all such terminal got connected through an enhanced version of the

previously existing LAN. This physical hardware platform did not cost much

because hardware prices were down. Total cost was well within G's budget. The

customized software, costing nearly as much as that of the entire hardware, had

integrated within itself the earlier customized software on inventory. Next, Mr.

V thought around early 1999, should be interfacing this new IS with the ERP

module bought earlier. Interfacing with such ERP modules, it was thought, would

take the employee productivity level much higher. It may be noted that during this

nearly two-year period of changing over to the new business-transaction driven

IS and finally the documents system, raising productivity (which was the

business goal) took a back seat. However, with the new IS documents being

created through changes in business process, constitutive transactions were

conveyed through the changes in information processor status. Such documents

reflecting both business transactions and information transactions could now be

dovetailed to the ERP modularized documents transactions system, the latter

holding the prospect of much greater productivity. Once this is achieved, Mr. V

would ensure both a changed G and the business goal of higher productivity.

Soon share of export in the total turnover increased, and by 1999 nearly one-third

of production went in for the international market. The production system now

switched over from manual to an IT-based documents transaction system.

Increased workload on the production employees and demands of transition from

pure manual to browser-interfaced documents transaction added some new

dimensions to the business process and its performance measurement system.

Workers were nervous because they treaded on uncertain ground. Mr. V could

understand that G was to be made into a knowledge organization. Employees

were exposed to not just an information system based on computer but to a new

business process with novel features of performance measurement. Without the

latter business process transactions, defining IS first and documentation there-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 89

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

after would fail. The essential level, it may be recalled, re/defines each business

transaction corresponding to the arrival of information from the market. Each

such transaction taking place between either members from the same group of

employees or across different groups of employees defines the constituent

fundamental of a new business content. Performance of an employee is

inextricably interdependent, dependent on concurrence and communicative

performance. A tangible outcome, which can be measured, is the joint effort of

several. Both measurability and attributability have changed; the old direct

measurement based on the old documentation thus failed. The evaluability, which

judges the "normative adequacy" of the measured output, failed, too.

Performance Measurement as Key to Reengineering

Most importantly, with groups of employees working on batch products and

employees defining on their own the desired types, the quality and quantities of

the output - in short, employees defining on their own both business content and

the respective business processes, the corresponding information to be trans-

acted in relevant documentations - this all demanded that, first, Mr. V become

only a facilitator and cease being an observer-monitor, and second, the employ-

ees get motivated to work. Motivation assumed most importance. The work was

in knowledge since new batch products were getting designed frequently. Work

involves not simply knowing and abiding by "rules" or "routines;" instead, work

involves a "talent," a "skill," and "knowledge differentials" (abbreviated as

'TASK' by Austin & Larkey, 2002). A talent refers to creative aspects and to

the innate knowledge that, when supported by skills such as in machining or in

numerical machine designing, gets the shape of new products of quality.

However, a work involves a transaction and a concurrence, implying that the two

persons in transactions must continue to maintain a knowledge differential.

Homogeneity in skills or knowledge would imply going back to a Taylorized line

production. Mr. V had to grasp these three dimensions of measurement rather

quickly. He and the team closest to him racked their brains and suddenly realized

that the key to measurement was at the essential level coordination of business

transactions.

The transaction can take place only when knowledge differentials exist, the

talent shapes its content, and the concurrence between the two roles in a

transaction following the "assumed" completion of the task can take place

through skills. Thus a transaction can convey fundamental information on new

mode of measurement. However they also realized that they were going to

measure a role performance and not an individual's performance. Conversely

several roles might take up a single role by a single individual. Therefore, with

essential-level measurement, role performances could be measured. Further

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !90 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

norms of performance would now be set by satisfying the customer and not as

previously, by sticking to quality imperatives. Given this understanding, Mr. V

and the close team called in the software developer in late 1998. It was around

the time the DEMO-type software was nearing its completion. A next project

was launched. This project would take up a set of information from the essential

level, which so far had not been considered for defining the roles of information

processors (and, consequently, the resultant documents). This new set would be

based on measuring TASK. This TASK-based information would get routinely

declared or announced through the terminals attached to the role-groups in the

batches - employees would thus be provided information regularly on one's

own performance, on one's achievement as well as what remains to be

undertaken, and, finally, on the normative performance by any norm-setting role-

actor(s). This was a process performance measurement system (PPMS) based

on workflow system (Kueng & Krahn, 1999).

Immediately upon launching this measurement system, Mr. V and this team held

general body meetings with the employees, explaining the changes conceived.

This announcement appeared as a great relief as well as holding great expecta-

tions that it would not take long to become an ideal solution, as it were. The

acrimony that was looming gave way to a new level of cooperative working. The

development phase of software on PPMS regularly involved a mass of employ-

ees, who participated and suggested several alterations and improvement.

However, in 1999, a preliminary version only could be implemented. Mr. V,

however, did not take long to adapt to his new role as the facilitator of business

transaction and of role performances. The year 1999 proved to be a watershed

in the history of G.

Challenges to the Organization

Business process changes happened primarily in the manufacturing and the

interfaces of manufacturing with marketing. Mr. V's foresight, deep under-

standing, and exposure to current literature of management helped him and,

through him, the team in manufacturing the insight into new and novel manner of

defining business transactions based business content. However the two other

directors and the departments reporting to them, namely, branch offices,

marketing, finance, administration, and public relations, were still following work

methods pertaining to the old order. They had not yet identified the three levels:

essential, information, and documents. They were following IT-based docu-

ments transfer. These departments, too, bought computers, and after 1999 some,

such as finance, bought the relevant ERP modules too. However these comput-

ers continued following old documentation system until as late as 1999. This

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 91

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

appeared as unpromising results in 2000, reflecting the mismatch that occurred

in the year 1999. Business at G could not develop its business content in full

through its novel customer-driven manufacturing set up alone. The board

realized business was integration.

Ironically and contrary to ordinary experience, manufacturing had reengineered

itself first while finance and marketing lagged behind. Mr. V and the board

quickly realized these shortcomings. Entrepreneurial coordination was needed,

and the first task was to identify the essential levels in those business processes

under the control of the other two directors. The question was raised and again

by Mr. V about the observable variables that were not just physical and tangible.

Key to understanding transaction remained with this observable. Second was to

identify what could constitute the motivation or the system of incentives. Third,

what had been described as TASK (talent, skill and knowledge differentials)

- that is, individual exploration, and initiative in creating new opportunities and

solving them in lieu of one's abiding by a plan of work - whether the TASK of

manufacturing should now be the backbone of IT-based documents transacting

business processes in all other departments. Could the same principle hold in

finance and administration, and above all in marketing? This recognition would

result into a reconfiguration of the information system, resulting in more of end-

user computing. Would the other directors and their senior colleagues in

marketing and finance devolve most authority down the line? Would they like to

empower as much, and would they now assume the roles of coordinators and

facilitators? Mr. V had already taken up the role of information coordinator in the

manufacturing. Both motivational measurement and informational measurement

systems were provided room in the scheme of things proposed by Mr. V.

However he did not propose a system identical to manufacturing. Integration of

business at G should imply that sub-processes in the previously existing depart-

mental modes retain certain uniqueness and not retain any isolation. Differentials

maintained through talents, skills learned in those sub-processes hitherto, should

prove as asset. Integration should target keeping such differentials as were

integrable through dynamic interfaces. Some solutions were conceived in early

2000.

References

Austin, R.D., & Larkey, P.D. (2002). The future of performance measurement:

Measuring knowledge work. In A. Neely (Ed.), Business performance

measurement. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press (in press).

Austin, R.D., Larkey, P.D., & Royo, J. (1998). Measuring knowledge work:

Pathologies and patterns. In A. Neely & D.B. Waggoner (Eds.), Perfor-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !92 Banerjee

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

mance measurement: Theory and practice, 2 Vols. Cambridge: Cam-

bridge University.

Banerjee, P. (2003). Resource dependence and core competence: Insights from

Indian software firms. Technovation, 23, 251-263.

Chang, L.J., & Powell, P. (1998). Towards a framework for business process

reengineering in small and medium-sized enterprises. Information Systems

Journal, 8, 199-215.

Fischer, M., Jungeblut, R., & Rommermann, E. (1997). Supporting expert

systems or supporting the experts? Some references concerning the

development of decision supporting systems in the realm of skilled mainte-

nance work. In P. Banerjee & Y. Sato (Eds.), Skill and technological

change: Society and institutions in international perspective (pp. 156-

174). New Delhi: Har-Anand.

Hausman, W.H., & Montgomery, D.B. (1993). The manufacturing/marketing

interface: Critical strategic and tactical linkages. In R.K. Sarin (Ed.),

Perspectives in operations management: Essays in honor of Elwood S.

Buffa (pp. 117-131). Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Kueng, P., & Krahn, A.J.W. (1999). Building a process performance measure-

ment system: Some early experiences [special issue]. Journal of Scien-

tific & Industrial Research, 58, 149-159.

Porter, M.E., & Millar, V.E. (1985). How information gives you competitive

advantage. Harvard Business Review, 149-160.

Scott-Morton, M. (Ed). (1991). The corporation of the 1990s: Information

technology and oganizational transformation. Oxford: Oxford Univer-

sity Press.

Spear, S., & Bowen, H.K. (1999). Decoding the DNA of the Toyota production

system. Harvard Business Review, 96-106.

Tripsas, M., & Gavetti, G. (2000). Capabilities, cognition, and inertia: Evidence

from digital imaging. Strategic Management Journal, 21, 1147-1161.

Van Reijswoud, V.E., Mulder, H.B.F., & Dietz, J.L.G. (1999). Communicative

action-based business process and information systems modeling with

DEMO. Information Systems Journal, 9, 117-138.

Varadarajan, P., & Clark, T. (1994). Delineating the scope of corporate,

business and marketing strategy. Journal of Business Research, 31, 93-

105.

Ward, J., & Elvin, R. (1999). A new framework for managing IT enabled

business change. Information Systems Journal, 9, 197-221.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Transition from Manual to IT-Based Documents Transacting Business 93

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Winograd, T. (1988). A language/action perspective on the design of coopera-

tive work. In I. Greif (Ed.), Computer supported cooperative work: A

book of readings. San Mateo, CA: Morgan Kaufman.

Yetton, P.W., Johnson, K.D., & Craig, J.F. (1994). Computer-aided architects:

A case study of IT and strategic change. Sloan Management Review, 57-

677.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !94 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter V

Global E-Business

Alliances:

The Socio-Cultural Perspective,

Influence, and Mitigation

Bhuvan Unhelkar

University of Western Sydney, Australia

Abstract

With increasing ability to interact globally through the electronic medium,

businesses are able to tap into newer business opportunities externally as

well as capitalize internally on pools of resources and talents spread across

the globe. However one of the major hindrances to the utilisation of these

opportunities and talents through global alliances is cross-cultural issues.

While technology renders the geographical boundaries redundant, it

aggrandizes the chasms in socio-cultural value systems of physically

disparate alliance partners. This chapter discusses the gamut of global e-

business alliance: the primary reasons for their needs, their socio-cultural

perspective, and the various factors that influence such alliances. Finally

the corresponding mitigating approaches to those negatively influencing

factors are suggested.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 95

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Introduction

Electronic commerce requires sound business alliances. This is because elec-

tronic business can reach far and wide, transgressing geo-political boundaries

instantaneously. In order to succeed in a global electronic business, it is essential

to create alliances that are not merely of the electronic world but also based

around the physical world. This is so because however easy it might be to form

an electronic link between two businesses, there are numerous non-technical

factors, such as social, political, cultural (Laudon & Laudon, 2002), and legal, that

influence the outcome of global e-business alliances. In fact it is the balance

between these non-technical factors that usually determines the success or

failure of a global e-business alliance, as the technical factors are a "given" for

these alliances. Understanding the socio-cultural perspective resulting from the

non-technical factors is at the heart of e-business alliances in this communication

age (Unhelkar, 2003a). However while globalization continues to promote

organizations to ascend their technological capabilities, when it comes to physical

(non-technical) alliances, as already mentioned, organizations stumble across

relatively unexpected challenges in terms of cultural and sociological issues

(Unhelkar, 2003c). Increasing competitive pressures make it imperative that

companies develop new capabilities in providing timely goods and services,

improve internal management of their businesses, and decrease costs. These

requirements are better served by strategic alliances that bring together dispar-

ate skills, capabilities, resources, and environments. Interestingly the electronic

world not only creates the need for this synergy but also facilitates bringing these

skills together, which would otherwise not have been possible in mere physical

alliances. Despite their potential benefits, the majority of alliances do not survive

even in the early periods. According to some statistics 55 percent of alliances fall

apart within three years; only 23 percent of them can barely cover the costs of

forming those alliances in the first place. One of the major reasons for this failure

appears to be the inability of the organizations to accommodate differing cultures

(Grambs & Zerbib, 2000) These cultural differences are not merely socio-

cultural but also related to corporate cultures and political cultures (Laudon &

Laudon, 2002; Unhelkar, 2003c). Thus for an effective globalization process, it

is crucial that a fine balance between electronic expansion and creation of

physical alliances with global trading partners is achieved.

The fact that the socio-cultural issues are now gaining importance in the e-

business world is not surprising. This is because these "soft" issues usually

follow the successful handling of technological and methodological issues within

any process (Unhelkar, 2003b). Therefore, in the context of processes for

globalization and related global information system (GIS) issues, programming

for Web sites (technology) and modeling within the context of software

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !96 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

engineering (methodology) are challenges surpassed by cultural and social

issues. This chapter considers the major reasons and issues in setting up global

alliances in the electronic world, the factors that influence such alliances, and

what can be done to ameliorate the cultural problems that hamper growth and

prosperity of these alliances.

Reason for Global E-Business Alliances

As mentioned earlier, when organizations form wider electronic alliances it

becomes imperative for them to also consider the issues related to physical

alliances. This is especially true when the e-business alliance is global, spanning

across geo-political borders wherein technological capabilities to interact with

each other need to be supported by the physical capability to service clients and

business partners. A global alliance effectively builds on the possibilities offered

by two companies that are able to electronically communicate and that have

value to offer to each other. Usually the underlying principle for electronic

business alliances that also require physical alliance capabilities is that each

member of the business alliance has something to offer that is complimentary to

the other across geo-political borders. It usually turns out that one organization

is a technically savvy global aspirant that is trying to reach across the borders.

However, due to numerous factors such as social, cultural, legal, and political, the

organization is unable to transcend its borders. This is when the electronic

commerce world facilitates formation of these alliances, as it is easier to

communicate electronically across boundaries than it is to do so physically.

However the central point expounded in this chapter is that such alliances,

although electronically (technologically) easily conceivable, require a corre-

sponding understanding of the physical alliances for them to succeed. Therefore

whenever such alliances are formed, it is imperative that stakeholders and

players in these partnering organizations quickly understand and establish

working relationships that transgress the socio-cultural borders so evident in

physical alliances. If employees and managers can effectively adopt different

cultures, the companies benefit a lot from those cultures (Gupta, 2000). In fact,

there are a number of benefits accorded to the electronic business alliances with

a physical component in them that continues to promote the creation and

sustenance of these alliances. Some of the major advantages resulting from

global e-business alliances are as listed below (but not limited only to this list).

• Knowledge capitalization

• Knowledge sharing

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 97

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Market expansion

• Customer service enhancement

• Risk apportionment

• Outsourcing

• Legal and tax advantages

We undertake a more detailed discussion of these reasons with an aim of creating

a good background understanding of the causes of these alliances. Thereafter

we proceed to discuss the issues arising out of these alliances and the approach

to mitigate them.

Knowledge Capitalization

When two organizations from different regions come together, they invariably

bring rich knowledge and know-how in terms of products and services offered.

Collaborations between people belonging to these organizations, reinforced by

information flow, makes it possible for them to share knowledge, thereby

enhancing the overall pool of expertise in the organization. This can lead to

benefits such as faster innovation of new products, reduced duplication of

efforts, savings in research and development costs, and enhanced employee

satisfaction. Being able to share and build a richer set of knowledge is one of the

major advantages of global alliances. Electronic technology facilitates these

alliances, but the physical interaction between people is what eventually brings

the knowledge to fruition.

Knowledge Sharing

In addition to creating new pools of knowledge, global e-business alliances also

enable sharing of knowledge. On the social front this is amply evident in fighting

crime as well as fighting the modern-day scourge of terrorism. This is because

in this age of communication, it is sharing of knowledge that takes even higher

precedence than the existence and capitalization of such knowledge. In terms of

e-business alliances, sharing of knowledge in the domains of processes, designs,

engineering models, customer data, analytical techniques, and so on form

substantial reasons for creation of such alliances.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !98 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Market Expansion

Market expansion has been considered one of the basic reasons for formation

of business alliances. Business alliances between two or more organizations

enable the partnering organizations to have access to each other's customers,

suppliers, and the general markets where the organizations have been conducting

business activities. It is understandable, then, that formation of a business

alliance requires creation of local know-how amongst all participating busi-

nesses. It is equally understandable that for some partnering businesses that are

coming for a different "geo-political" climate, the social and cultural aspect of

the local know-how may itself be too idiosyncratic to be relevant outside the

particular local market. For example, a computer chip manufacturer in Japan

wanting to sell its products through alliance partners in Australia would want to

understand the cultural and social nuances of the Australia-New Zealand region

before embarking on the market expansion journey. Another common example

is of a bank in Hong Kong wanting to expand its markets in the U.S.A. It will have

to adopt to the socio-cultural value systems of the American market, which may

be dramatically different from, say, the Gulf market, in terms of lending policies

and value systems. Despite the challenges of differing cultures, however,

businesses eventually find that through formation of alliances they are able to sell

in a market that they had no access to earlier. Thus while alliances enable

businesses to sell in a foreign market, they also make it almost obligatory to

understand and leverage the cultural nuances of those markets. Leveraging

different cultures is not just a business advantage, it is also a business imperative

(Teitler, 1999). Companies that develop best practices for managing culture

capital find they are able to expand and supplement their e-business with physical

growth. Without such best practices, however, they face the situation similar to

the case study discussed by Unhelkar (2003c), wherein an Indian chemical

manufacturing company rushes into its expansion in Australia and finds the going

tough precisely due to lack of consideration to these socio-cultural factors.

Customer Service Enhancement

While a sale across borders may happen easily using electronic commerce, it is

not always easy to service the same customer across boundaries. In many post-

sale scenarios, as commonly experienced by customers buying cars and grocer-

ies, even local customer care is often uneven at best, let alone customer care

across global markets. Global markets increase the risk of customer dissatisfac-

tion or even customer churn. "Customer service is often seen as a necessary

evil," says Raul Katz, a vice president with Booz-Allen & Hamilton. Good

managers realize that in their business, customer service is one vital element in

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 99

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

holding onto premium customers in the face of competition. An example of

enhanced customer service through alliances is IBM, which set up alliances with

61 software companies in 2001, up from its 50 alliances in 2000. The expectation

of IBM, through these global alliances, was that it will add up to $2 billion in new

revenues in 2001. Mike Gilpin, vice president and research leader of Giga

Information Group, says about this increasing number of partnerships that it

"allows IBM to solve a wider percentage of their customers' problems." Bryce

(2001) adds: "They can grow Global Services, do more outsourcing deals and

provide more strategic assistance to clients." This is because IBM's alliance

partners are available to provide service for products that may have been sold

across boundaries, in another country or region where IBM itself may not have

had a physical presence. Thus while e-business provides a single unified face to

the customer because of global alliances, personalised and even peculiar needs

of customers can be satisfied by the local know-how, expertise, and physical

presence of alliance partners. This not only results in a wider customer base but

also higher-volume growth from the same customers.

Risk Apportionment

Global e-business alliances are extremely helpful in spreading the risks to

businesses arising, amongst other things, primarily from political instabilities.

Global alliances provide excellent opportunities for strategic management of

risks in businesses when they are operating out of unsure political climates. This,

of course, requires that the issue of response to changing political circumstances

in different cultures is properly considered and integrated in the global response

strategies of the business alliances that operate in global markets. In order for

the management of a company to keep track of all the changing technological,

economic, political-legal, and socio-cultural trends around the world, it is

essential that they shift from a vertically organised, top-down type of organiza-

tion to a more horizontally managed, interactive organization (Nuese, Cornell, &

Park, 1998). Horizontal structures are flexible, enable ordinary employees to

play crucial roles by interacting amongst themselves, and enable spreading of

risks due to vacillating external (in this context political) factors. Alliances with

local players have a distinct advantage over traditional multinational company

structures in this respect. For example, to gain access to China while ensuring

a positive relationship with the often-restrictive Chinese government, Maytag

Corporation formed a joint venture with the Chinese appliance maker RSD

(Adler, 2001).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !100 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Outsourcing

Although criticised in the current (year 2004) politically charged climates of

Australia and the U.S.A., outsourcing plays a significant cause for business

alliances, enabling alliance partners to capitalize on the unevenly distributed

pools of skills and resources across the globe. By making it feasible for

organizations to outsource certain routine work, typically to another country,

there is potential for significant savings as well as the ability to provide service

around the clock (due to time differences around the world). This is invaluable,

for example, in providing 24x7 call centres, which are themselves made possible

through the electronic and communication medium. However outsourcing usu-

ally comes with its own limitations in terms of social communication problems,

understanding what is meant within the contractual terms, and understanding the

requirements and agreement on what constitutes a quality deliverable. Further-

more when strategic work is outsourced (as compared with routine work), it

brings even greater challenges of the need to understand the direct and implied

meanings behind all types of communications. These are the situations where

excellence in business processes, use of industry-standard modeling tools and

techniques by partnering organizations, and improving the overall communica-

tions between outsourcing partners can play a crucial role in the success of such

alliances. (For greater details on application of software processes in success of

outsourcing projects, see Unhelkar, 2003d.)

Legal and Tax Advantages

Global alliances facilitate companies to research, produce, and sell legally by

taking advantage of the local rules and regulations of the governments of the

environments where they operate. For example, stem cell research may be

considered unacceptable, unethical, or even illegal in some regions, but may well

be acceptable in others. Alliances, especially at the global level, are able to take

advantage of the regulations spread across the globe, in order to achieve their

goals. Alliances in the educational sector are common, and there are popular

examples of legal and tax advantages being used effectively in running global

educational institutions.

The Cultural Context

Having thus discussed the creative causes or reasons why businesses enter

global e-business alliances, we now create an understanding of the cultural

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 101

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

context under which these global e-business alliances can be studied. Studying

the cultural context provides robust theoretical background to this chapter.

Indeed Hofstede (1980) has given tremendous importance to culture as an

environmental factor influencing all types of business alliances.

Defining Culture

In order to understand the influence of culture on electronic business alliances

and the possible hurdles cultural issues may pose to businesses in terms of their

socio-cultural disparities, it would be appropriate to base the discussion on

defining and studying "culture," understanding the differences in cultures, and

learning how to overcome these differences in a creative and positive way. To

achieve this purpose, let us first consider the word "culture" itself. What do we

mean when we talk about culture? At an informal level it appears to be the ethos

exuded by a group of people. Practically it is the way members of an entire

society live their lives - the way they eat, dress, live, and even die.

On a more formal level, according to an anthropological definition (Devereaus

& Johansen, 1994), culture is an integrated system of learned behavior patterns

that is characteristic of the members of a society. Culture refers to the total way

of life - the underlying patterns of thinking, feeling, and acting - of particular

groups of people. It is learned, not inherited, and transmitted from generation to

generation primarily through conditioned learning. Another definition, by Hall

and Hall (1989, p. 179) is: "Culture is 'a system for creating, sending, storing and

processing information.'" These definitions themselves seem to indicate that

whenever different cultures try to intersect, there are bound to be differences.

Therefore it does not come as a surprise that global alliances face cultural

disparities as one of their major challenges.

High-Context versus Low-Context Cultures

Devereaus and Johansen (1994) further provide an excellent analysis of the

chasms that exist between different types of cultures. According to them, in

general, cultures can be classified as "high context" versus "low context"

cultures. These groupings may also be considered by us as "Eastern" versus

"Western" cultures, respectively, although Eastern-most countries like Australia

or New Zealand may be considered "Western" with respect to this discussion.

The high-context Eastern or oriental cultures are based on the value system of

"who you are" rather than the low-context cultural values of "what you do." This

fundamental difference in the value systems tends to drive these cultures. These

major differences between the Western and the oriental value systems still

persist and provide the basis of most cultural differences between organizations

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !102 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

forming alliances. And when global alliances are formed between these cultur-

ally different organizations in a hurry, these organizations tend to drift apart with

time, based on these fundamental differences. This is not to say that there aren't

other differences such as religious, wealth, political, and related allegiances.

However the "context-based" differentiation is most prominent when global

alliances are formed.

Categories of Global Alliance Issues

Let us extend our understanding of the fundamental differences in the cultural

systems to global alliances. The entire range of global alliance issues can be

classified into three major categories: creation, operation, and exiting (folding of

the alliance). These categories of issues have their own nuances, and each of

them is capable of being influenced by technical and social aspects of the

alliances in varying intensity. The categories of alliance issues and the technical

and social influence on those categories is shown in Figure 2.

Figure 1. High-context versus low-context cultural value systems (based on

Devereaus & Johansen, 1994)

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 103

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Formation

The formation stage of the alliance is the initial setting up of the alliance that is

primarily based on technology. In fact, as discussed at the beginning of this

chapter, technology (notably communications technology) is the true and cre-

ative cause of global alliances. While the business world always had global

alliances in the past, it is these modern-day alliances that are trying to use as

much technology as they can to communicate and process information. How-

ever, as argued by Hammer and Champy (1994) during their "Business Process

Re-engineering" revolution, information (and now communications) technology

is not merely providing the tools to automate and run global businesses, it is

actually a cause for those businesses.

More specifically, the technologies that come into play during the formation

stages of a global business alliance are the ones that facilitate communication

between software applications belonging to the participating organizations. Thus

the middleware technologies of distributed computing object model (DCOM) and

common object request broker architecture (CORBA) can come into play at this

stage. However these technologies have been good with globalizing organiza-

tions so long as their interactions were within the organization itself. This can be

called intra-organizational collaboration facilitated through DCOM and CORBA.

When it comes to inter-organizational collaborations, the technology that facili-

tates the communications is that of Web services. When organizations with

different cultural backgrounds (note the earlier discussion on high-context

versus low-context cultures) undergo alliance "formation," they may need all of

these communication technologies, resulting in a composite model of technology,

as discussed by Chaturvedi and Unhelkar (2003).

Figure 2. Technology and sociology influences in the formation, operation,

and folding of global alliances

Formation Operation Folding

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !104 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Operation

Once the alliances have been formed and businesses start operating under the

terms of mutual agreement as well as under the constraints and facilities

provided by the technologies, then the socio-cultural issues start taking more

prominence than in the formation stage. During operation of an alliance, there are

a range of non-technical issues that start creating major influence as well as

stress on the global alliances. These non-technical factors span the primary

socio-cultural issues as well as political and legal issues. In fact non-technical

issues tend to be confusing and chaotic even in their influence on the global

business alliances; this is primarily because they are difficult to identify and

isolate in the formation stage of the alliance, and by the time the alliance reaches

the operation stage, it is usually too late to fix these issues properly. Furthermore

there are a number of these non-technical issues that feed into each other as the

global alliance evolves. For example, the political climate of a region is bound to

influence the legal aspect of the alliance, and that, in turn, the social climate

amongst the members of the alliance. In addition to this chaotic influence of non-

technical factors on the alliance, the physical time and distance take their toll on

the way the alliance operates, resulting in an impact on the financial viability of

the alliance as well as the compatibility of the member organizations of the

alliance. As this chapter gets written, there exists a certain lacunae in the global

electronic alliance literature in terms of robust financial models for such

alliances. The lessons from the dot-com era suggest that lack of well-researched

financial models lead to weaknesses in globalization attempts and have a great

potential in bringing the downfall of globally aligned businesses. Finally, during

this operation stage of the alliances, individual skills as well as their adaptability

to different cultures plays a significant role in the success or failure of these

alliances.

Exiting

Just as formation and operation of a global alliance requires consideration of

socio-cultural factors, similarly exiting out of a global alliance also requires

detailed consideration to numerous "social" or non-technical factors as follows:

• Internal to the business itself including its employees, its operations and

finances

• Influence on the business partners of the alliance

• External to the customer and suppliers who may not be part of the alliance

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 105

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• External to the environment in which the alliance existed, including govern-

mental factors

The act of exiting out of a global alliance may itself be forced due to social (non-

technical) factors, although technical incapability or incompetence can also be

one of the reasons for closure of a business alliance. It should be noted that an

exit out of an alliance need not be necessarily negative in nature. For example,

if an alliance partner has diversified in various other areas of products and

services that are not congruent with the alliance goals, but which are rewarding

to the individual business, then that business may decide to exit out of the alliance.

At other times exits may be forced due to legal and governmental factors.

However, in all such cases, it is imperative to ensure that the exit is not sudden,

unplanned, and deleterious to the alliance members. The only way to achieve a

successful exit is to ensure that such possibilities are planned for and incorpo-

rated in the agreements that are reached during the formation stage itself. Not

only does this help if the exiting is required but, in fact, it may also help obviate

an unnecessary exit. This may happen because all members of the alliance are

fully aware, right from the outset, the effects the exits will have on them.

Therefore a member of the alliance cannot "surprise" its member partners or

cannot "hold them to ransom" by threatening an exit whose effects may be

unknown. Graceful exit from an electronic alliance is facilitated only when its

possibility is incorporated in the formation stage of the alliance.

Cultural Issues: Influence and

Mitigation in Electronic Alliances

Growing Cultural Significance

Standalone computing, even today, does not require interaction amongst individu-

als. It is self-sufficient and primarily focuses on automation of tasks. However

as computing machines are networked, enabling interaction amongst team

members, social issues related to computing start emerging. A team is an

organized entity that is managed by rules; hence networked computing maintains

a "controlled" sociological perspective. However once an entire enterprise is

networked, and especially in the global context, the challenge in terms of

sociological aspects of computing escalates, bringing the traits of teams and

individuals within the teams to the fore. Finally, when an entire industry is

networked, perhaps through technologies such as Web services, leaving a single

business thread running through the entire industry (also known as Advait

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !106 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Enterprise) the socio-cultural impact is immense. Numerous physical and

technical alliances are likely to take place when a group of organizations reach

the "Advait" level of inter-networked computing.

When such a stage of inter-networked computing is reached, the dependence of

businesses on each other through formation of alliances across geographical and

cultural borders is massive. It is crucial that such alliances start off by ensuring

that they do not imply an imposition of one organizational culture over another.

Rather it should create a new culture that brings together the best elements of

each one (Brooks, 1998). This is what is known as "synergy" and is something

we sorely need in order to successfully handle the cultural differences in global

alliances. However synergy is usually lacking in global alliances because these

alliances are often viewed solely from a financial perspective, leaving the human

resource issue as something to be dealt with later and hopefully without a great

deal of effort. And whenever change is imminent as a result of alliances, it is

usually assumed that the smaller, weaker company is the one that has the

obligation to change. Errors like these are commonplace, resulting in failure to

achieve even the basic aim of financial success. While creation of synergy

between global partners with different contextual background is expensive and

time consuming, it is still vital that this issue is addressed right from the beginning

of an alliance. The end result is far more valuable in terms of not only financial

rewards but also employee satisfaction, broadening of cultural viewpoints, and

a deeper and perhaps longer-time sustainable alliance. We now consider some

of the major reasons for cultural disparities in global alliances and what can be

done to ameliorate them.

Figure 3. Increasing impact of computing on individuals, teams,

organizations and clusters (large industrial clusters also known as Advait)

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 107

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Communications Gap

While electronic communication has never been easier, a very basic cultural

hurdle can occur in social communication. Communication between a parent

company and its foreign subsidiaries can be hampered by diverse language,

culture heritage, and physical distance (Segil, 1999). A growing and popular

example is that of a service alliance being set up between an Australian company

and Chinese company. Although few Australians would be able to converse in

a Chinese language, there are increasing numbers of Chinese who are able to

converse in English comfortably. This leaves English as the default language for

business alliances between Chinese and Australian businesses. While this

situation is certainly going to facilitate the communications between the alliance

partners, it is essential that the "foreign-ness" of English language used by the

Chinese counterparts should be considered extremely sensitively by the Austra-

lian members of this alliance. It is obvious that there are some major differences

in the nuances of expressions from these two different cultures. The Australian

culture is predominantly "low context," wherein what "you do" is important. This

requires people from these cultures to express themselves well, and, occasion-

ally as hard, as they can. The Chinese culture is context-based and depends on

the pedigree of the person, to a certain extent. Therefore a person with Chinese

cultural background, despite conversing in English, is bound to show the restraint

expected of him or her in similar conversations within the Chinese context. It is

recommended that special efforts be made before and after formal meetings to

search for thoughts that might otherwise not have been expressed, and meanings

should be clarified by spelling them out rather than taking them for granted. As

this chapter gets written, this author is personally experiencing the situation

described here as he delivers a course in object-oriented software engineering

to a group of students belonging to Nanjing University of Chinese Medicine

(NUCM), in Nanjing China. Despite the ease of electronic alliance and commu-

nication, ensuring that a "quality service" is delivered to the "clients'" numerous

perceptions and adjustments are required. Furthermore written communications

between alliance partners must receive special attention; it is easy to unintention-

ally offend by virtue of subtle language inflections that are misunderstood. E-

mails are most notorious in this regard, and more so when they come from a

different cultural background. Thus the key point in handling the communications

gap is to ensure nothing is assumed and that every small bit of information is

spelled out in detail. This effort will be well spent in ensuring that the intended

meaning is actually conveyed and that the communication gap is bridged as much

as possible and as early as possible during the formation stages of the alliance

itself.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !108 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Individual: Corporate Goal Alignment

Individuals work to their own personal goals. Organizations have their own goals.

When these two are in sync, a synergy develops. When they are out of sync, or

at times decidedly opposing each other, there is loss of energy and friction

(Unhelkar, 1998). While this is true of a single organization, this alignment factor

between individual and organization takes higher significance when global

alliances are concerned. First, it is important for the alliance to have an entity

that people (employees and customers) can identify with. This requires the

alliance to create an image of a unified entity with its purpose and goals stated

prominently and reiterated on numerous appropriate occasions. Since various

members of the alliance may not be physically in touch with each other, creating,

displaying, and understanding the goals of the alliance is a major exercise in itself.

This misalignment of individual-corporate goals within the alliance members can

destroy a global e-business alliance in its early stages, especially if it is coupled

with the previously discussed factor of communications gap. Therefore it is vital

that the business managers of such alliances ensure that there is a sustained

effort put in in aligning individuals with corporate goals within all alliance

partners.

Corporate Mistrust

Since the primary purpose of alliances is to make money, it does not come as a

surprise that alliance partners tend to eye each other skeptically in the beginning.

Given the communication gaps that exist between people in similar cultures, let

along varied ones, this scepticism can quickly build up to paranoid proportions,

resulting in a break of alliance. Thus corporate mistrust is a serious problem that,

unfortunately, is further exacerbated by managers from both countries who have

achieved their success by nurturing a tough, critical business image. Of course

it is important that each party to an alliance protect its own assets, intellectual

property, reputation, customer base, and so forth. But it is equally important to

appreciate that only a mutual win-win relationship can succeed and endure.

Hence each party should enter a relationship with a certain amount of trust in its

partner and with an attitude that the partner's success is just as important as its

own (Brooks, 1998). Cross-checking references and getting third-party recom-

mendations on business alliances, as well as checking each other's corporate

history, are some good ways of reducing corporate mistrusts.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 109

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Social Incompatibility

Socio-cultural incompatibility results when two companies with different social

environments, as well as disparate financial backing, try to get together into a

cross-border alliance. While "going global" seems to be a strategic move, social

incompatibilities existing between different countries and their cultures can

cause problems in the functioning of these global entities. For example, the

American socio-cultural context can be quite different from the German work

culture and ethos. An alliance casually put together to capitalize on the German

engineering skills and American markets can degenerate into an ugly fracas if

the differences in social and cultural contexts are not spelled out and studied prior

to the alliance formation. While the American focus may be on the financial

aspect of the alliance, it is possible that the German focus is on building a strong

foundation for the alliance or perhaps creating a knowledge base.

In yet another not-uncommon example, an alliance almost collapsed because the

two organizations had disparate staff policies due to different social background

of the participating organizations. One organization gave half-day Fridays in the

summer; the other didn't. One gave staff a day off on election day; the other

didn't. At first there was grumbling, but both organizations came together

frequently, giving everyone a chance to air their feelings. These meetings let

people come to terms with their differences and remain productive.

Failure to address differences and disparate values or operations can quickly

lead to the demise of an otherwise strong strategic alliance. The key to beating

the odds is to assess and monitor partner compatibility up front and at every step

of the way, constantly highlighting differences and creating solutions (Gupta,

2000). Studying social incompatibilities indicate that people with multicultural

background and upbringing have a much broader view of the world (Unhelkar,

2002) and therefore also of the business world. These are the people better

equipped to handle the inevitable social incompatibilities resulting from business

alliances as they are able to adopt and adapt to differing social environments

relatively easily.

Dissimilar Management Styles

Dissimilar management styles can cause culture conflict, too. One leader may

be forward thinking while the other is of the old school of management thinking,

relying on hierarchical management style. Constantine (1995) provides interest-

ing discussion on these differing management styles and their impact on software

projects - a scenario most certainly applicable in a global alliance undertaken

for an outsourced software project. A common result of these differing

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !110 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

management styles is also often seen in Scott Adam's cartoon character Dilbert.

For example, Dilbert is often shown as a staff member who is left with no

working space at all. However if one organization has a flattened hierarchy and

an open seating plan and another one doesn't, and if people and managers from

these organizations have to work together, they are bound to have different

perceptions of the entire alliance exercise. If handled properly, exposure to

different approaches to management can be liberating and enlightening. The

important thing is to be sure staff members have a chance to discuss their feelings

and work through solutions together.

Conclusion

The modern electronic business world is highly competitive and fast. To be able

to survive and prosper in such a business world, there is need for organizations

to expand their vision and their reach way beyond their traditional or home turf.

While forming electronic alliances between organizations is not that difficult,

forming corresponding physical strategic alliances is equally important, if not

more, to service the electronic alliance. However each physical alliance,

especially across geo-political boundary, is fraught with socio-cultural issues that

influence such alliances. This chapter highlighted and discussed the need for

such physical alliances, the cross-cultural issues that arise in such alliances, and

what can be done to understand and improve the socio-cultural chasms that exist

between disparate cultures of the participating organizations. Transcending

cultural boundaries requires not only awareness and understanding but also the

ability to adapt to, and leverage, the different cultures. The end result is an e-

business alliance that is well supported in its endeavour to globalize an organi-

zation through corresponding physical alliances between two or many organiza-

tions.

Acknowledgments

The author wishes to acknowledge the support of the University of Western

Sydney, notably MIRAG: Mobile Internet Research and Applications Group,

part of AeIMS research group.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global E-Business Alliances 111

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

References

Adler, I. (2001, July). Merger mess. Business Mexico.

Brooks, A. (1998). Organisational strategy. Supply Management, 3(12), 49.

Bryce R. (2001, August 29). IBM Partners Up. Interactive Week.

Chaturvedi, A., & Unhelkar, B. (2003, December). Composite business model

in achieving enterprise application integration: A Web Services perspec-

tive. Proceedings of International Business Information Management

Conference IBIM03, Egypt.

Constantine, L.L. (1995). Constantine on peopleware (Yourdon Press com-

puting series). NJ: Prentice-Hall.

Devereaus, M., & Johansen, R. (1994). Global work: Bridging distance,

culture and time. Jossey-Bass.

Grambs, P., & Zerbib, P. (2000). Caring for customers in a global marketplace.

Satellite Communications, 22(10), 24-30.

Gupta, A.K. (2000). Managing global expansion: A conceptual framework.

Business Horizons. Retrieved March from www.zdnet.com

Hammer, M., & Champy, J. (1994). Reengineering the corporation. Allen and

Unwin.

Hofstede, G. (1980) Culture's consequences: International differences in

work-related values. CA: Sage Publications.

Lan, Y. (2003). A framework for an organization's transition to globalization -

Investigation of IT issues. In S. Kamel (Ed.), Managing globally with

information technology (pp. 1-11). Hershey, PA: IRM Press.

Lan, Y. (2003). An investigation of GISM issues for successful management of

the globalization process. In St. Kamel (Ed.), Managing globally with

information technology (pp. 82-103). Hershey, PA: IRM Press.

Lan, Y., & Khandelwal, V. (2003). An empirical assessment of the organisation's

global transition pattern. Proceedings of the Fourth Annual Global

Information Technology Management World Conference, (pp. 282-

285).

Laudon & Laudon. (2002). Management information systems - Managing

digital firm (7th international ed.) Prentice-Hall.

Nuese, C. J., Cornell, J.E., & Park, S.C. (1998). Facilitating high-tech interna-

tional business alliances. Engineering Management Journal, 10(1), 25-

33.

Segil, L. (1999). Alliances for the 21st century. Executive Excellence, 16(10),

19.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !112 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Teitler, M.M. (1999). Alliances are not mergers: What problems should you

expect? Nonprofit World, 17(2), 51-53.

Unhelkar, B. (1998). Transactional analysis (TA) as applied to the human factor

in object-oriented projects. In S. Zamir (Ed.), The handbook of object

technology. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press.

Unhelkar, B. (2002, October). Multicultural societies and their impact on

creating a peaceful and prosperous global village. Proceedings of Austra-

lia-India Seminar, University of Canberra, Australia, Canberra.

Unhelkar, B. (2003a, November 24-25). Understanding the impact of cultural

issues in global e-business alliances. Proceedings of We-B Conference

with Edith Cowan University, Perth, Australia.

Unhelkar, B. (2003b). Games IT people play, Information Age, Publication of

the Australian Computer Society, 25-29.

Unhelkar, B. (2003c). New beginnings: Case study on setting up Indian chemical

engineering business in Australia. Management Today.

Unhelkar, B. (2003d). Process quality assurance for UML-based projects.

Boston: Addison-Wesley.

Unhelkar, B., & Arunatileka, D. (2003, December). Mobile technologies,

providing new possibilities in customer relationship management. Proceed-

ings of IITC Conference, Sri Lanka.

Unhelkar, B., & Elliott, R. (2003, November 23-24) The role of Web services in

e-business and globalization. Proceedings of We-B Conference with

Edith Cowan University, Perth, Australia.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 113

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter VI

Using DSS for Global

Competitiveness:

An Effective Information-Based

Decision Making Process

in Public Administration

Sherif Kamel

The American University in Cairo, Egypt

Ahmed Zyada

Middlesex University-Regional IT Institute, Cairo, Egypt

Abstract

With a changing global environment driven by the innovative evolutions of

information and communication technology, organizations are setting their

priorities to cater to a global marketplace. In that respect, they are focusing

on adding value propositions to different data and information elements

gathered to help know more about customers and various environments

where products and services are manufactured and traded. Therefore

organizations continuously need to increase their business intelligence by

monitoring systems that analyze information and develop indicators coupled

with support mechanisms to decision makers to handle semi-structured and

un-structured problems characterized by varying alternatives and

parameters to understand the problem spectrum and help develop alternative

solutions. This chapter discusses concepts and characteristics of decision

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !114 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

support methods and demonstrates the gap between the decision maker and

the decision support systems techniques demonstrating the experience of

the government of Egypt in building its information infrastructure to help

develop the decision-making process both at the government level and the

local public administration level.

Background

Organizations continuously need to increase their business intelligence by

monitoring systems that analyze information and developing indicators that are

coupled with support mechanisms to decision makers to handle various types of

decision problems characterized by varying alternatives and parameters to

understand the problem spectrum and help develop alternative solutions. The

objective is always to remain competitive and adapt to local and global organi-

zational and market changes. Decision support systems (DSS), commercially

called business intelligence (BI) solutions, represent powerful tools capable of

enhancing the capabilities of managers in facing challenges, especially at times

of continuous change. It helps improving decisions by providing accurate and

relevant information and also supports in saving time. It also helps build a

knowledge repository that can help understand the marketplace and compete

more effectively. Business intelligence, which has a broader concept than data

warehousing, is an essential component of the overall strategy of different

organizations in a world much affected by globalization and where culture,

change, competition, and technology represent influential forces in driving the

decision-making process. It is important to note that data warehousing increases

the decision-maker capabilities in a passive way due to its dependences on

historical data; however, business intelligence helps in projecting the future to be

able to set the appropriate tactical and strategic plans in a more active way and

hence realize organizational objectives. Business intelligence definitely brings

competitive advantages to the organization in the time of globalization. Its

importance is in the forward and future projection of the needs of the organiza-

tion. Strategies of the future nowadays represent the platform to decide the

actions of today, and business intelligence helps to do that. Therefore the more

it is used in strategy development, the more likely it can survive, grow, and

compete.

Little (1970) defines decision support systems as a model-based set of proce-

dures for processing data and judgments to assist a manager in his decision-

making processes. He argues that to be successful, such a system must be

simple, robust, easy to control, adaptive, complete on important issues, and easy

to communicate with. Early definitions of DSS identified it as a system intended

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 115

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

to support managerial decision makers in semi-structured and un-structured

decision situations acting as tools to decision makers to extend their capabilities

but not to replace their judgment. The human interface in the decision support

formula is invaluable and an integral complementing element to the computer-

based outcome. DSS are computer-based applications that operate interactively

online and preferably would have graphical output capabilities. As for business

intelligence tools, which are DSS for the business context, they were introduced

to overcome the problems raised from disintegrated information clusters coming

from different sources. Business intelligence tools add value to corporate

information through sophisticated analytical processing and rapid delivery and

presentation of accurate information to executives, managers, analysts, and

other knowledge workers. Its data sources vary both internally (data-ware-

house, data mart, transaction processing applications, and expert staff opinions

and recommendations) and externally (market research and survey data). The

developments and the historical path are demonstrated in Figure 1. It is important

to note that while business intelligence is more deployed in business organiza-

tions, decision support systems are more available in government organizations

and public administration.

Decision Support Systems

Organizations are increasingly in search of effective vehicles that can help them

increase their benefits of stored data within the organization and transform such

Figure 1. Development of management support systems

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !116 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

data into information and knowledge. There is always a need to explore the

marketplace, the competition, and the economic environment among other

constituencies in the community and to possess the mechanism and the internal

business intelligence that can transform the knowledge of the society into inputs

that can help formulate the organization's strategy. Such knowledge affects the

business and organizational decision-making process at all levels. It also contrib-

utes to the organizational knowledge that is compiled from both internal and

external sources. From day-to-day business tasks to the major strategic issues

such as taxation policy and long-term business planning, information is required

that is timely, accurate, and effective for the overall business decision process.

In that respect decision support systems help decision makers generate alterna-

tives and choose among the optimal course of action that can help attain the

business goals (Kamel, 1998). The role of information experts and human

interface will remain invaluable to assess the variable in the marketplace that can

affect the performance of the organization.

DSS applications are designed, delivered, and institutionalized in different

sectors and industries such as the health sector, tourism, petroleum, banking, and

agriculture, among others. The usefulness of such applications varies in solving

problems. They are not all equal in solving problems or in supporting decision-

making processes where some of them are more intelligent than others in terms

of quality and response time, which brings the concept of intelligent density,

which is a scale for these systems to solve problems or to support decisions. The

intelligent density concept; therefore, provides the decision maker with a ranking

mechanism so whenever he/she has a problem or needs a support, then there is

a need to select a tool based on the most intelligent capacities available. Such

capacities also change and adapt from time to time according to the case in hand;

that is, it could be viewed as a one-time system with many variables to be adjusted

and adapted.

Some other definitions include Simon (1977), who mentions that managerial

decision making is synonymous with the whole process of management; Little

(1970), who claims that it is a model-based set of procedures for processing data

and judgments to assist a manager in his decision making; and Keen (1980), who

claims that DSS apply to situations where a final system can be developed only

through an adaptive process of learning and evolution (Turban & Aronson,

2001). The decision-making process is also bound to the changes in the

marketplace, and that is why it usually goes through the design, development,

implementation, and institutionalization phases with continuous adaptation. Un-

less such adaptation takes place, more problems occur because of dissatisfaction

of the decision maker, who attempts to reach a process that can help him make

the most optimal decision. The institutionalization process is a continuous process

that allows for regular changes to fit the environment, whether internal or

external. The problem identification process also includes and is complemented

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 117

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

by the problem classification and decomposition. It is important to note that the

nature of the problem could vary from totally structured to semi-structured to

unstructured. This actually defines and forces the information system model to be

used to handle the problem and the challenge faced by the decision maker. In the

problem decomposition phase many problems and issues could be divided into sub

problems. In that respect, there are three phases of the decision-making process.

Phase I - Intelligence Phase

This phase is concerned with gathering information from different sources and

being aware of occasions when a decision is required, routinely collecting

knowledge relevant to the business area, and classifying and storing it. The

intelligence phase focuses on the identification of organizational goals and

objectives related to an issue of concern, such as inventory management and

determining whether they are being met. The intelligence phase relies on

extensive quality information. Information about the market, competition, and

potential new products, services, and elements affecting the decision making

process are essential for survival and growth.

Phase II - Design Phase

This phase handles the full understanding of the problem and is concerned with

designing, developing, and analyzing various solutions. The feasibility of possible

solutions and a model of the problem is built and tested. This can be implemented

by accessing information, generating business models, and using communication

mechanisms to readily share and consolidate results and identify the best

solution. Comparative analysis reports and mapping between different scenarios

is essential. Moreover simulation models enable the decision maker to experi-

ment, to try different scenarios to determine the most feasible solutions affecting

different decisions and business processes.

Phase III - Choice Phase

This phase reflects the selection among the different alternatives. Numerous

feedback and alternatives are being discussed, and it is up to the decision maker

with his support aids to aim for the optimal solution. It is important to note that

some problems have one clear solution agreeable to all involved, but it is often

the case that a lot of allowable solutions exist, and the choice or selection are not

quite easy. This phase, supported by modern presentation tools, help the entire

team to choose the solution.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !118 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Decision Support Systems

Characteristics and Capabilities

It is important to mention that decision support systems characteristics and

capabilities include: (a) providing support to several interdependent and/or

sequential decisions, (b) supporting a variety of decision-making processes and

styles, (c) adapting over time where the decision maker should be reactive, able

to confront changing conditions quickly, and able to adapt the DSS to meet these

changes, (d) supporting various managerial levels, ranging from top executives

to line managers, and (e) supporting individuals as well as groups with less

structured problems.

Decision Support System Application

Decision support systems application, mainly targeting senior executives and

chief executive officers, could be composed of the following subsystems (a) data

management subsystem, which includes a database that contains relevant data

for the case analyzed and is managed by a software (database management

system) that could be connected with the corporate data warehouse; (b) model

management subsystems, which are a software package that includes financial,

statistical, and other quantitative models that provide the system's analytical

capabilities and appropriate software management as well as modeling language

for building custom models; (c) knowledge-based subsystem that provides

expertise in solving complex unstructured and semi-structured problems through

the use of expert or other intelligent systems; (d) user interface including all

communication between a user and the DSS software through graphical user

interfaces; and (e) users who are different including managers, decision makers,

knowledge workers, business analysts, and staff.

Decision Support Systems Classification

Pending the nature of information and knowledge required, decision support

systems could be identified and classified as follows: (a) text-oriented DSS, (b)

database-oriented DSS, and (c) model-oriented-DSS. With respect to text-

oriented DSS, information (including data and knowledge) is often stored in a

textual format and accessed by decision makers. A text-oriented DSS supports

decision makers by electronically keeping track of textually represented infor-

mation that could have a bearing on decisions. It allows documents to be

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 119

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

electronically created, revised, and viewed as needed. Information and commu-

nication technology such as Web-based, document imaging, hypertext, and

intelligent agents can be incorporated into text-oriented DSS applications. With

respect to database-oriented DSS, the database organization plays a major role

in the DSS structure. Early generations of database-oriented DSS mainly used

the relational database configuration. The information handled by relational

databases tended to be huge, descriptive, and rigidly structured. A database-

oriented DSS features strong report generation and query capabilities. With

respect to spreadsheet-oriented DSS, a spreadsheet represents a modeling

language that allows the user to write models for analysis. Such models not only

create, view, and modify descriptive knowledge but also instruct the system to

execute its self-contained instructions and is effective support for end user-

developed DSS such as Excel and Lotus.

Based on the theoretical overview, following is the experience of a developing

nation, Egypt, in developing its national information infrastructure and the

utilization of decision support systems in attempting to solve its socio-economic

problems as well as render the business community more aware and sensible to

the massive support, accurate, timely, and relevant information could introduce

to the business sector and help it compete globally.

Building Egypt's Information Society

Egypt is home to more than 70 million people and growing at an estimated rate

of 1.9% (www.mcit.gov.eg). Egypt is one of the largest economies in the Middle

East. The nation's current economic growth rate stands at 3.1% annually with

an inflation rate of 6% (www.economic.idsc.gov.eg). It is undergoing privatization

and liberalization of a number of its major economic sectors. Although the

population is settled on only 4% of its land, which extends to around 1 million

square kilometers, infrastructure development and extension reaches all 26

different provinces. Infrastructure is growing in two directions, horizontally to

provide the basic needs of the society and vertically to keep pace with the

developments taking place worldwide in different sectors, including information

and communication technology. Egypt has a large service sector mainly built

around tourism and transportation. Its major exports are human resource

capacities, petroleum products, cotton, and leather products; its major imports

are food, machinery, and vehicles. Agriculture accounts for nearly 16% of the

gross domestic product, industry 35%, and services 49% (www.mcit.egov.eg).

Information technology has been identified by the government of Egypt since the

mid 1980s as a potential player and a platform for growth.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !120 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

In 2001, the information technology market was valued at 849 million U.S. dollars

with an annual growth rate of 16.3% and by 2004, the value of the market is

expected to reach 1.315 billion U.S. dollars with a compounded average growth

rate (CAGR) of 16.1% from 1998 (American Chamber of Commerce in Egypt,

2002). It is important to note that although information technology came to Egypt

in the early 1960s, it was only in September 1999 that it was featured extensively

on the agenda when the government of Egypt took a major step toward the

deployment of information and communication technology for socio-economic

development following the earlier steps and projects that had started since the

mid 1980s. In that respect, the ministry of communications and information

technology were established. Moreover a three-year national ICT plan was

formulated that addressed the following issues: upgrading the current telecom-

munications infrastructure to build an effective and accountable infrastructure

that can provide Egypt and the Middle East and North Africa region with reliable,

effective, and affordable telecommunications services; creating a legislative

environment conducive to encouraging local and foreign investors to operate in

the ICT field; creating local demand for the ICT industry to motivate local and

foreign investors; targeting international markets by creating an ICT industry

capable of competing globally and transforming the sector into an export-led

industry in order to capture a greater share of the global market; developing

qualified human resources to develop and employ cutting-edge information and

communication technologies; and attracting foreign investment through global

alliances (www.mcit.gov.eg). The plans developed and the resources allocated

were capitalizing on an earlier effort that was put together since 1985 and had

resulted in the establishment of the Cabinet Information and Decision Support

Center (IDSC), which introduced to both the public and private sector for the first

time the concepts of using computer-based decision support systems for

business and socio-economic purposes.

Decision Support Systems in Egypt

Decision support systems, since their inception in the 1970s, have been differ-

ently defined and conceptualized by vendors, researchers, and academic com-

mentators. However there has been general agreement that decision support

systems are computer-based systems that help decision-makers confront ill-

structured problems through direct interaction with data and analytical models.

Some of the classic DSS texts show that the focus of research and application

of decision support systems has to a large extent been on individual managers and

on organizational decision processes, largely for the private sector. Thus DSS

are mainly represented as providing a set of opportunities directed toward

improving the effectiveness and productivity of managers and professionals,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 121

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

boosting the organization's competitive edge, and rationalizing the decision

making process within an organizational context. They aim at realizing the desire

for accurate, timely, and relevant information to help individual managers in

organizations deal with an increasingly turbulent economic environment and the

growing pressures of competition. Much less emphasis has been given to the

application of DSS in three particular areas: (a) their use with groups (although

group decision support systems nevertheless represent a significant domain of

research and application); (b) their use in the public sector; and (c) their use to

support socioeconomic development.

In many ways, Egypt is a typical developing country. It faces the common

problems of developing countries such as heavy foreign debt, a balance of

payments deficit, a high illiteracy rate, poor technological infrastructure, lack of

financial resources, and high unemployment. It has been striving to implement a

nation-wide strategy to support the realization of its targeted socioeconomic

development program to deal with these problems. Over the last decade Egypt

has managed to restructure many of its sectors and has improved the position of

its economy and is striving to complete the economic reform program, although

sometimes being hindered by internal economic deterrents as well as by external

effects that affect the growth of the economy at large.

In the mid 1980s, the government of Egypt adopted a far-reaching supply-push

strategy for the introduction, implementation, and institutionalization of large

information and decision support systems intended to improve strategic decision

making at the Cabinet level with respect to socioeconomic development. The

strategy had to be tailor-made to the decision-making needs of the Cabinet of

Egypt, which addresses a variety of socio-economic development issues. These

issues include public sector reform, administrative reform, debt management,

and privatization. The nature of these issues makes them adaptive to the

environment and liable to continuous changes taking place locally, regionally, and

globally. Before decision support systems were implemented, the following

characteristics were identified within Cabinet decision making: (a) it was data

rich but information poor; (b) information systems and management specialists

were isolated from the decision makers; and (c) computer systems were not

viewed as tools that could support decision making. Moreover, the focus of

improvements was more on technical issues rather than on decision outcomes.

Despite these undoubted obstacles a project was initiated to support Cabinet-

level decision making through state-of-the-art information technology tools and

techniques (Kamel, 1996, 1998). In 1985, the Cabinet of Egypt established the

Information and Decision Support Center (IDSC), whose mission is to provide

information and decision support services to the Cabinet for socioeconomic

development. The objectives of IDSC included: (a) developing information and

decision support systems for the Cabinet and top policy makers in Egypt; (b)

supporting the establishment of decision support systems/centers in different

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !122 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

ministries and making more efficient and effective use of available information

resources; (c) initiating, encouraging, and supporting informatics projects that

could accelerate managerial and technological development of Egyptian minis-

tries, sectors, and governorates; and (d) participating in international co-

operation activities in the areas of information and decision support.

The Cabinet's IDSC activities accommodate four different domains: (a) The

Cabinet for which IDSC provides information, decision support, crisis manage-

ment support, modeling, and analysis of various high priority issues and multi-

sectors information and database developments; (b) the economic sectors for

which IDSC provides assistance in the development of decision support systems/

centers, advice, and consultancy in the area of information and decision support

services, sectors' database development, and project financing and support; (3)

the economy for which IDSC provides assistance in policy formulation and

drafting, as well as support for legislative reform and human and technical

infrastructure development; and (4) the national information and technological

infrastructure for which IDSC provides opportunities and facilities for technol-

ogy transfer to Egypt as well as to other developing countries through the

establishment of generic DSS models for socioeconomic development. Follow-

ing are four different decision support cases that were managed and analyzed by

the Cabinet of Egypt Information and Decision Support Center and set the pace

for other cases that deployed advanced information systems in developing

scenarios for socio-economic challenges.

Decision Support Cases

a. DSS for Strategic Issues: DSS-Based Debt Management System

During the 1990s, economic rebuilding efforts required Egypt to accumulate a

foreign debt of about 33 billion U.S. dollars covered in 5,000 loans. These loans

needed to be monitored for debt service payments, term re-negotiations, interest

rate levels, and payment management and scheduling. The magnitude of the debt

burden led the reform of the debt management program to become a priority

issue at Cabinet level. Hence IDSC initiated, developed, and implemented a debt

management system aimed at the rationalization of debt utilization and at debt

reduction and rescheduling. The system was developed to provide a manage-

ment tool to support and facilitate the registration, monitoring, control, and

analysis of Egypt's debts.

Over a period of 18 months a national comprehensive database, located in the

Central Bank of Egypt, was developed by IDSC's technical staff. The database

included details of government debts and payments, linked to a debt payments

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 123

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

transaction processing system. The database was provided with decision support

system capabilities, enabling the implications of different debt management

scenarios to be tested. Throughout the development phase a number of technical

and cultural problems came up that caused delays and frustration, including

hardware requirements, software availability, and processing of operations.

Cultural issues included the fact that most of the software was developed and

interfaced in English, which represented a problem for many Egyptian users. The

impacts of the system, using decision support tools and generators, was the

successful negotiation of debt rescheduling with 14 countries. Negotiation was

smoothly managed through the provision of grounded information support that

was made available via the DSS. Moreover loans have been viewed ever since

as part of a comprehensive, integrated, and dynamic portfolio rather than being

managed on an isolated case-by-case basis.

b. DSS for Strategic Issues: Customs Reform Program DSS

Through one of its reform programs the Cabinet of Egypt was about to impose

a new set of customs tariffs, largely for imported goods, which were intended to

reduce the burden on low-income groups, increase the revenue of the govern-

ment, and create a homogeneous and consistent tariff structure. Anticipation of

the tariff changes caused stagnation in the business sector for four months. As

a result, multi-sectors conflicts arose between six different ministries. Hence

some form of decision support system was needed to resolve the conflict and to

support imposition of the new tariffs.

Therefore a team consisting of Ministry of Finance and IDSC personnel was

formed to interact with the different parties, get feedback, and generate different

scenarios to be assessed. A computerized DSS was developed, as a result of

which the various inter-ministerial conflicts were resolved within a four-week

period. Moreover a tariff structure was formulated, based on the various

scenarios and alternatives that were generated by the decision-support system.

The government endorsed the new tariff model, which was also accepted by the

business sector.

c. Sectoral DSS: Ministry of Electricity DSS

The increasing cost of government subsidy to electricity generation in Egypt

were continuously enlarging the country's balance of payments deficit and

adding to public sector debt. To help address this issue, IDSC developed a

decision support system for the Ministry of Electricity that was intended to: (a)

assess the impact of tariff changes on different income groups, (b) provide

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !124 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

statistical data on power and energy generation, (c) provide statistical data on the

distribution and consumption of electricity, and (d) assist decision making about

the pricing and management of loans within the electricity sector.

A joint team was formed from IDSC and Ministry of Electricity staff. While the

ministry staff collected data from different sources, IDSC staff focused on issue

structuring, systems and human resource development, and, more importantly,

on managing the process of developing and delivering the decision support

system. During the implementation process, drought emerged in the sources of

the river Nile, causing a dramatic drop in the hydroelectric power generated by

the Aswan dam and necessitating the provision of 5 million U.S. dollars to fund

the rapid construction of three power-generating stations. As a result, the

Ministry of Water Resources was drawn into contributing to the project, since

it became a stakeholder in the decision-support system design process. At this

stage the project team therefore incorporated a third group from the Ministry of

Water Resources to cover the issues relating to hydroelectric power. In part the

recognition of the ministry as a key stakeholder in electricity generation and its

inclusion in energy decision making was one of the main outcomes of the DSS

design and implementation process. The DSS also led to decisions about a new

electricity tariff after assessment of the possible alternatives generated by the

decision support model and the evaluation of their impacts on different income

groups. The case showed that design and implementation processes are insepa-

rable and evolutionary throughout the entire information systems lifecycle.

d. Information Infrastructure Build-Up: Governorates' Decision

Support Centers

Once IDSC realized the vital role of information in decision making and in socio-

economic development, it adopted a supply-push strategy to improve administra-

tive effectiveness at the provinces level through the use of information and

decision support tools and techniques. The project aimed to rationalize the

decision making process of the governors through the use of state-of-the-art

information technology. The project adopted its supply-push strategy through the

implementation of two parallel policies: the development of an infrastructure for

informatics and decision support systems, and the development of human

capabilities in the areas of information, computers, and communications. To

fulfill this strategy, IDSC developed a comprehensive information base for the

governorates through the establishment, in each governorate, of a governorate

information and decision support center (GIDSC) to introduce and diffuse

information technology and to re-envision the role of the governorates in

development planning. The impact of GIDSCs was reflected in the number of

information and decision support cases delivered and in the diffusion of informa-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 125

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

tion technology knowledge and use at the governorate level. Moreover the work

of the GIDSCs led to the introduction and implementation of a new law for local

administration - representing a direct result of the project - that allowed

decentralization of decision making authority and power to the governors. It is

important to note that the GIDSCs had a direct impact on the structure of decision

making at the governorate level (Kamel, 1996).

Managing the Process from Design to

Institutionalization

The experience of managing the development, design, and implementation of

decision-support systems such as those described above can be generalized as

a set of steps and procedures for future use of decision support systems in similar

cases. IDSC adopted a two-phased approach for the implementation and

institutionalization of its issue-based decision support systems projects (El Sherif

& El Sawy, 1988). The first phase (implementation) was concerned with the

realization of decision support systems and includes a particular focus on model

building. The second phase (institutionalization) was concerned with embedding

the DSS into their organizational contexts and includes a particular focus on

management. The implementation phase was typically divided into three parts:

(a) the identification of policy needs and the full mobilization of human and

technical resources to achieve effective response and support, (b) the identifi-

cation of decision areas and information requirements, thus translating the

planned policy support into specific issues of concern for the recipient organiza-

tion; and (c) the formulation of projects with specific goals and dedicated human

and technical resources for each potential area of policy and/or decision support.

DSS project teams were selected to provide fast response and a focus on results

and action. They were two-tier teams comprising government bureaucrats and

professional technocrats able to deal with bureaucracy and IT professionals

competent to handle state-of-the-art information and decision support technolo-

gies. These two-tier teams were hybrids that represented one of the key success

factors in bridging the application gap between systems builders and applications

users (Kamel, 2001).

The institutionalization phase covered IDSC's experience with designing, devel-

oping and implementing decision support systems for development planning

purposes. This experience suggested that managing institutionalization is as

important as model building and that institutionalization is a complementary and

integrated process that accompanies systems development, design, and imple-

mentation. It comprises six components as shown in Table 1.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !126 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The use of decision support systems in development planning led to the

identification of a number of challenges related to strategic public sector decision

making, decision-support systems, and the implementation and institutionaliza-

tion of rational management approaches. It is important to identify and deal with

these challenges effectively to be able to deploy such advanced information

systems in a way to render the organization more competitive both locally and

internationally within a global environment that is consistently and continuously

changing. Table 2 demonstrates such challenges.

Lessons Learned

Based on the implementation of more than 500 projects targeted at the develop-

ment and diffusion of decision-support systems in Egypt for development

planning, the following set of lessons learned can be summarized and could be

Table 1. Institutionalization phases

Phase Actions Taken

Adaptation Various modifications needed to fit the contextual

and cultural characteristics of the application

environment, such as making use of available

Arabized software and designing and developing

tools and utilities to support and facilitate the use of

Arabic-interface software.

Diffusion Spreading the use of decision-support systems and

developing the information technology infrastructure

across all organizational levels.

Adoption Personalized use of information technology tools and

techniques by decision makers as well as their

support staff.

Monitoring and

Tracking

Addressing critical issues, assumptions, priorities,

and information and decision requirements, and

tracking changes in technology and its potential input

to the decision-making process.

Value

Assessment

Reviewing the contribution of decision support

systems to public sector strategic decision making in

Egypt in terms of tangible and intangible benefits

such as: improved decision making at the Cabinet

and governorate levels and more efficient use of

available resources.

Evaluation Appraising, analyzing, and validating value-added

benefits of decision support systems developed for

socio-economic development planning.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 127

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

used as possible models for similar implementations in similar settings in

developing nations and in public administration environments. The lessons are:

• Structuring of socioeconomic decision-related issues is an integral part of

the design and implementation of decision support systems dealing with

national development planning.

• Providing decision support systems requires much time and effort in

building and integrating databases from multiple data sources and sectors.

Table 2. Implementation challenges

Strategic Public Sector Decision Making Decision Support Systems

Development

Efficient and effective use of scarce

resources

Factors determining implementation

of socio-economic development

planning

Ill-structured nature of strategic

decision making processes

Turbulent and dynamic environment

within which decisions have to be

made

Crisis management mode of

operation for many strategic

decisions in the public sector

Strategic decision making is usually

a group effort rather than an

individual one

Need for conflict resolution in

strategic decision making, given the

major issues and stakeholders

involved

Formulation, development, and

implementation of policy reform

programs

Managing the development

of multiple information and

decision support systems

Institutionalization of such

systems within their

application contexts

Development of usable

decision-support systems

interfaces

Availability of decision

support systems tools and

generators relevant to

different sectors and

applications

Practical Implementation and Institutionalization of DSS

Resistance to change

Lack of timely, adequate information about user needs

Lack of user involvement

User language problems

Lack of top management support

Lack of continuous communication from users

Difficulty of problem definition

Difficulty of responding to user needs

Inadequacy of model evaluation

Poor documentation

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !128 Kamel & Zyada

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Developing a decision-support system to address one socio-economic issue

might affect other issues that should be put into consideration during the

design phase to save time and effort and avoid duplication of activities.

• Providing decision-support systems for development planning is often

urgent and critical; hence the design should allow for a crisis management

mode of operation.

• Providing crisis management teams with managerial and technical support

capabilities is essential.

• Depending on timely, effective and accurate information is essential for

effective decision-support systems.

• Implementing successful decision-support systems are necessary but not a

sufficient condition for successful institutionalization of DSS.

• Integrating implementation and institutionalizations processes of decision-

support systems is vital.

• Implementing successful decision-support systems requires top manage-

ment support; institutionalizing successfully the process requires broader

organizational support.

• Evaluating and assessing decision-support systems is a vital ongoing

process to provide a real-time response to changes occurring in the

environment.

• Conducting continuous multi-level capacity development plans is crucial for

the successful adoption, adaptation, and diffusion of decision-support

systems within organizations.

References

American Chamber of Commerce in Egypt. (2002). Information technology in

Egypt (Business Studies and Analysis Center).

Economic News Letter. (2004). Newsletter. Retrieved January 24, 2004, from

www.economic.idsc.gov.eg

El Sherif, H., & El Sawy. O. (1988). Issue-based decision support systems for

the cabinet of Egypt. MIS Quarterly, 12.

Kamel, S. (1996, May 19-22). Decision support systems for strategic decision

making. Proceedings of the 7th International Conference of the

Information Resources Management Association, Washington D.C.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Using DSS for Global Competitiveness 129

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Kamel, S. (1998). Decision support systems and strategic public sector

decision making in Egypt in information systems for public sector

management. Working paper series, Institute for Development Policy and

Management, University of Manchester.

Kamel, S. (2001). Using DSS for crisis management, annals of cases on

information technology applications and management in organization

(Vol. 3). Hershey, PA: Idea Group Publishing.

Keen, P.G.W. (1980). Decision support systems: A research perspective.

Working paper, Sloan School of Management.

Little, J.D.C. (1970). Models and managers: The concept of a decision calculus.

Management Science, 16(8), B466-485.

Ministry of Communications and Information Technology. (2004). Report.

Retrieved January 28, 2004, from www.mcit.gov.eg

Simon, H.A. (1977). The new science of management decision (revised ed.).

Prentice Hall.

Turban, E., & Aronson, J.E. (2001). Decision support systems and intelligent

systems (6th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !130 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter VII

A Proposed

Framework for

Making Decisions

Dynamically in a

Global Organisation

Sokkien Leeane Chhai

University of Western Sydney, Australia

Yi-chen Lan

University of Western Sydney, Australia

Abstract

A proposed framework for making decisions dynamically in a global

organisation has been developed. This framework enables data to be

retrieved and analysed dynamically with the aid of technology. This

chapter starts with the discussion of various types of global organisational

and departments within a global organisation. It is followed by the

investigation and identification of organisational data and decisions that

make up the global organisation; it also examines the different enabling

technologies that can be applied for information retrieval. The chapter

concludes with a proposed framework for making decisions dynamically in

a global organisation.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 131

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Introduction

Organisational structures and strategies are the key elements used to differen-

tiate the different types of global organisations. These organisational structures

and strategies determine the control formations and the way that organisations

make their decisions. A "global" organisation is known as a centralised hub

where foreign subsidiaries are tightly controlled by the headquarters (Bartlett &

Ghoshal, 1989). Global organisations are emerging as huge global information

systems with a multitude of subsidiaries located around the globe. This informa-

tion system contains critical data that needs to be categorised and organised, thus

decisions can be dynamically and accurately made by management.

One of the major barriers that global organisations face today is a way to utilise

data and information from their information systems to the best of their

advantage. The departments and data located in global organisations are very

similar to other types of organisations; the major difference here is the type of

decisions that the global organisations make in regard to competitive advantage.

With these huge global information systems, global organisations require a

mechanism or framework that allows the data in the information systems to be

retrieved and analysed dynamically. A framework for making decisions

dynamically in a global organisation has been proposed as the main objective

of this study. This framework consists of three layers: data, technology, and

decision.

In conclusion an example using intelligent agents and data mining is discussed.

This example illustrates how the framework can be applied using the agent-

based technology.

Literature Review

Global Organisation Structures

The type of strategy the organisation uses defines the organisation. Organisational

strategy is defined by Hill (2003) as the actions that managers take to achieve

the organisation's goals. These strategies have a direct affect on the way

organisations make their decisions and distribute their information. Generally,

there are four types of global models or strategies (Bartlett & Ghoshal, 1989;

Karimi & Konsynski, 1991):

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !132 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

1. Multinational organisation model (multinational strategy)

2. International organisation model (international strategy)

3. Global organisation model (global strategy)

4. Transnational organisation model (transnational strategy)

These four organisational models or strategies determine how the organisations

carry out their business activities and operations.

The multinational organisational model is said to be a "decentralised federation"

(Bartlett & Ghoshal, 1989). A "decentralised federation" means that each of the

organisation's foreign units is permitted to modify the product and or service to

suit their national conditions (Hill, 2003). In a decentralised federation the

responsibilities, assets, and decision-making are widely spread. Thus the

organisation treats its foreign national units as part of its "international portfolio."

The subsidiaries in the multinational structure are fairly independent, although

the headquarters maintains the financial controls on the subsidiary. The subsid-

iary must also report to the headquarters.

The international organisation model is said to be a "co-ordinated federation"

(Bartlett & Ghoshal, 1989). A "co-ordinated federation" transfers knowledge

and technology to their foreign subsidiaries that are less advanced in the market.

These subsidiaries are able to adapt to their market and adopt different strategies

(Karimi & Konsynski, 1991). Under the co-ordinated federation the subsidiaries

are dependant on the parent company for new products, services, processes, and

ideas, although some responsibilities, resources, and decisions are decentralised.

This dependence allows headquarters to have more coordination and control

over their subsidiaries. The subsidiaries are considered an integral part of the

central domestic operations.

The global organisation model is said to be a "centralised hub" (Bartlett &

Ghoshal, 1989). In this model the organisation focuses on marketing a standardised

product worldwide (Hill, 2003). This "centralised" structure allows the head-

quarters to tightly control the foreign subsidiaries. These subsidiaries are limited

to the sales and services of the product. Their main role is to implement the

policies and procedures developed by the headquarters. The headquarters

considers their subsidiaries as a channel to a unified global market.

Transnational organisation model is said to be an "integrated network" (Bartlett

& Ghoshal, 1989). In this integrated network the subsidiaries are viewed as a

valuable source of information, ideas, and skills, which can benefit the organisation.

The organisation is able to coordinate the foreign subsidiaries as well as give

these subsidiaries the ability to respond to their foreign interests and preferences.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 133

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Decision Making in Global Organisations

Decision making in general is a complex process; it is even more complex in

global organisations where the organisation's subsidiaries are spread across

geographical regions. Depending upon the strategy that an organisation adopts,

the division of decision making is different.

The decision making in multinational organisation is widely spread across the

subsidiaries. Generally the strategic decisions are decentralised and the head-

quarters only have a simple form of financial control on the subsidiaries. The

subsidiaries have the control of modifying products and services to suit their

national needs.

In international organisations the decision-making is decentralised only to a

certain extent; the subsidiaries are dependent on the parent company for ideas,

processes, products, information, and services. These subsidiaries, however, are

able to adapt to their local environment and make their own strategic choice with

the guide from the headquarters.

Global organisations, however, have tight central control of their decisions,

resources, and information (Karimi & Konsynski, 1991). Since global organisations

have such tight controls over their subsidiaries, senior management usually

performs decision-making. Subsidiaries are considered as a "channel," or way

to deliver the goods and or services. Therefore subsidiaries do not have the ability

to modify the product and or service.

In a transnational organisation the decision-making process is supported by a

complex process of coordination and cooperation in an environment of shared

decision-making (Karimi & Konsynski, 1991). This is due to the way these

organisations treat their subsidiaries, a source of valuable information and ideas.

Information Systems and Decision Support for Global Organisations

There are various forms of information systems; these include: transaction

processing systems, management information systems, executive information

systems, global information systems, decision support systems, and knowledge-

based systems. Within these information systems lies the data that is needed for

decision making. Table 1 is a summary of the types of information systems,

taking note that it is not possible to list all the types of information systems that

are in use.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !134 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Using Artificial Intelligence to Support Decision Making

The use of artificial intelligence (AI) to support decision making is a relatively

new field, although expert- and knowledge-based systems have been designed

based on AI principles. Table 2 summarises three types of AI technologies that

can be applied to the decision-making process.

Table 1. Comparison of information and decision support systems

Name Characteristics

Transaction

Processing System

(TPS)

- Collects and stores data about transactions.

- Data editing, data correction, and data manipulation.

- Elementary day-to-day activities of an organisation.

- Provides summarised data for decision-making.

Management

Information Systems

(MIS)

- Provides information to organisation's managers.

- Provides standardised or predefined reports.

- Generates information on performance, coordination,

background information of organisation.

- Extracts and summarise data from TPS.

Executive

Information Systems

(EIS)

- Computerised information system.

- Provides easy access to information from different

sources.

- Provides organisational performance data, internal

communication, and environment scanning.

- Designed for individual use.

- Displays data in an interactive way.

Global Information

Systems

- Data communication network that crosses national

boundaries.

- Accesses data and process data across these

boundaries.

- Able to link up with foreign subsidiaries' information

systems.

Decision Support

Systems (DSS)

- Interactive, computer-based information system.

- Offers information and data and analysis models to

assist in decision making.

- Used for the support of structured and ill-structured

decisions.

- Produces reports.

- Conducts decision analysis and obtains responses to

queries.

Knowledge Based

Systems (KBS) or

Expert Systems

- Supports and automates decision making in an area

where experts are better suited to provide answers.

- Constructs conclusions or answers based on the

information it receives.

- Uses rules to determine conclusions.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 135

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Dynamic Decision Making

According to Busemeyer (1999) dynamic decision making is defined by three

common characteristics:

1. Series of actions taken over time to achieve an overall goal,

2. Actions are interdependent, since later decisions depend on these actions,

and

3. Environmental changes are spontaneous and/or a result of earlier actions.

The literature in this field is mostly divided into two parts (Park, Kim, Yi, Jun, &

Moon, 1996). First the researchers conduct rigorously controlled experiments to

construct rigid computational models of dynamic decision making and second

they research the concerns of dynamic decision-making in real world problems.

Park et al. (1996) have proposed a framework for dynamic decision making in

the real world at macro level based on the cognitive theory of problem solving.

Their research is based on conducting three experiments using simulated

management games to examine the relationship between the strategy used to

search the dual problem spaces (this consists of a model space and a decision

space) and the resulting dynamic decision being made.

Table 2. Three types of AI technologies for decision-making process

Name Characteristic

Case-Based

Reasoning

(CBR)

- Based on the idea of locating past cases that are

similar to the current case.

- Decision support technique.

- Provides knowledge on the case.

Intelligent

Agents (IA)

- Autonomous, goal-directed computerised process

that can be used to perform background work.

- Qualities include: reactivity, proactiveness, and

social ability.

- Ability to sort and filter data.

Neural

Networks

- Also called connectionists networks, systems that are

interconnected artificial neurons.

- Information system that can recognise the objects

and different patterns based on the examples that

have been used to guide it.

- Built assuming that no explicit knowledge exists,

using a mathematical technique.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !136 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Furthermore the study determines the amount of inferences made in the model

space and how the performance is affected when making dynamic decisions in

pairs or alone. Literature in this area is diverse. There are many articles on

dynamic decision making theories and models (Roe, Busemeyer, & Townsend,

1999).

Global Organisation Departments, Data,

and Decisions

General Global Organisation Departments

Global organisations are made up of a variety of different departments that work

together to ensure that all data and information is up to date. It is often hard to

synchronise data and information due to time zones, language barriers, and the

geographical locations. It is important to remember that global organisations

have a highly "centralised" nature, in that all decisions are made at the

headquarters and foreign subsidiaries only carry out and implement the proce-

dures and policies set out by the headquarters.

Generally speaking, it is impossible to list all the different types of departments

in a global organisation since each organisation is involved in a particular type of

field. This framework focuses on the general departments that can be found in

any organisation, including global organisations. According to Daft (2001) there

are four departmental groupings that can be applied to the organisational

structure; these are: functional grouping, divisional grouping, multi-focused

grouping, and horizontal grouping. For this study the global organisation depart-

ments will be in the functional grouping form (Figure 1).

Figure 1. General departments in a global organisation

Global Organisation

Management

Finance

Accounting

Human

Resources Production

Purchasing

Procurement

Sales Marketing

Research

Development

Information

Technology

Business

Development

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 137

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The management department here is in a global text, that is, in a true global

organisation the management department oversees the subsidiaries on behalf of

the headquarters.

General Global Organisation Department Data

The following descriptions of data for each department are very general; it is not

possible to list all data types found in each department, so the following types of

data are just a general list. It also good to note that the data types can belong to

more than one department.

1. Data in the management department consist of subsidiary, region, country,

financial performance, financial budget, corporate resource, stakeholder,

corporate image, audit, meetings, corporate strategies, legislation, policy,

standards, guidelines, security, insurance, and international laws.

2. Finance and accounting data consist of account, asset, liabilities, funds,

financial performance, payroll, invoice, receipt, vendor, customer, and

subsidiary information.

3. Data in the human resources department consist of employee, compensa-

tion benefits, contractor, incentives, job, policy, union/industrial relations,

training, and development information.

4. Production data consist of product, production, storage, raw material,

machinery, packaging, labelling, policy, and standards.

5. Data in the procurement and purchasing department consist of import, raw

materials, purchase product, and vendors.

6. Sales department data consist of product, service, customer, region, retail

store, policy and standards, and inventory.

7. Data in the marketing department comprise products, services, promotion,

market, survey, competition, customer, economic trends, industry trends,

policy, strategies, and guidelines.

8. Information technology (IT) department data consist of system, software,

network, architecture, policy, standards, guidelines, strategic IT plan,

business continuity plan, disaster recovery plan, technology resources,

security, and infrastructure.

9. Data in the research and development department consist of new products,

new services, ideas, global standards, resources, and subsidiaries.

10. Data in the business development department consist of business strate-

gies, investment strategies, market research, financial performance, inter-

national laws, legislation, policy, standards, and guidelines.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !138 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Types of Decisions Made by Global Organisations

Decision making is fundamental in any organisation; the decision making in global

organisations is more complex. This is because global organisations are more

competitive in nature; this "competitiveness" affects the way managers make

decisions and how they evaluate new opportunities (Leontiades, 2001).

As a result of this new competitive behaviour, this section deals with the types

of decisions that are made that can enable the global organisation to gain a

competitive edge against its rivals. The decisions listed below are categorised in

accordance with the business functions and can exist in any organisation;

however, the main focus of these decisions is based on global organisations.

Finance and Accounting Department

In global organisations the finance and accounting department plays a major role

in the monetary sense, as it literally pulls the financial strings. To gain a

competitive advantage, the global company should take into account the whole

organisation's financial status, including its subsidiaries.

The decisions vary from being common decisions that are found in any

organisation, such as decisions regarding the financial budget, procurement of

goods, and so on. There are other decisions that can enable the organisation to

gain a competitive advantage. These decisions may be identified by some

questions such as "do we posses the necessary funds to start up a new

subsidiary?" and "what is the exchange/interest rates of country x?" and "do

these exchange/interest rates affect our production sales?" and "what are the

subsidiaries' performance for the financial year" and so on.

Furthermore, the financial and accounting department relies heavily on the

control of management and the headquarters. The department's major respon-

sibility to global decision-making is to forecast the organisational profitability,

that is, to transform the income statements of the organisation into decision-

useful information and to link this information with business and investment

strategies.

Human Resources Department

Competitively speaking, the types of decisions that could be made concern the

recruitment of employees and creating and developing the policies, guidelines,

and procedures.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 139

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The decisions include "what procedures and guidelines must this subsidiary have,

depending upon the main business operations that are assigned to the subsidiary,"

"reducing the number of employees on a global scale," "hiring of local managers

or overseas managers to manage subsidiaries," "decision to keep or to move

executives and managers to different subsidiaries," and so on. These decisions

are made with the headquarters' support. The department should find the best

person to fit the position; it must develop procedures and guidelines, and this is

imperative since the organisation relies on these employees to carry out the

everyday tasks of the organisation. Thus it is a competitive advantage for the

organisation to streamline its employees and procedures.

Production Department

To enable the organisation to compete globally, this department (which is under

the control of the headquarters and management) must develop standardised

products that can be sold anywhere, although this may not always be the case,

since products can vary depending upon the requirements of that particular

market. Since the headquarters controls the subsidiaries in global organisations,

subsidiaries have little or no say in the way they produce the product; they must

follow the guidelines and procedures set out by the headquarters.

The decisions that are likely to give the global organisation a competitive

advantage may include "the decision to produce the products at a lower cost,"

"deciding what subsidiary would best develop the product for a cost-effective

price," "the level of products to produce," "strategically placing production

plants in certain areas," and so on.

These decisions are also based on the tax, legislation, laws, currency, and

political issues of the country the subsidiary resides in (Ball, Wendell, McCulloch,

Frantz, Geringer, & Minor, 2002).

Procurement and Purchasing Department

Here competitive advantage is apparent. The decisions that this department

makes can have an overall effect on the way the organisation succeeds. The

types of decisions that this department can make include "deciding where to buy

raw materials," "reducing the supply chain," "whether or not it will benefit the

organisation to make links with suppliers," "allocating appropriate procedures

and guidelines to procured goods," "whether it is viable to purchase raw material

in country x, when country y (the subsidiary that needs the raw material) is

located on a different continent," "minimise logistics and distribution delay," and

so on.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !140 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Sales Department

The main purpose of the sales department is to sell goods and/or services to the

consumer. There is a close relationship between the sales and marketing

department. This department also deals with the management of customer

relationships.

The decisions made in this department are very common in any organisation,

which include "whether or not it is worthwhile to incorporate a customer

relationship management system," "deciding what particular group (demo-

graphic) of customers that the product is aimed for," "deciding upon the cost of

services and products, specials, sales, and so forth," "deciding if it is necessary

to set up call centres or help lines for customers," "types of sales strategy to

various markets," and so on.

Marketing Department

The marketing department plays an important role in securing competitive

advantage as it develops the strategies to "market" or "advertise" the organisation.

The types of decisions that can be made by the marketing department include

"when to conduct in-depth market analysis," "whether or not the alliance with

other companies to promote the organisation's products and services can aid the

organisation," "what type of marketing strategy should be used for different

demographics, including country and culture," and so on.

Management Department

This department is responsible for the overall operation of the organisation; to

gain a competitive advantage the management department should be able to

coordinate and streamline its functions and subsidiaries together.

The decisions involved in this department may include "is it viable to invest

subsidiaries in country x?" and "what strategy is the best approach for the

production of goods?" and "what procedures and policies must each department

implement?" and "deciding on the management structure and personnel for a

subsidiary" and "deciding upon the level of control that each subsidiary has."

There are many more decisions that the management department carries out, but

these decisions are everyday type decisions, or, in other words, decisions that are

very common in any organisation.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 141

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Information Technology Department

The information technology department's main purpose is to create, implement,

and maintain the networks, software, and system architecture of the organisation.

This department works closely together with the management department to

align the business processes with IT.

There are many decisions that are made within this department. Competitive

advantage can be in the form of the organisation's network (speed, quality,

durability).

The types of decisions that can be made in this department include "deciding

upon the network structure for a subsidiary," "type of system architecture and

IT infrastructure," "whether to store data externally or to have a local copy and

mirror sites," "type of technology to be used (hardware and software)," "what

types of data exchange and data interchange platforms to use," "strategies or

methods to operate global IT infrastructure," "types of network standards and

policies," and so on.

Research and Development Department

The decisions made by the research and development department are a crucial

part of "staying competitive" and/or gaining a competitive advantage. The main

purpose of this department is to research and develop new innovative products

and/or services.

The types of decisions being made by this department may include decisions such

as "deciding on the amount of funding and manpower that is needed," "strategies

to detect market trends," "type of product, idea, service will be researched and

developed next," and "cost-effective strategy".

The research and development department needs to work closely with the

marketing and production departments. It is imperative that this department does

an in-depth analysis to discover the changing needs of the consumer; as these

needs change, so to does the product.

Business Development Department

The purpose of this department is to research and define the business strategies

that can be applied in acquiring new subsidiaries, new business opportunities,

and, most importantly, who the organisation has an alliance with or merges with.

Creating a "global presence" is crucial for competitive advantage, thus this

department must conduct a thorough investment analysis to decide whether or

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !142 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

not the appropriate investment will lead the organisation to have a global

presence and a competitive advantage.

The types of decisions that can be made include "is country x suitable for opening

a subsidiary?" and "is it to our advantage to have an alliance with company x?"

and "deciding on the appropriate strategy to acquire a business opportunity" and

so on.

Ranking the Different Types of Data

Data found in global organisations are usually stored in some sort of database,

whether it is a combination of relational databases, transaction databases, or

object-oriented databases. In relation to our research focus, once the data has

been gathered from the global organisation's databases via some technological

mechanism there is a need to sort and filter the data that has been gathered to

aid top management's decision making.

As mentioned earlier, a way to retrieve data and information from huge

databases is using data mining. Basically data mining can be defined as

extracting or mining knowledge from large amounts of data (Han & Kamber,

2001), and/or is a process of nontrivial extraction of potentially useful information

that was previously unknown (Chen, Han, & Yu, 1996).

When decision makers query their databases, huge amounts of data can be

retrieved, and if this retrieval of data is relatively extensive, there must be a

mechanism that sorts the relevant data from the data that has been retrieved.

With the use of data mining one can specify the exact query using SQL-like

statements but written in a data mining query language. A data mining querying

language enables the data mining system to support ad hoc and interactive data

mining to assist in flexible and effective knowledge discovery (Han & Kamber,

2001).

Furthermore, there is also another factor in data mining - text-based databases.

A text-based database is a large collection of documents from multiple sources

such as articles, news, books, and research papers (Han & Kamber, 2001). As

global organisations contain huge amounts of documents that contain semi-

structured data, the text-based database can be considered a goldmine of

potential knowledge. This knowledge is potentially useful for the research and

development departments in the global organisation.

Another possible way to gather information from text-oriented documents is with

the use of XML (Extensible Mark-up Language). XML can be used to convert

text-oriented documents into standardised interface to allow for the reorganisation

of information; the XML documents can then be transferred to a database.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 143

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Data Ranking and Filtering

The data mining process filters out noisy data as well as dealing with the

integration, selection, and transformation of data.

With huge amounts of data being sourced from the global information systems'

databases, it is imperative to filter and rank this retrieved data. The ranking

process depends on the type of decisions being made. An example would be the

decision made to evaluate the investment of foreign subsidiaries. The retrieved

data may include financial data (such as expenditure description, expenditure

amount, expenditure date, financial budget amount, and financial budget date)

from the finance and accounts department, and research data from the business

development department. Although the decision was put through by the business

development department, the ranking of data here would be the financial data and

then the business development data.

A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions

Dynamically in a Global Organisation

As mentioned in the literature review, a "global" organisation can be seen as a

"centralised hub" where foreign subsidiaries are tightly controlled by the

headquarters. As information and data are constantly being updated from the

foreign subsidiaries, top management needs a way to make decisions dynami-

cally with the most current information.

The previous section described the departments, data, and types of decisions that

could be made by global organisations. This section aims to describe a proposed

framework for making decisions dynamically in a global organisation.

The framework consists of three layers (Figure 2).

Figure 2. A framework for dynamic decision making in global organisations

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !144 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The data layer consists of data that is contained within the global organisation's

information systems. The technology layer is the underlying technology that is

used to gather and rank the data. The decision layer activates the technology

layer by invoking the underlying technology.

Data Layer

The data layer is the underlying global information systems; this layer contains

numerous databases. The global information systems will generally have a

centralised database, but with foreign subsidiaries maintaining and controlling

their own local databases, the centralised database is constantly being updated

from various foreign subsidiaries. The type of data in the departments of a global

organisation has been covered in the previous section.

Technology Layer

The technology layer is the underlying technology that is being used to unearth

the data that the decision requires. There are many types of technology that can

support decision making, such as decision support systems, executive informa-

tion systems, management information systems, and knowledge or expert

systems. This technology can also include intelligent agents, neural networks,

and case-based reasoning. The purpose of the technology layer is to gather the

data and information from the global information system's database. It then

invokes data mining to clean, integrate, select, and transform the data into useful

information and or patterns via a visualisation technique.

The technology layer will invoke data mining algorithms when the data has been

gathered. Data mining will enable the data that has been gathered to be cleaned,

filtered, and integrated before sending the information back to the decision

maker.

Decision Layer

The decision layer is the first layer of this framework as it is the one that invokes

the underlying technology in the technology layer to gather and analyse the data.

The type of decisions that a global organisation can make has been discussed in

the previous section.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 145

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

An Example of the Proposed Framework with the Use of

Data Mining and Intelligent Agents

This example aims to display the way the proposed framework will work. It uses

intelligent agents to source and/or gather the relevant data from the global

information systems. As mentioned in the literature review, intelligent agents are

an autonomous, goal-directed computerised process that can be used in a

computer system or network to perform background work while other processes

run in the foreground (Alter, 1999b). Figure 3 depicts the flow of actions

occurring after a decision has been entered.

The steps are:

1. A decision is being sent to the technology layer.

2. Technology layer invokes the underlying technology, in this case intelligent

agents.

3. Intelligent agents then gather the data from the global information system.

4. The intelligent agent then uses data mining to clean, integrate, select, and

transform data.

5. Data mining mechanism then sends the results back to the intelligent agent.

6. The intelligent agent then communicates with the technology layer to send

information back to the decision maker.

7. Data and information are sent to decision maker.

Figure 3. Using intelligent agents and data mining

Data Layer

Technology

Layer

Decision Layer

1. 7. Analysed data sent to decisionmaker

3. 3.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !146 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Conclusion

Global organisations are emerging as huge global information systems. These

information systems contain data and information that may be critical in decision-

making. In this study, the global organisation has been broken down into three

components, namely, departments, data, and decisions. A framework for making

decisions dynamically in global organisations has been developed. This frame-

work incorporates three layers, data, technology, and decision layer.

References

Alter, S. (1999a). Communication, decision making, and different types of

information systems. In Information systems: A management perspec-

tive (3rd ed.) (pp. 140-180). MA: Addison-Wesly Educational Publishers,

Inc.

Alter, S. (1999b). Software, programming, and artificial intelligence. In Infor-

mation systems: A management perspective (3rd ed.) (pp. 298-336).

MA: Addison-Wesly Educational Publishers, Inc.

Ball, D.A., Wendell, H., McCulloch, J., Frantz, P.L., Geringer, J.M., & Minor,

M.S. (2002). International business the challenge of global competi-

tion (8th ed.). Boston, Bur Ridge: McGraw-Hill Irwin.

Bartlett, C.A., & Ghoshal, S. (1989). Managing across borders: The

transnational solution (2nd ed.). Boston: Harvard Business School

Press.

Busemeyer, J.R. (1999). 108 dynamic decision making. International encyclo-

pedia of the social and behavioral sciences: Methodology, Mathemat-

ics and Computer Science.

Chen, M.S., Han, J., & Yu, P.S. (1996). Data mining: An overview from a

database perspective. IEEE Transactions On Knowledge And Data

Engineering, 8(6), 866-883.

Chou, D.C. (1999). Is the Internet the global information system? Decision

Line, 4-6.

Daft, R.L. (2001). Organization theory and design (7th ed.). Mason, OH:

South-Western College Publishing - Thomson Learning.

Fuhr, N. (2002). XML information retrieval and information extraction.

Han, J., & Kamber, M. (2001). Data mining: Concepts and techniques. San

Francisco: Morgan Kaufman Publishers.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !A Proposed Framework for Making Decisions Dynamically 147

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Hill, C.W.L. (2003). Global strategy, global business (2nd ed). New York:

McGraw-Hill Irwin.

Joshi, K.P. (1997). Analysis of data mining algorithms. Retrieved June 30, 2003,

from http://www.gl.umbc.edu/~kjoshi1/data-mine/proj_rpt.htm

Kaniclides, A., & Kimble, C. (1995). A framework for the development and use

of executive information systems. Proceedings of GRONICS, 47-52.

Karimi, J., & Konsynski, B.R. (1991). Globalisation and information manage-

ment strategies. Journal of Management Information Systems, 7(4), 7-

26.

Kelly, M. (2002, March 29). Types of information systems. Retrieved April 14,

2003, from http://www.mckinnonsc.vic.edu.au/la/it/ipmnotes/

infor_systems/infosystemtypes.htm

Laudon, K.C., & Laudon, J.P. (2000). Management of information systems

(6th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Leontiades, J.C. (2001). Managing the global enterprise competing in the

information age. Harlow, UK: Pearson Education Limited.

Luger, G.F. (2002). Artificial intelligence: Structures and strategies for

complex problem solving (4th ed.). Harlow, UK: Addison-Wesley.

McNurlin, B.C., Ralph, H., & Sprague, J. (2002). Decision support systems and

executive information systems. In Information systems management in

practice (pp. 365-391). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education.

Nemati, H.R., Steiger, D.M., Iyer, L.S., & Herschel, R.T. (2002). Knowledge

warehouse: An architectural integration of knowledge management, deci-

sion support, artificial intelligence and data warehousing. Decision Sup-

port Systems, 33, 143-161.

Park, H.J., Kim, J., Yi, K.S., Jun, K., & Moon, J.Y. (1996). Critical success

factors for dynamic decision making in business simulations. Proceedings

of the Asian Pacific Decision Science Institute, Hong Kong.

Roe, R.M., Busemeyer, J.R., & Townsend, J.T. (1999). Multi-alternative

decision field theory: A dynamic artificial neural network model of

decision-making. (Tech. Rep. No. 232). Bloomington, IN: Indiana Uni-

versity Cognitive Science.

StatSoft. (2003). Data mining techniques. Retrieved June 30, 2003, from http:/

/www.statsoftinc.com/textbook/stdatmin.html

Thodenius, B. (1996). IV using executive information systems. In M. Lundeberg

& B. Sundgren (Eds.), Advancing your business: People and informa-

tion systems in concert. Sweden: Stockholm School of Economics.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !148 Chhai & Lan

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Two Crows Corporation. (1999). Introduction to data mining. Potomac, MD:

Two Crows Corporation.

Woodridge, M. (2002). An introduction to: Multiagent systems. West Sussex,

UK: John Wiley & Sons.

Zhang, D.D. (2002). Definition of an agent. Retrieved August 12, 2002, from

http://www.cit.uws.edu.edu.au/units/2002.2/ia/

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 149

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter VIII

Decision Support and

Data Warehousing:

Challenges of a Global

Information Environment

Alexander Anisimov

Ural State Technical University, Russia

Abstract

This chapter is dedicated to the major managerial, organizational and

technological aspects of development of data warehouses in a global

information environment, when different external sources of information

are available and potentially may have value for decision support and

managerial analysis. It summarizes the major benefits that become available

for businesses if they decide to integrate information from external sources

into their data warehouses. It also introduces the overall organizational

framework of development of data warehouses that are based upon the

information from different external sources. Furthermore the author hopes

that understanding of the framework introduced will not only inform

practitioners (both information technology (IT) specialists and managers

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !150 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

in different spheres of business) of new possible approaches to design of

decision support systems but also assist in the improvement of approaches

to decision-making procedures.

Introduction

Data warehouses play an important role in the automation of managerial analysis

and in decision support. The main purpose of this technology is to accumulate and

organize information in order to make it useful for analysts and decision makers.

Usually technical specialists and managers are concerned with the development

of data warehouses that are based on information from operational information

systems located within the organization. However any business is influenced by

external factors and oriented to the external business environment. Hence

information about the surrounding world and economic conditions may some-

times be more important for creative analysis and decision making than internal

information. That is why the presence of valuable information in different

external sources and its potential value for decision making make it necessary

to integrate external information into corporate information flows, thus making

data warehouses more valuable to analysts and managers.

On the one hand development of data warehouses that contain information from

external sources is a non-trivial task that may appear to be an expensive exercise

in terms of both financial and non-financial resources. On the other hand

selection of adequate strategies for the usage of information from external

sources may determine the overall efficiency of a business and its competitive

power in our age of global information systems and rapidly changing business

conditions.

The main objective of this chapter is to describe the major potential benefits that

may arise for decision makers as well as the major challenges that systems

integrators and managers will face if they decide to follow the strategy of

integrating into the global information environment.

Background: The Nature of Data

Warehousing

Corporate decision support tools and management information systems are

commonly oriented around the accumulation of information from scattered

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 151

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

sources and their further processing. Data warehouses usually are used for

amalgamation of information from different storages (like operational data

stores and transactional information systems) and their preparation for further

processing that usually involves flexible reporting, online analytical processing,

data mining and other similar approaches. Such functionality is achieved through

use of so-called "multidimensional data bases" - data structures that organize

information into virtual "data cubes." Managerial analysis and decision making

are supported either through application of specific mathematical tools (such as

data mining) or through providing a means of flexible data manipulation (such as

online analytical processing).

Development of such data warehouses has become possible due to the wide use

of information systems in the support of different routine business operations

(such as accounting information systems, MRP, CRM, PDM, and so forth). In

other words the introduction of data warehouses usually represents a natural

continuation of development of operational information systems introduced into

major business spheres.

Initially the development and maintenance of data warehouses that accumulate

heterogeneous information was a difficult task for developers, system analysts,

and field managers because of the following major reasons:

• Absence of standards and unified approaches to information storage as

well as procedures for its processing (information about the same or closely

related business phenomena may be processed asynchronously in different

local databases);

• Absence of unified approaches to identification and naming of different

business processes and phenomena across organizations (the same busi-

ness phenomena may have different identifications); and

• Absence of unified hierarchical classifications of the existing business

phenomena (identifiers of different business phenomena in different opera-

tional systems may be grouped and classified in accordance with different

rules).

The significance of these difficulties and importance of data warehousing

development for business stimulated the concentration of the attention and

efforts of many specialists on this subject. Over the course of time significant

experience was accumulated in the field of organization and running of such

information systems, and a relatively independent discipline was even estab-

lished (data warehousing) that formalized and systematized all the major

problems, procedures, and solutions that are specific to this field (see, for

example, Gray & Watson, 1997; Inmon, Imhoff, & Sausa, 2001; Reinschmidt &

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !152 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Francoise, 2000). Establishment and common acceptance of this discipline are

illustrated by the fact that, for example, Microsoft Corporation not only has

separate software products that more or less successfully implement data

warehousing concepts (for example, analysis services) but also has a separate

specialists certification program (see, for example, Nolan & Huguelet, 2000)

together with certification programs in software development, database admin-

istration, and other fields.

Besides this, the evolution of data warehousing technology was influenced by the

use of integrated enterprise-wide information systems that provide a single

platform for all the major spheres of business responsibility within a company

(sales, procurement, production, human resources, finances, and so forth).

Comprehension of data warehousing as a distinguished discipline and its succes-

sive development allowed the achievement of the major goals that are important

in any sphere of IT management:

• Render the overall development process more controllable and clear in

spite of all the technical and organizational difficulties;

• Discover and predict the major difficulties that may potentially hamper the

development of data warehouses; and

• Estimate the consumption of required resources at different stages of a

data warehouse development project.

As a result, the introduction of data warehouses has almost become "just

another" type of software development project that requires specific more or

less well-known tools, skills, and approaches to software design and project

management.

Integration of Data Warehouses into a

Global Information Environment:

The Major Perpsectives

The next step in the development of information technologies primarily discussed

in this chapter - globalization of the information environment - has provided

significant potential for further development of decision support systems and

opened new horizons for them. It has presented new opportunities for deeper and

more flexible managerial analysis as well as for making more well-grounded and

sound decisions and consequently gaining new competitive advantages.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 153

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Certain specialists and researchers describe in their works some aspects of

integration of information from different external sources in order to make data

warehouses more useful and valuable for decision making:

• Inmon (2002) outlines the major technical difficulties related to dealing with

external information sources (totally undisciplined and unstructured data,

unpredictability of external information sources' behavior, and some oth-

ers) as well as certain software engineering solutions

• Certain difficulties specific to particular situations are described in several

scientific works. A good example of such research work is presented by

Galhardas, Florescu, Shasha, Simon, and Saita (2001). They describe a

situation when it was necessary to integrate unstructured library informa-

tion from a particular external information source into a data warehouse

(difficulties and solutions).

In our opinion systematic usage of external information sources for corporate

data warehousing should not only be regarded as a technical issue with data

warehousing technology, but it should also be interpreted as part of an overall

managerial and technological strategy. This would, on the one hand, require

policymakers' support at different organizational levels and, on the other hand,

have significant potential for development of competitive advantages and growth

of the market value of a business.

That is why systematic integration of information from external sources and

possibility to achieve significant results (improvement of decision making

through advanced decision support) should be supported by a consistent meth-

odology that describes the initial development process as well as the ongoing

support of all the elements of such data warehouses. Such methodology should

be focused on major opportunities, tasks, and approaches to dealing with the

typical problems that may occur during the development process. In particular

it should be based upon comprehensive analysis of the following aspects:

• Opportunities that become available for analysts and managers whose

decisions are supported by the data warehouses in which information from

external sources is imparted - the major possible advantages should be

clearly presented to both decision makers (data warehouses' potential

users) and system integrators in order to make the process of development

more oriented to management information needs.

• Situations in which there is integration of information from external sources

and corresponding organizational and technical challenges - different

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !154 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

types of information sources should be classified in order to clearly

differentiate the major possible organizational and technical strategies that

should be applied in each particular case.

• Major approaches (technological issues and organizational methodologies)

to dealing with the difficulties that are typical for integration of information

from the external sources - different technological solutions and organiza-

tional methods should be described with regard to the major challenges

connected with the external sources of information that is important for

decision making.

Consistent provision of these three elements of the methodology should lead to

one benefiting from the availability of numerous external information sources

and being able to systematically deal with the major problems that are typical with

integration of these sources into corporate data warehouses loading processes.

Opportunities Provided by External Information Sources

In most cases the potential of data warehouses and external information flows

significantly depend on many subjective factors, such as:

• Decision-making culture and approaches to decision making that are

typical to a particular organization;

• Nature of the business; and

• Analytical skills of the decision makers who use (or potentially may use)

data warehouses and OLAP tools.

However, in our opinion it is necessary to outline the major, relatively universal,

potential opportunities that may be provided for managers who want to conduct

a deeper managerial analysis and make more well-grounded decisions. The

major opportunities that become more available for managers and analysts who

use such information systems for managerial analysis and decision making are

the following:

• Ability to compare their business characteristics with the behavior of

competitors and other entities (suppliers, consumers, and so forth);

• Ability to analyze dependencies between business performance and mac-

roeconomic indicators (like inflation, level of unemployment, and so forth);

and

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 155

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Ability to use more up-to-date external information for analysis and

decision making (prices of production factors, and so forth).

Detailed analysis of major types of external information is presented in Table 1.

Such a summary of external information sources' possible applications may be

practically used (at least initially) as guidance for field managers and decision

makers. In particular it should help them to determine and demonstrate what

business problems require the development of such "advanced" data ware-

houses.

Table 1. External information sources and their possible use

Information Its Possible Use Possible Spheres of

Decision Making

Macroeconomic

indicators (GDP, etc.)

Estimation and analysis of

possible fluctuations in

consumption of goods and

supply of production factors.

Financial indicators (rates

of exchange, inflation,

etc.)

Estimation and analysis of

possible competition in

international markets and

competition with foreign

competitors in domestic

markets

Economic indicators that

characterize the behavior

of customers and target

markets

Social indicators

(structure of the

population in particular

regions, its dynamics)

Estimation and analysis of

future sales and incomes

Economic indicators that

characterize the behavior

of suppliers and service

providers

Estimation and analysis of

future expenses (costs of the

goods to be produced)

Performance indicators of

competing companies

and partners

(profitability, sales

volumes, assets turnover,

and others)

Analysis of a market situation.

Development of key

performance indicators for a

company.

Estimation and analysis of

future sales and incomes.

Indicators that

characterize the behavior

of adjacent markets

(substitute goods,

compliment goods, sales

volumes, profitability,

etc.)

Analysis of the development of

new products and positioning

of the existing ones.

Estimation and analysis of

future sales and incomes.

Marketing,

budgeting,

production planning.

Strategic planning

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !156 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Integration of Data Warehouses into a

Global Information Environment:

The Major Challenges

The availability of the opportunities described will completely depend on the

availability, quality, and organization of the information in the external sources as

well as on the organization's ability to complete complicated projects and its

commitment to flexible and well-grounded decision making. That is why such a

company will have to adopt new organizational approaches as well as new

software engineering solutions and technologies that could provide a solid base

for efficient and adequate accumulation of information from scattered sources

in a global information environment for its further integration into corporate

decision support systems. The problem of development of data warehouses in a

global information environment has much in common with the development of

data warehouses within the scope of corporate information systems (we have

already mentioned those difficulties and tasks). But on the whole it significantly

differs from the implementation of data warehouses that use information from

local databases:

• External information environment and data in it (data sources, data formats,

access interfaces) may change significantly, and these changes may be

made without taking into account how they influence the behavior of the

entities that consume this information.

• Information collected from external environment practically cannot be

improved and adjusted in accordance with the needs of organizations that

consume (or potentially may consume) it.

• Technologies of storage and presentation of data in an external information

environment may be numerous, and some of these technologies may be

unavailable for the organization that wants to include external information

into corporate data warehouses.

That is why development of analytical tools and integration of information flows

from a global information environment into corporate analytical information

systems will require new approaches, skills, and technologies. Particularly

development of analytical tools and decision support systems that use external

information sources will require dealing with both organizational and technologi-

cal difficulties.

The most important objective of this chapter is to analyze the major challenges

that analysts, managers and developers will face if they decide to integrate

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 157

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

information flows from a global information environment into corporate data

warehouses and decision support systems.

Our approach is based on the classification of external information sources,

which is done by taking into account their major characteristics.

Figure 1 presents the classification of the major types of information sources with

regard to two of their characteristics:

1. Level of information sources instability - characterizes the probability of

more or less significant changes in external information sources. This level

may vary from absolutely stable (when information sources change very

seldom) to highly unstable (when the structure of information, its logical

structure, data formats, structure of information sources, and storage

technologies change often).

2. Level of disorder in information sources - demonstrates how structured

and formalized the information in external sources is and whether it is

acceptable for automated processing (data transformation) and feeding

into highly structured data storages (like data warehouses) or not.

This level may vary from absolutely formalized presentation of information (for

example, in table format) to absolutely informal presentation (for example, in

textual form that requires either human involvement or artificial intelligence tools

for formalization and further data transformation).

We have used three-point scales for the analysis of both these characteristics in

order to simplify this model and make it more understandable. For further

reference we shall use the phrase "information source of type #.#" (where #.#

Figure 1. Classification of the major types of external information

sources

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !158 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

is an identifier of information sources disorder and instability levels in accor-

dance with a Figure 1) to identify different types of external information sources.

For example, "information sources of type 1.1." corresponds to information

sources with low level of instability and low level of disorder (lower left corner

of the diagram).

Such classification is crucially important for the analysis of external information

sources in the event of their integration into corporate data flows because the

possible instability of external information sources and informal (or insufficiently

formal and consistent) presentation of data in them make such data sources

different from the sources residing within a company. In our opinion the

estimation and analysis of external information sources' characteristics should

be made every time when a company decides to use such sources in its data

warehousing process.

The information sources that are characterized by a low level of instability and

a low level of disorder may be consistently and relatively easily used for

corporate data warehousing and decision-making support, whereas sources that

are characterized by a high level of instability and disorder can hardly be

integrated into a corporate data warehousing process. In any case project

managers and data warehouse developers will have to use specific techniques

and methodologies. The difference is that the closer a particular information

source is to the sector 3.3, the more risky and resourceful the integration of this

source into a data warehouse will be and the more consistent management will

need to be for implementation and support of such information flows.

Both these characteristics significantly influence usage of external information

sources for systematic support of managerial analysis and decision making.

Hereinafter we analyze two major aspects of risks and difficulties connected

with use of external information sources: technological challenges and organiza-

tional challenges.

Technological Challenges

One of the most important technical issues connected with the systematic dealing

with external information sources is that data in these sources may be presented

in different formats. It usually assumes that data sources are characterized by:

1. Presence of mixed and unstructured textual and numeric data

2. Possible simultaneous use of different approaches to presentation of the

same (or similar) information

3. Absence of relatively clear rules that could describe the structure of data

(for example, use of natural forms of data presentation).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 159

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

In order to handle such information efficiently and feed data warehouses

correctly, it will be necessary to understand the rules in accordance with which

data are organized and develop corresponding data transformation tools. More-

over it may be necessary to implement an analytical model that could formalize

raw information for further processing. As a result of this, the business that

decided to use data from external information sources will need to significantly

progress the major elements of the software development process:

1. Use advanced techniques of system analysis;

2. Employ mathematical tools for analysis of unstructured data; and

3. Develop software modules that implement complicated algorithms for data

analysis and extraction.

These techniques and approaches may be unknown to the company's IT

specialists and as a result significant expenses may be required for:

• attraction of external specialists and development companies;

• acquisition of new software (reusable modules, libraries, and components);

• training of company's IT-specialists;

• attraction of new employees (programmers, system analysts).

Practically every company will have to handle the problem of unstructured

information in external sources. But actual expenses and the possibility of

eventually using the data from external sources will completely depend on the

characteristics of the external sources, which we have already discussed in the

previous subchapter (levels of information sources instability and irregularity in

data structure).

In one situation a business may try to use external data sources that are highly

structured (for example, when numeric information is presented in formalized

tables) and stable (when rules of presentation of this information remain

unchanged). In this case integration of information flows from external sources

into corporate data warehousing environment will practically come to implemen-

tation of new data transformation modules that may be quite similar to some other

data transformation modules that have already been developed by the company's

specialists (especially if a business has certain experience with transition from

legacy systems).

In another situation a business may try to involve external data sources that are

not structured, and the manner of data presentation changes from time to time.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !160 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Implementation of data transformation tools may be very complicated and time

consuming both for system analysts and for software developers. Transforma-

tion of data from such external sources may even become a separate business

process if this information is crucial for decision making. (This is mostly an

organizational issue. We discuss it in the following subchapter.)

Another important technical issue is that access to data in the external sources

may require development and maintenance of various interfaces that are not

typical for information systems currently used within a company. In most cases

software developers may have to deal with different Internet protocols with

which they are unacquainted. The major difficulties with this aspect will be

practically the same as the ones that we have discussed with regard to dealing

with data formats: implementation may require additional educational efforts,

purchasing of additional software and hiring of additional specialists. But the

difficulties in this case will probably not be so significant, as data access

interfaces are relatively universal and practically always remain unchanged due

to one major reason: transitions to alternative operating systems and other

fundamental changes in information systems infrastructure are usually much

more expensive than changes in data presentation formats.

Organizational Challenges

Organizational difficulties connected with integration of information from exter-

nal sources into a corporate data warehousing process are probably more

important and challenging than the technological ones. Situations that may

require special attention of managers and specific organizational techniques may

be faced at different stages of the data warehouse lifecycle and at different

organizational levels. Major challenges may arise in the following situations (data

warehouse life cycle stages):

• Initiation of data warehouse development or initiation of integration of

information from external sources into existing data warehouses;

• Development of new data warehouses and data marts or improvement

(extension) of currently used ones; and

• Current use of data warehouses that contain constantly updated informa-

tion from external sources.

A situation of data warehouse improvement initiation when a company may

decide to use (or not to use) information from external sources presents two

major organizational issues:

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 161

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

1. It may be necessary to organize monitoring of different information

sources' availability and their assessment regarding objective business

analysis requirements in order to provide the basis for further initiation of

the external information sources' practical use.

2. It is also necessary to organize qualified selection that fit the needs of

managers and decision makers, from a variety of available external

information sources.

The quality of the results of such information requirements analysis and

monitoring of external sources significantly depends on the commitment of field

managers and experts. That is why this activity should be motivated and

supported especially accurately.

At the stage of development or improvement of data warehouses, one of the

major organizational challenges will be to organize the collaborative work of field

specialists and system analysts in order to formalize criteria and algorithms for

extraction of information from external data sources. It is crucially important to

find and motivate analysts for such work because the tasks to be handled in the

system analysis process are usually non-trivial, based mostly on field experience

and intuition and require a creative approach. Special attention should be paid to

the hiring of new specialists and attraction of external software developers,

system integrators and consulting companies that specialize in particular rela-

tively narrow fields of software development and business analysis (like, for

example, automated analysis of natural languages).

Besides that, as we have already mentioned, at the end of this stage the

organization may have to organize a separate business process for the support

of data transformation processes. Such a business process may be necessary for

ongoing support (adjustment) of data transformation tools. It should include

monitoring of the overall correctness and adequacy of data transformation

algorithms, correction of data analysis algorithms, and redesign of software

modules that implement these algorithms.

Another important issue at this stage of data warehouse lifecycle is to set a clear

policy regarding quality of information added to the data warehouses from

external sources. In particular all the field analysts and decision makers involved

should clearly understand that certain assumptions have been made during the

data transformation modules development process, and for this reason the

presentation of the information inside the data warehouse may not always be

correct. The major risks of information mishandling and its inadequate transfor-

mation and presentation should be identified and potential users should be

informed about them.

At the stage of current use of data warehouses that contain constantly updated

information from external sources, one of the major challenges is to prevent the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !162 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

possible negative influence of changes in the external information environment

on current business operations. It may be the disappearance of the information

sources currently used in the corporate data warehousing processes and/or changes

in these sources. In particular organizations should have special plans of actions in

such situations (preferably a separate plan for every external source used):

1. All the analysts, decision makers and stakeholders should be timely notified

about the changes that took place; and

2. Unexpected changes in the external information environment (and conse-

quently changes in the information stored in the data warehouse) may

require urgent reorganization of analytical and decision-making procedures

in order to preserve the company's overall manageability.

Almost all the organizational issues described also comply with the model we

have introduced in Figure 1. The information sources of type 3.3 (and partially

adjacent ones) will require a more consistent management and attention to

support information flows. In particular if a business uses external information

sources that suffer from lack of stability and formalization of data presentation,

it should develop and introduce clear organizational rules: determine procedures,

assign responsibility, identify resources to be used in different situations, or even

reorganize certain business processes. For external information sources of type

1.1 such special procedures and organizational techniques may be implemented

only partially and cannot be regarded separately.

Future Trends

So far we have discussed the major theoretical and practical concepts related to

data warehousing in a global information environment that form the background

for productive work in this sphere. But the problems of such development should

not be considered only as a set of local technological and organizational

difficulties and corresponding techniques that can help to deal with such

difficulties (like the ones we have discussed in the previous subchapters). It also

has significant perspectives at higher organizational levels.

Further considerable improvement of decision support procedures through

integration of different information sources and storages in a global information

environment will require significant advancement of the overall corporate

decision-making culture and encouragement of thinking in terms of global

information environment. Such culture should be based upon:

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 163

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Educational background of both IT specialists and field experts involved in

decision-making procedures (here we mean mostly higher education as a

base of overall management and software development culture).

• Permanent support of orientation to involvement of additional information

sources into corporate data warehouses in order to make the decision-

making environment more efficient and useful for managers and specialists

at different levels.

Both these aspects require significant resources (both financial and human);

additional education may be expensive and support of corporate culture will

consume managers' time and other resources. But only in this case will the

competitive advantages of use of external information sources be achieved and

allow a business to perform better than its competitors. Development of

methodology for support of such culture should be a subject for a separate

research in the future, when we get enough practical experience in implemen-

tation of data warehouses that use information from external sources.

Another prospective aspect of the problem discussed in this chapter that is worth

mentioning is of a global nature. The importance of flexible automated informa-

tion processing and integration of information flows from a global information

environment into corporate information systems (especially analytical and

decision support systems like data warehouses) should enforce the development

of a certain culture of presentation of data in a global information environment.

Formation of such a culture may become apparent in the form of a certain

commonly accepted agreement (or a set of agreements) - sets of rules that

reflect the best practices of data presentation in a global information environ-

ment. Such best practices should be developed with respect to the major

considerations and rules (some of which are contradictory) that are presented in

Table 2.

One of the simplest illustrative examples of such an agreement is to restrict usage

of graphical file formats (like GIF or JPEG) for presentation of potentially

valuable textual and numeric information that is available in a global information

environment. The importance of such an agreement for automated data process-

ing (and therefore for support of data warehouses feeding processes) results

from the fact that the analysis of graphical data is much more difficult (from the

software development point of view) than the analysis of data presented using,

for example, XML and/or HTML format or stored in relational or other similar

databases.

Another more "advanced" example of such commonly accepted agreement

about data presentation and structuring is a family of RSS standards (see, for

example, Obasanjo (2003) and Nottingham (2002) for further reference). It is a

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !164 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

widely accepted standard for presentation of semi-structured data on the World

Wide Web that helps to automatically fetch information from the Internet and

process it in accordance with the users' requirements.

In the future, development and wide acceptance of such culture (and corre-

sponding agreements) will probably become possible when the overall informa-

tion environment becomes mature enough. In particular, such maturity may be

connected with:

• Appearance of a sufficient number of companies that extensively use

external information sources in important business processes (like decision

support) and that consequently may influence the overall business environ-

• Future development of technologies for presentation of data in a global

information environment;

• Increased competition between companies that make available different

data in a global information environment.

Conclusion

We have discussed the major issues any business will have to deal with if

managers and stakeholders decide to improve the overall decision-making

Table 2. Factors that may influence acceptance of agreements on presentation

of data in a global information environment

Factors that restrict acceptance of

information presentation agreements

Factors that stimulate acceptance of

information presentation agreements

1. Entities that make their

information available in a

global information

environment present their data

in a way that best meets their

needs and is less expensive (in

their opinion)

2. Information sources owners

cannot coordinate all the

changes in the rules and forms

of presentation of data in a

global information

environment with the

consumers of this information

1. Use of commonly accepted

rules may attract additional

users

2. Use of commonly accepted

rules produces a positive

image for the business and

potentially may be a part of

a corporate PR policy

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Decision Support and Data Warehousing 165

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

process through usage of external information sources for feeding corporate

data warehouses. One of the most important aspects is that the concept

presented in this chapter describes both organizational and technical aspects

related to such integration. These aspects have almost equal significance and,

moreover, in situations when external information sources are characterized by

a high level of instability and contain highly unstructured data, organizational

issues may be even more important than the technical ones.

It is quite difficult to formalize procedures, criteria, and requirements for the

process of such integration due to the same reasons that are typical to "ordinary"

data warehouses. But at the same time additional difficulties are unavoidable

because such "globally integrated" data warehouses significantly differ from the

ones that are based only upon data sources located within the company's

information systems (like ERP, MRP, CRM, and others).

This chapter provides an overview of the major theoretical concepts and

practical issues related to data warehousing in a global information environment.

It provides a comprehensive understanding of factors that are important for the

use of external information sources, starting from the description of an external

information source's role in corporate data warehouses and its importance for

decision support to the analysis of major managerial challenges that are

unavoidable in industrial practice at different levels of management and at

different perspectives. The importance of such complex understanding is based

upon the fact that support of decision making by flexible presentation of

appropriate external information is vital for overall integration of businesses into

a global information environment and the establishment of a connection between

business goals (especially the needs of managers, analysts, and decision makers)

and information systems development. That is why the concepts and overall

vision presented in this chapter should help field managers and information

systems developers to prepare themselves and their companies for work in new

conditions.

References

Galhardas, H., Florescu, D., Shasha, D., Simon, E., & Saita, C.A. (2001).

Improving data cleaning quality using a data lineage facility. Proceedings

of Design and Management of Data Warehouses (DMDW'01),

Interlaken, Switzerland

Gray, P., & Watson, J. (1997). Decision support in the data warehouse.

Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !166 Anisimov

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Inmon, W. (2002). Building the data warehouse (3rd ed.). New York: John

Wiley & Sons.

Inmon, W., Imhoff, C., & Sausa, R. (2001). Corporate information factory.

New York: John Wiley & Sons.

Nolan, S., & Huguelet, T. (2000). Microsoft SQL server 7.0 data warehousing

training kit. Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press.

Nottingham, M. (2002). RSS tutorial for content publishers and Webmasters.

Retrieved December 10, 2003, from http://www.mnot.net/rss/tutorial/

Obasanjo, D. (2003). Building a desktop news aggregator. Retrieved December

10, 2003, from http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/li-

brary/en-us/dnexxml/html/xml02172003.asp

Reinschmidt, J., & Francoise, A. (2000). Business intelligence certification

guide. Retrieved December 10, 2003, from http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/

redbooks/pdfs/sg245747.pdf

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 167

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter IX

Web Services and Their

Impact in Creating a

Paradigm Shift in the

Process of Globalization

Bhuvan Unhelkar

University of Western Sydney, Australia

Abstract

This chapter explores the impact of Web services in creating a paradigm

shift in the way businesses strive to globalize. This fundamental shift in the

paradigm of the globalization process occurs due to the fact that with Web

services, it is not one single organization that starts dealing with its clients

electronically but, rather, a number of organizations (a cluster) with

common needs and complimentary services to offer that start dealing with

each other electronically. Web services enable business applications to

talk directly with each other without human intervention, resulting in rapid

interactions among businesses at a global level. This opens up doors to the

interesting phenomena of a group, or "cluster," of businesses globalising

simultaneously, as studied in this chapter.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !168 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Introduction

Many information and communication technology (ICT) industry observers

believe that web services technologies herald the next major wave in online

computing and electronic business resulting in communication and integration of

application services across varied technical chasms of operating systems,

networks, databases, and security protocols. In fact increasing experience with

web services indicates that they bring an altogether different dimension to the

terms "e-business and globalization" (Unhelkar, 2003b). The impact of Internet

and web services (WS) bring about a noticeable paradigm shift in terms of what

is meant by a global business, how the business relates to other businesses, and

how it manages its own internal processes that might themselves be geographi-

cally spread out. Most importantly, though, for this discussion is the manner in

which an existing business transforms itself into such a global business - in other

words the process of e-transformation or globalization. The Web has enabled

businesses to explore hitherto unknown frontiers, a view also corroborated by

Deshpande, Murugesan, and Hansen (2001), who correctly assert:

"With the advent of the World Wide Web, 'computing' has transcended the

traditional computer science, information systems and software engineering

in the sense that these three fields were strictly within the domain of a

computing professional whereas the Web reaches the 'world.'"

Web services ascend even this "traditional" understanding of the Web and make

it imperative upon both technologists and business people to re-interpret the

terms "Web" and "globalization." This is so because web services enable

business organizations to transcend the "enterprise divide" that exists both

between and inside organizations. In fact web services appear to hold the key to

erasing international computing boundaries and have left the door wide open to

globalisation and automation of tasks (Unhelkar & Elliott, 2003).

This chapter discusses in detail the specific impact of web services on the nature

of, as well as the approach to, electronic globalisation of businesses. It delves in

detail as to how web services have brought about a change in the way a business

globalizes itself. Electronic transformation of an individual business is relatively

well understood and has been studied by various authors, including Lan and

Khandelwal (2003). Furthermore, frameworks for such e-transformation exist

and have been published by various thinkers and practitioners in this field (see

Dowding, 2001; Ginige, Murugesan, & Kazanis, 2001). However all of these

frameworks are currently focused on the transformation of a single organization.

Web services provide the ability for a cluster or a group of organizations to e-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 169

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

transform simultaneously. It is this cluster-based e-transformation that creates

the paradigm shift and is the mainstay of this chapter.

This chapter starts with a simple example of how web services differ philosophi-

cally from the standard web applications. This is followed by a discussion of the

various ways in which businesses have been utilizing the Internet. This under-

standing is essential in clarifying how the business world has arrived at

collaborations with each other. Collaborations form the backbone of business

clusters. We then briefly define and discuss the technical aspect of web service

technologies, leading up to the discussion on how the process of e-transformation

has become fundamentally different due to web services as compared with the

normal e-transformation process. The shift in the transformation process from

the standard business to business and B2C models of a single organization to

transformation of a group of collaborating organizations is made evident. Finally

a high-level road map of cluster-based globalization is offered.

Web Services: Business Interpretation

In order to understand the differing perspective between the needs for and the

process of electronic transformation of a single business versus that of a cluster

of businesses, it is first important to clarify what web services entail and how they

differ from web applications. The understanding of this difference will lead to

further understanding in terms of the effect web services have on electronic

transformation of businesses. We can study this difference through an example.

Consider, as shown in the example in Figure 1, an individual traveller attempting

to automatically calculate airfare, car rentals, hotel tariffs and so forth across the

globe and in various denominations. This will require the various providers of

Figure 1. The need for various businesses to collaborate with each other in

order to satisfy the requirements of a single requirement (or a single

business process)

Personal Smart Client

Application

(e.g., Excel Spreadsheet)

Personal

Travel Itinerary

UDDI

Airline

Schedule & Booking

Map

Weather

Hotel

Availability & Booking

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !170 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

these services - who are themselves geographically and temporally in wide and

varied zones - to have their application services coordinate, translate, interact,

and resolve the queries on a wider and complex scale. The ability of large number

of applications belonging to different organizations and operating in different

technical and operational environment interacting with each other is facilitated

by web services. In this example, there is a need for the airline and hotel

companies to interact with each other on a much broader scale electronically, in

order to satisfy the demands of the individual. This interaction, however, is not

through persons or departments within these organizations but, rather, through

software applications that are web service-enabled. This leads to the client's

"Personal Smart Client Application" to electronically deal with the applications

of the various service providers in resolving the demands of the individual client.

As compared with this electronic application-to-application interaction, normal

web applications would require the client to access the web sites of each of the

service providers manually and compile her own travel itinerary, make bookings,

and consider various alternatives in arriving at the choices of car and hotel

rentals. Web services make all of this happen automatically!

Furthermore, if we consider the possibility of the customer side itself being made

up of a large number of businesses, we come to understand the enormous

possibilities for clusters or groups of businesses to make use of the electronic

medium to conduct their businesses. In fact this has the potential to lead to

restructuring of entire industries rather than merely individual businesses.

Industries such as banking, insurance, financial, health care, government bodies,

shipping companies, airlines, and telecommunications providers are bound to

undergo radical changes in the way they provide information, conduct e-

commerce, organize themselves internally, and collaborate among each other.

Therefore it is quite appropriate to go beyond considerations of reengineering of

business processes and move towards what may be known as industrial process

reengineering (IPR). Eventually, the impact of web services may lead to not only

changing the face of business but also the redistribution of revenue and market

share within entire industries.

The stakes are very high. However the risks are worth taking for the risks

commensurate with the rewards that the business world as a whole is likely to

gain. Loosely defined business clusters, interacting dynamically with each other,

are bound to create vast business opportunities, far greater and improved

services, and a truly open world market. This may, at certain points within the

electronic transformations, require intervention from industrial bodies and even

government as during this globalization process, smaller organizations may tend

to lose out due to lack of awareness of the transformation process. Not being a

part of a cluster or a collaborative group of businesses that are transforming

electronically may lead to closing down of a business in the new paradigm. To

obviate these possibilities, it is important to study how a cluster or group of

organizations undergoes electronic transformations, as is being done here.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 171

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Business Utilization of the Web

While the term e-commerce has been used in a sweeping way to encompass all

aspects of electronic business, there are subtle as well as significant differences

between the implied meanings behind usage of various terminologies. This

meaning is congruent with the way business has utilized the Internet (Unhelkar,

2003b). Figure 2 shows the ways in which business use the net and the evolving

levels of this usage.

Informative Business

The very first era of Internet utilisation was primarily focused on information

provision and sharing. This informative aspect of the Internet (e-information) is

the most basic, most common and therefore the widest usage of the Internet by

the business as shown as the base layer in the triangle in Figure 2. This usage

encompasses all the provisions of the informative aspect of the business to the

world. At a very basic level, it is scanning the company's product brochures and

putting them up on the Internet, resulting in what has been known as the

Brochureware. This usage also included putting up the basic company contact

details like phone, fax, and physical address (equivalent of a business card on the

web). Thus this use of the Internet by business is primarily for branding its

products or services, and communicates in one direction only. Because of this,

informative sites have minimal security requirements and need minimal mainte-

nance. Given the primarily uni-directional mode of electronic communication in

this form of Internet usage, there was hardly any need for collaboration between

businesses. Therefore this form of usage required minimal attention in terms of

Figure 2. Increasing levels of utilization of the Web by businesses leading

up to collaborative usage (based on Unhelkar, 2003b)

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !172 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

electronic transformation of businesses. Globalization was limited to availability

of information rather than conducting business transactions, resulting in a large

number of businesses in this layer.

Transactive Business

The informative usage of the Internet by businesses was rapidly followed by the

transactive usage, commonly referred to as e-commerce and shown in the

second layer of the triangle in Figure 2. This "Transactionware" included two or

more parties (businesses) involved in conducting a transaction (that is, trading

with each other) through electronic data interchange (EDI). Although e-

commerce is a term used to refer to anything and everything related to the

Internet, it actually means this transactive usage of the Internet by the business.

This involves ability to send and receive messages and thereby conduct business

transactions by communicating with the business behind the web interface.

These transactions can be broadly categorised into two:

• Simple transactions that deal with inquiries, making of bookings/reserva-

tions, and posting feedback.

• Financial transactions that involve a third party (such as a bank or Visa

card) that facilitate sale and purchase of a commodity (enable commerce).

In both cases, the transactions can be B2B (business to business) or B2C

(business to customer). While this transactive aspect of the business would

usually start with B2C, almost all global organizations would be involved in B2B

transactions. It should be noted here how the evolution of the Internet usage by

businesses from informationware to transactionware requires cooperation be-

tween two or more parties. This lays the foundation for what we are discussing

in this chapter - the issues to be considered when businesses are collaborating

with each other over the Internet. However, before businesses evolved to a stage

where they could fully and openly collaborate with each other, they also

discovered that there is more to the Internet than merely dealing with external

businesses.

Operative Business

Ensuing from the growing commercial usage of the Internet was the understand-

ing that businesses could also put up their own internal operational aspect on the

Internet. As shown in the third layer of the triangle in Figure 2, this came to be

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 173

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

known as operative usage of the Internet. It included handling of not only the

informative and transactive capabilities, but also the management of internal

operations of the business such as inventory, payroll, HR and the like. This results

in not only increased internal interactions of the employees with the business but

also B2B interactions of the business with external entities that deal with

organizing the internal processes (for example, an external accounting firm

dealing with the general ledge and accounting entrees of the business under

consideration). Thus due to traversal of a business' internal processes with its

customers, suppliers, and other businesses, there is a large component of B2B

transactions in operative businesses. In addition to impacting B2B transactions,

because of the ability of the business to shift all its operations on the Internet, this

usage of the Internet by businesses usually has a component of business-to-

government (for example, taxation) in it. Thus when all the operational aspects

of the business are moved on to the Internet, the business can be called e-

business. When organizations evolve from informative and e-commerce sites

through to e-businesses, they discover that this transformation is fraught with

challenges arising due to existing legacy applications and data within the

organization and setting up of business alliances and standards between various

external parties. Therefore many strategic planners of e-businesses have

recognised the benefits of undertaking a complete redesign of their Internet

business strategies and have implemented a more holistic approach to their

operative business. Reaching from e-information to e-commerce to e-business

is leading the organization toward a collaborative environment. However it is still

not a fully collaborative environment, as it deals specifically with known internal

and external parties. So what is open collaborative environment in electronic

business? We consider that next.

Collaborative Business

The top layer of the Internet usage triangle, shown in Figure 2, is where numerous

businesses started collaborating with each other simultaneously using the

electronic medium. Thus when a cluster or group of businesses start interacting

with each other openly and without pre-determined business partners, it results

in the collaborative type of usage of the Internet by businesses. During this use

of the Internet, businesses realised that it is much more advantageous to

collaborate with a large number and cross-section of businesses that may be

spread far and wide geographically but that may have complementary business

offerings than to merely conduct electronic commerce and handle internal

business operations on the Web. What ensued is creation of open portals and

electronic marketplaces (for example, eBay). It is this collaborative usage of the

Internet by businesses that has found significant impetus by the advent of web

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !174 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

services and is of primary interest in this discussion. This usage is further

discussed after a brief mention of the effect of mobility on these various layers

of business usage shown in Figure 2.

Mobile Business

Mobility influences all aspects of Internet usage. For example, together with the

GPS (Global Positioning System), the Internet virtually frees the customer

from time and place dependence. The boundary between the traditional

Internet-based systems and mobile applications is already blurred. The result

is that mobile technology permeates all four aspects of the triangle discussed

in Figure 2.

Mobility influences the informative aspect of the triangle when information is

posted to mobile devices by the business.

When transactions (of both types - simple and financial) are carried out over

the net by using mobile gadgets, it is m-commerce. This includes trading on the

mobile devices.

When all business aspects are handled over the net using mobile devices, it is m-

business. Examples of m-business include managing car breakdown services

using on-board mobile gadgets or tracking couriers.

Mobility adds a unique dimension to the globalization process and is in itself a

separate paradigm. However it is part of a substantial discussion that needs to

be addressed separately from the current discussion. It will suffice to mention

here that mobility makes connectivity totally independent of space. While the

standard Internet communication makes business-to-business relationships in-

dependent of time and physical space, still a local physical connectivity is

required. Mobility, however, transcends even that requirement of physical

connectivity. Indeed that is the direction in which the entire business world is

moving and therefore worth mentioning here for potential discussion on clusters

of wireless business. Currently, though, we delve deeper into the collaborative

usage of the Internet.

Collaborative Usage of the Internet by

Businesses

Collaborative usage, as shown on the top-most part of the triangle in Figure 2,

builds on top of all previous layers. Thus, informative, transactive, and operative

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 175

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

usage of the Internet is all imbibed in the collaborative usage, or c-commerce.

In addition, collaborative usage leads a group of businesses to not only conduct

business transactions with each other and thereby provide support to each other

in electronic transactions but also create a veneer of competition amongst these

businesses underneath the electronic layer. (See Kock, Davison, Wazlawick, &

Ocker, 2001 for further thoughts). This judicious combination of support as well

competition makes it imperative for the cluster of businesses to extend itself

much wider, globally reaching out to its customers and suppliers in search of new

avenues of services, including finding totally new combinations of services and

products that could not have been offered without such collaborations.

However these collaborations need support at technical (Liu, Song, & Liu, 2001)

as well as business level (Morris, 2002). Web services technologies have made

this possible because web services enable many applications from many

businesses to conduct business with each other without the need for human

intervention. However, when it comes to collaborations, businesses are still

coming to grips with the need to share resources, identify business values, and

improve their comfort levels in terms of security and privacy. Thus while the

technology itself is rapidly maturing, it has created a paradigm shift in the way

businesses consider their strategies for transition to electronic business. Despite

the challenges, however, it is becoming obvious to businesses that it is much more

advantageous to collaborate with each other than merely going global on their

own. Collaborative commerce enables collaborative relationships between a

network of organizations enabling them to buy and sell their products and

services electronically, thereby making these transactions cheaper as well as

reaching a wide range of market. As Fairchild & Peterson (2003) discuss, the

presence of c-commerce indicates a network of firms with similar collaborative

natures with established collaborative business platform and strategies. Despite

its understandable slowness in catching up, it is this collaborative nature of

Internet usage that is bound to provide maximum advantages to businesses both

in terms of globalization and in managing their own internal processes effec-

tively. Having thus underscored the significance of collaborative business, let us

now briefly consider the technologies that enable this collaboration to happen.

Web Services and Global Business

Emerging Technologies

What are web services? How have they evolved to the stage where they are, and

what were the precursor technologies that lead to web services? Until now, most

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !176 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

electronic business depended on a customer at the other end using an electronic

facility to conduct business. Even when two businesses were interacting with

each other, it was the people within the businesses that were using the

applications, perhaps on the Internet, in order to interact with each other. Thus

the preliminary web applications used the same concepts as normal application

developments and, as such, relied heavily on the concepts of object-oriented or,

in its more sophisticated form, component-based software development as

shown in Figure 3. Objects and components had their own small-time effect on

global information systems as they facilitated reuse of components developed by

"third parties." This led to interactions among software applications on a

dedicated basis, and the technologies such as Distributed Component Object

Model (DCOM), Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA), and

Remote Method Invocation (RMI) came into play. Thus distributed computing

increased the pace of interaction among information systems, leading to further

globalization of businesses as shown in Figure 3.

Component technologies and distributed computing has now evolved into web

services and Internet technologies, as shown in Figure 3. As compared with

distributed computing, where the platform for distribution was a dedicated one

with web services, the exchange of information and data is primarily through

document-based XML that can be easily exchanged between software applica-

tions on a wide variety of platforms (for detailed discussion on comparison of

these technologies, see Chaturvedi & Unhelkar, 2003). Since web services

provide a standardized way by which applications can communicate across

networks, regardless of their size or the computing platform on which they are

Figure 3. Evolution to technologies from the fundamentals of Object-

orientation, distributed computing through to the Internet technologies

including web services

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 177

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

executing at either end of the interaction, there is a genuine independence

achieved by businesses in interacting and collaborating with each other. This is

not only a different paradigm in terms of how businesses relate to each other but

ensures a paradigm shift in terms of transformation of business to e-businesses.

The underlying theme of business interactions has shifted to A-2-A, or an

application-to-application business relationship, opening up the doors to automa-

tion of business decisions, business processes, and sharing of business tasks -

in fact, an unlimited array of opportunities in the realms of electronic business.

As Sanjiv, Cantara, and Shetty (2003) state:

"Web services will ease partner-to-partner interaction, make application

integration easier, create new business opportunities, give businesses more

and better choices, give enterprises competitive advantages over rivals and

improve efficiency in trusted environments."

With standardization and automation of business transactions, changes particu-

larly in data-reliant professions such as banking, government statistical bodies,

shipping companies, airlines, telecommunications providers, and the financial

industry are apparent. With such high stakes, the manoeuvring of industry

competitors such as IBM, BEA, Microsoft, and Oracle to reach a favourable

position in the market can now be seen (Unhelkar & Elliott, 2003).

Core Elements of Web Services

IBM defines web services as "self-contained, modular applications that can be

described, published, located, and invoked over a network, generally the Web.

The web services architecture is the logical evolution of components geared

towards the architecture, design, implementation, and deployment of e-business

solutions" (Gottschalk, 2000). Kirtland (2001) gives the Microsoft viewpoint: "a

web service is a programmable application logic accessible using standard

Internet protocols. Web services combine the best aspects of component-based

development and the Web". While other companies, including Sun Microsystems,

have their own definitions, what is commonly agreed upon is that web services

are applications designed and built around component-based software, that they

are self-describing and can be invoked using standard Internet protocols.

Technically web services technologies can be broken down simply into three

major and easily recognisable areas, as shown in Figure 4.

More specifically, these layers are: the XML/SOAP protocol and packaging

layer; the WSDL definition layer; and the UDDI discovery layer. The XML/

SOAP provides the basic means of transferring document-based information

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !178 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

and data across the Internet. The WSDL helps define the meaning behind the

services, and the UDDI layer helps publish and locate services. While not so

comprehensive, many similar attempts to provide similar framework have

existed in the past, including the DCOM, CORBA, and RMI solutions discussed

earlier. While those middleware components promised a lot, they were marred

by the lack of "open" technologies. With web services, though, the promise is of

open connectivity. While still struggling with the lack of proper industry-wide

regulation at the current stage, the web service technologies have far more

potential and far more to offer to businesses. This difference in the fundamentals

of web services technologies and what they have to offer can be understood by

studying their technology meta-model further.

A Web Service Meta-Model

The technologies of web services mentioned in the previous section can be

summarised into a meta-model that represents the various major elements of

web services and how they relate to each other. Such a meta-model is shown in

Figure 5. This meta-model, based on the work done by Monday (2003), makes

it easier to understand the web services technologies from a business or usage

perspective and thereby form the basis of understanding the shifting paradigm in

the globalization process. In Figure 5 we see three major components of web

services and their relationships:

Figure 4. The major technology areas involved with the current application

of web services (Unhelkar, 2003b)

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 179

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The service shown in Figure 5 is a type of application, stereotyped as a

<<service>> that is being offered by the business that has the capability to do so.

The "service layer" defines the programmatic interface for other applications to

interact with the web service, usually in the form of an XML file. As is obvious,

businesses that aspire to operate globally will have to ascertain the types of

services they want to offer, handle the business models for such services, and

eventually seek ways to publish their services onto a common directory.

Such business will register their service with a <<directory>> provider such as

UDDI. This is also known as the "discovery layer" and is designed to provide a

standardised way in which web services can be centrally registered, located,

published, and controlled. This is shown by the directory class in Figure 5. The

existence of a directory is a major discerning factor between what would be a

normal Web application and a web services-based application. The challenges

in terms of standardizing the contents and ensuring their availability are not yet

fully handled but are issues that impact the way in which a cluster of organiza-

tions may decide to globalize their operations.

Location and consumption of a service by a <<client>> is another major

difference in the way web services operate. Here, through web services, the

clients (such as, say, a bank or a travel agency) have the freedom to put together

various offerings as may be available through the directories to provide their own

customer wide variety of choices. The array of permutations and combinations

that <<client>> can obtain through use of web services makes the process of

globalization a different phenomena than the normal web applications. Following

on from location is consumption of the service, which would again require

technological standards and capabilities that are provided at a fundamental level

by web services.

Figure 5. A static web services meta-model (class diagram; based

on Monday, 2003)

Publishes who can

Authorize Cards;

Who can Provide

Flight Schedules

A Business

Process; Another

Web Service

Examples: Credit

Card Authorization

Flight Availabilities

Publish

Communicate

Search & Locate

Service

Directory

Client

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !180 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The possible implementation of the service provider and the consumers can be

through any of the web services technologies such as .NET or SunONE.

Furthermore it is worth noting that the entire scenario depicted here is conducted

by software applications and not humans. This is one of the major causes of

paradigm shift in web services-based e-transformations. Let us now consider in

detail the impact of these fundamentally different ways of publishing and

accessing business information and services on the Internet.

The Shifting Paradigm in Global

Transformation

The aforementioned technologies and capabilities of web services have resulted

in an environment wherein the stage is set for massive interaction between

businesses across the globe. This is an ICT-based globalization as against the

pre-communication era globalization that relied primarily on physical alliances

between organizations. It is worthwhile to mention this earlier globalizations as

a means of comparing the shifting paradigms between the two types of

globalizations. For example before the advent of web services (even while the

businesses were using the Internet-based connectivity), the globalizing organi-

zations had to set up associations and alliances with each other. Some of the

physical alliances took the following formats:

• Proprietary ownership of a globalized organization wherein the individual

owned the business spread physically across borders.

• Joint ownership or partnerships; these relationships meant that individuals

owned a certain percentage of the organization, and it was quite common

for individuals from different physical regions to cooperate in order to

conduct global trade.

• Private limited (individuals + banks/money lenders/venture capitalists).

• Public (unlimited participation + banks/VCs).

• Trusts, wherein ownership was not easily defined, but which provided

opportunity for organizations to expand their horizons through a mutually

agreed "third party."

These alliances were necessary during earlier processes of globalizations and

were in fact there to provide the formal and, as far as possible, legal infrastruc-

ture for the globalization processes. The above alliances may still be necessary,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 181

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

but their formats have undergone rapid change. The legal and accounting

capabilities are still trying to catch up with this transformed way of doing

business. And they will have far bigger challenges as the business world moves

toward large-scale cluster-based e-transformation. This is because the need to

form physical alliances in order to tap into each other's client basis, business

partners, and abide by government regulations still exists. However these

physical alliances have already started undergoing redefinition as a prelude to the

overall paradigm shift resulting from web services, as discussed in the remainder

of this subsection.

A Cluster-Based Transformation

The discussion on web services thus far clearly indicates that not only are

businesses dealing with each other through their applications but also that there

are numerous businesses that start conducting electronic business with each

other simultaneously as a result of web services. This is because once the

standards for the directory service are established, it is possible for large number

of businesses to register their "services" in the "yellow pages" of the directory.

This results in collaboration between businesses on a grander scale, based

around common business interests, or clusters (discussed in detail by Unhelkar,

2003b). Therefore in order to successfully e-transform businesses that are

registering their offerings through web services, as well as sourcing their needs

through web services, it is crucial that a group or cluster of businesses e-

transform simultaneously. As shown in Figure 6, a genuinely collaborative

business will no longer be at the exclusive centre of the business world and will

not be satisfied or successful by merely e-transforming its own self. Instead each

business that e-transforms and uses web services will play an ever-increasing

greater facilitating role, shown on the right side of Figure 6. Customers and other

business partners are all able to interact with each other before and during their

Figure 6. In cluster-based e-transformation, focus shifts from independent

e-transformation to interdependence and collaborative arrangements

(Pradhan, 2002). Thus a business is no longer at the center of events;

instead, many businesses start dealing with each other, leading to an all-

to-all electronic market. (Unhelkar, 2003a).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !182 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

transactions with the collaborative business. Once this model is extended to

many businesses, we have genuinely open markets that truthfully espouse the

principles of free trade. While numerous roadmaps exist that help organizations

transition from the left of Figure 6 to its right (in particular, the work of Kalakota

and Robinson (2000) has been quite popular in this regard, as has Ginige et. al.

(2001) on e-transformations of SMEs), I am offering here some basic phases for

a cluster-based e-transformation.

Comparing Shifting Paradigm

Having described what a cluster is and how the cluster-based e-transformation

is interdependent from the participating businesses, we now summarise it in a

tabular form in Table 1. This table shows comparatively the various aspects of

e-transformations and how they are affected when an organization attempts

independent e-transformation as compared with a cluster-based e-transforma-

tion. Although this table is not exhaustive, it provides relevant comparisons

between the two "paradigms," leading to a greater understanding of the

differences between the two paradigms and their importance in e-transforma-

tion.

The shifting paradigm summarised in Table 1 also forms the basis for a

framework around which cluster-based e-transformation framework can be

created. An attempt to outline such framework is made in the next section.

Framework for Cluster-Based Electronic

Transformations Leading to

Globalization

The discussion so far has argued how web services facilitate creation and

transformation of a collaborating group of businesses. The primary understand-

ing created thus far is how the technological capabilities of web services enable

creation, publishing, locating, and consumption of services offered by a large

number of businesses simultaneously. The overall scope of the e-transformation

process, and the shifting paradigms of cluster-based e-transformation, was

summarised in Table 1. This section expands and builds on the summary of Table

1 and outlines the framework that can be applied to ensure successful e-

transformation of a cluster. Needless to say this requires more than mere

understanding of the technological capabilities of web services. A number of

primary issues have been identified by Unhelkar (2003b) in cluster-based

electronic transformation. These issues include:

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 183

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Cluster identification

• Capability evaluation

• Business alliance formation

• Knowledge building

• Standards consideration

• Cluster revenue models

Table 1. Comparison between independent and cluster-based

e-transformations

Aspect of

e-Transformation

Independent

e-Transformation

Cluster-based

e-Transformation

Customer Customer remains an

"outside" party

Cluster members themselves

can be customers and

suppliers.

Technology Centralised; basic Web

technologies. No

directory services.

Web services are essential.

Directories of services also

mandatory.

Infrastructure The organization itself

has to work on creating

the e-infrastructure;

invest in bandwidth and

security.

This is usually handled by a

third party, with the cluster

members contributing to its

creation and usage.

Alliance needs Not much work needed

in forming business

alliances, as it is

primarily a customer-to-

business relationship.

Extra work needed in ensuring

fairness in competition when a

cluster e-transforms -

especially cross-border

alliances.

Software

Designs

Standard e-business

designs starting with a

Web site and leading to

e-commerce and e-

business.

XML, WSDL, and UDDI have

to be modeled and

implemented in cluster

transformation. Intra-cluster

standards are mandatory.

Conversion Necessary, as far as

transition is concerned.

Only common or

"contributing" data and

programs need to be

converted; rest of the

applications may simply be

interfaced.

Change

Management

Internal training is

crucial, as also is

ensuring customer

awareness of new

processes.

In addition to internal and

customer-related changes,

there are crucial changes

between cluster members.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !184 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• E-cluster design

• Conversion

• Change management

• Social repercussions

As shown in Figure 7, these factors have been categorised into three major

groups, which continue to influence, almost in parallel, the process of cluster-

based globalization. The three major bands, or areas, as shown in Figure 7 are:

business, technical, and general. The sequence in which these key factors or

process-components can be executed depends on the particular situation of a

cluster and the environment in which it exists. That sequencing is a matter of

further process study and is not discussed here. We will delve deeper into each

of these issues that make up the framework and the role they play in handling

cluster-based electronic transformation of businesses.

Cluster Identification

Electronic transformation of a cluster starts with the identification of such

cluster. While this can be a major and significant exercise that interested parties

will undertake, it is also worth mentioning that a cluster may also "happen" due

to unplanned interactions amongst a group of businesses. A single organization

attempting e-transformation is not troubled by these needs of a cluster to identify

its participating members in globalization. The starting point for identification of

Figure 7. Key process components of the framework form cluster-based

globalization (e-transformation)

General

Technical

Business

Client

Identification

Business

Alliance

Formation

Knowledge

Building

Cluster

Revenue

Models

Capability

Evaluation

Standards

Consideration

E-Cluster

Design

Conversion

Change

Management

Social

Repercussions

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 185

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

such clusters is common business interests that are complementary to what each

cluster member can offer and service. And given the phenomenal importance of

customers in e-businesses (Siegel, 1999), it is the customer of the potential

cluster that will also drive identification and creation of clusters that will serve

the ever-expanding needs of a customer. Do note that, in a cluster, the customers

and suppliers can also be cluster members themselves. Common business

interests lead to common technological capabilities to form a cluster - a

separate key point discussed in the next subsection. Once the business interests

and technological possibilities have been vetted, the stage is set for legal

formalization of the relationship between the initial members of a cluster as

discussed in the business alliance phase. This can create a cluster that will

technically be able to interact as a portal. However in this early stage of cluster

identification, questions that need careful handling are: types of businesses, their

common interests, possible competition amongst them, and the ability of the

businesses to transact amongst themselves. If a firm has an existing e-business

strategy, then that will be certainly of help in identification of an e-cluster. As

Dowding (2001) states, "there is a direct correlation between management

team's ability to first develop and articulate its corporate strategy and a firm's

success with implementing a successful e-business initiative." Although this

strategy is mentioned for an individual organization, having such a strategy is

equally important in cluster-based e-transformation. For example it is easier to

imagine a cluster made up of an airline, a hotel chain and a car rental agency, but

the interesting business issues come into play when more than one airline or hotel

chain or car rental agencies are trying to become part of the cluster. If there is

proper business synergy, then such clusters will not always compete but rather

cooperate in providing businesses to each other.

Capability Evaluation

Capability evaluation deals with the identification of the technologies and

capabilities of individual members of the entire cluster. This also escalates into

identifying the infrastructure capabilities that exist amongst the current members

of the cluster. As with all major business decisions, incorporating the capabilities

of the member organizations of the cluster as they stand in the planning of the

e-transformation is an essential part of the success of the transformation and

should not be hastily overlooked. The key to organisation success with implemen-

tation of any strategy is the creation of first a vision (Thompson & Strickland,

2001). This vision has to incorporate the technological and business capabilities

of the organizations that are part of the cluster. As web services continue to

evolve, such technological capabilities to interact will be a "given" rather than

something to be created from the beginning. Still capability evaluation will be

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !186 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

required to handle the ability to capitalize on the given technologies and will have

to be undertaken by participating members of the cluster.

Business Alliance Formation

Once the common business interests start emerging and the technological

possibilities become obvious, the primary members of the cluster move to

formalize the business alliance. As compared with the globalization process of

an individual organization, a cluster has to ensure that the members are

cooperating with each other in terms of providing a product or a service.

Formation of business alliances leads to creation of formal agreements that are

very helpful when the technical members of the organizations in a cluster start

interacting with each other in the knowledge-building phase. While some mutual

agreements of the business alliances may be reached informally (for example,

signing of a memorandum of understanding), formal agreements are required as

a precursor to knowledge creation and documentation of the cluster. The

soundness of business models will play a big role in ensuring the success of the

transforming clusters. Thus e-transformation will not merely lead the businesses

to deal with each other electronically. It will also require them to have physical

alliances that will ensure fairness in terms of trading and sharing business values

arising out of the clusters.

Knowledge Building

In this phase of e-transformation, there is a coordinated effort made in collating

and understanding the knowledge that exists in and around the cluster. This is not

the same as the technical work of collection of all databases of individual member

organizations and putting them together. In fact, when knowledge-building

commences, we will have a collaborating group of companies providing data and

information about their businesses that, put together, is capable of providing more

and innovative services to its customers. For example, a cluster based around

hotels, airlines, and car rental companies will be able to collate and share travel

patterns of common customers or, at a bigger level, travel agencies to enable

provision of a complete and process-based service to the customers. Further-

more, in this example, the cluster will be able to proactively offer informative and

transactive capabilities (based on Figure 1) that take care of the inter-dependen-

cies between the hotels, airlines, and car rentals. This cluster is capable of

handling an on-the-spot large order for air tickets and reservations because the

members of the clusters may be more than one airline and one hotel. While the

technology of knowledge-building still revolves around data warehouses, the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 187

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

mechanism of communicating that knowledge through web services is an

important and imperative dimension to cluster-based e-businesses rather than a

single e-business. It is searching for the common pool of knowledge, creation of

new knowledge, and communicating that knowledge to all group members that

makes up this phase of knowledge building.

Standards Consideration

One significant facet of cluster-based e-transformation that becomes apparent

is the crucial need for standards at all levels. While standards are technically

challenging, in cluster transformation the business aspect of setting up and using

standards also comes into play. This is the reason for the significance of

organizational bodies like UDDI (www.uddi.org), W3C, OMG (www.omg.org)

and OASIS (www.oasis.org, which now also owns UDDI). These standard

bodies create and facilitate common grounds for businesses to set up and accept

standards, which can then be used for rapid automation of applications that

belong to cluster members. These standards bodies can also facilitate increased

offerings of services as the cluster matures in conducting electronic business

transactions.

Cluster Revenue Models

Revenue models for a cluster are perhaps one of the most challenging factors in

the e-transformation process of a cluster. This is so because the technologies of

web services make it extremely easy for member businesses to transact with

each other without putting any restrictions in terms of accessing each other's

databases, client lists, and related services. Thus while web services facilitate

interactions amongst businesses, they also create the challenge of identifying and

tracking the business interests of each individual member of the cluster. For

example, as is evident from Figure 1, in a travel cluster, the airline will have to

share its information on the travel patterns and choices of a passenger with its

business partners such as the hotel and the car rental companies. Such

information, needless to say, has value in monetary terms. The challenge to

revenue models comes from the fact that the airline also tends to benefit by

sharing this information with the hotel and car rental agencies, as without such

information, a potential client would not be able to customise and package his or

her travel and may look elsewhere for the service he or she desires. Currently

there are no published revenue models that would specifically cater to the needs

of a cluster. However, research in this direction is starting (Pradhan, 2003) and

points to interesting facts such as:

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !188 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Equity in sharing "business value" rather than money;

• Keeping the customer first, irrespective of the revenue sharing;

• Due consideration to cross-border revenue sharing;

• Costs associated with creation and maintenance of a cluster-based infor-

mation system.

Designing E-Cluster

Designing an e-cluster is a technical job. It will not merely result in a DNS (Digital

Nervous System (Gates, 1999)) for a single organization but a DNS that spans

many organizations. As such, the technology demands have to cater to the meta-

model described in Figure 4. Thus it requires proper design of (a) the XML/

SOAP wrappers surrounding the business applications that are to be web

enabled, (b) the modelling of the WSDL, or definition language, that can be first

understood by the members of the cluster and then be openly available to anyone

who needs the service and is ready to pay for it, and (c) understanding of the

directory services as provided by UDDI and the mechanism to publish and locate

to and from the directory respectively. These technologies on which design of the

e-cluster is based are different in their fundamentals and need detailed under-

standing of not only how a particular business will use the web but also how the

group of businesses will do so (Unhelkar, 2003a).

Conversion

Web services are not all about wrapping up legacy software in service capsules.

It requires a certain amount of conversion, primarily data, that is used by the

cluster as against the individual business. This brings the issues of security and

confidence to the fore as a common set of data dealing with a customer; that is,

interacting with three different businesses (airline, hotel, car rental) is likely to

be a source of consternation amongst businesses that had "owned" that

customer alone. Similarly the services that are being offered by the cluster may

be common for a customer, and to avoid duplication, conversion of data will have

to drop data related to a service from all but one business. For example, earlier,

before cluster transformation, each of the three businesses owned the name and

address of a registered traveller. Now it becomes redundant for all three

businesses to have the same data, as the customer is going to initiate only one

transaction. As is obvious, this leads to more issues than basic data conversion

in that multiple parties are involved in putting up their relevant data for services,

and proper coordination amongst all of them is required.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 189

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Change Management

Change management remains the most significant cause of any e-transformation

success and failure and has been studied in detail by Lan (2003) and is also

discussed by Unhelkar in another chapter on global e-business alliances in this

book. It is important that this "soft," or non-technical aspect, of cluster-based e-

transformations is considered seriously and as early as possible in the lifecycle

of the transformation. While the planning for change management can start as

early as when the clusters are identified, this phase is actually executed toward

the end of the e-transformation process. Web services facilitate a group of

companies to come together, and these groups of companies may not be

physically in the same region. The geographical, political, and cultural boundaries

that are transcended quite easily in electronic dealings take a while when

businesses have to deal with each other as a cluster that requires corresponding

physical alliance. Education and training go a long way in facilitating change

management and should be incorporated in the planning process itself.

Sociological Repercussions

While change management is increasingly being considered in electronic trans-

formations, and while it will be a key part of the strategies of a cluster-based

transformation, still it is not the end in terms of "soft" factors influencing success

of transformation. It is vital that the outermost fringes of "soft" factors, called

sociological factors, are considered in a large cluster's electronic transforma-

tion. When a number of companies operate together in a cluster, it becomes

essential that they operate with deference to the culture and social value systems

of the other organisations and the societies and countries in which they have been

operating. A common problem in collaborating companies is their failure to

accommodate differing cultures. Therefore the corporate culture comes to be a

controversial issue for companies that are going to set up a global service alliance

(Grambs & Zerbib, 2000). Multi-cultural issues between collaborating organiza-

tions are a separate topic of discussion, and have been handled by Unhelkar

(2003c).

Conclusion

This chapter has discussed in detail the impact of web services on cluster-based

e-transformation. It was argued that since web services enable a group of

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !190 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

organizations to e-transform simultaneously, it is essential to consider number of

key factors that influence such collective transformation. While the way the

business has used the Internet was shown, it was also shown that to make

effective use of the Internet, businesses need to collaborate extensively with

each other (this was shown at the tip of the Internet usage triangle in Figure 2).

Since web services facilitate this interaction much more easily than a standard

information and transactive use of the Internet, they form the backbone of

cluster-based e-transformation. Furthermore advantages from deployment of

web services-based applications is also possible when a group of organizations

start dealing with each other electronically. As a result of these possibilities

offered by web services, it is important to consider a shift in the way organiza-

tions e-transform. Subsequently instead of focusing on a strategy for a single

business, a carefully thought-out approach is imperative to focus on a group, or

"cluster," of businesses in their e-transformation endeavour. These key aspects

of a business such as the customer, technologies, infrastructure, alliances with

other businesses, software and e-business designs, conversion of data and

programs, and managing the change were all considered in light of a cluster of

organizations transforming simultaneously.

Acknowledgments

The author wishes to acknowledge the support of the University of Western

Sydney School of Computing and IT, notably AeIMS/MIRAG.

References

Chaturvedi, A., & Unhelkar, B. (2003, December). Composite business model

in achieving Enterprise application integration: A Web services perspec-

tive. Proceedings of International Business Information Management

Conference IBIM03, Egypt.

Deshpande, Y., Murugesan, S., & Hansen, S. (2001). Web engineering: Beyond

CS, IS and SE evolutionary and non-engineering perspectives. In S.

Murugesan & Y. Deshpande (Eds.), Web engineering: Managing diver-

sity and complexity of Web application development. Springer.

Dowding, B. (2001). A road map to e-business success. Industrial Distribu-

tion, 90(4), 10.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Web Services and Their Impact in Creating a Paradigm Shift 191

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Fairchild, A.M., & Peterson, R.R. (2003). Business-to-business value drivers

and ebusiness infrastructures in financial services: Collaborative com-

merce across global markets and networks. Proceedings of the 36th

Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences, (pp. 239-248).

Gates, B. (1999). Business @ the speed of thought: Using a digital nervous

system. Australia: Viking.

Ginige, A., Murugesan, S., & Kazanis, P. (2001). A road map for successfully

transforming SMEs into e-businesses. Cutter IT Journal, 14(5), 39-51.

Gottschalk, K. (2000). Web services architecture overview. Retrieved from

http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/library/w-ovr/

Grambs, P., & Zerbib, P. (2000). Caring for customers in a global marketplace.

Satellite Communications, 22(10), 24-30.

Kalakota, R., & Robinson, M. (2000). E-business roadmap for success.

Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

Kirtland, M. (2001). A platform for Web services. Retrieved from http://

msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dnwebsrv/

html/websvcs_platform.asp

Kock, N., Davison, R., Wazlawick, R., & Ocker, R. (2001). E-collaboration: A

look at past research and future challenges. Journal of Systems and

Information Technology, 5(1), 1-9.

Lan, Y. (2003). An investigation of GISM issues for successful management of

the globalization process. In S. Kamel (Ed.), Managing globally with

information technology (pp. 82-103). Hershey, PA: IRM Press.

Lan, Y., & Khandelwal, V. (2003). An empirical assessment of the organisation's

global transition pattern. Proceedings of the Fourth Annual Global

Information Technology Management World Conference, (pp. 282-

285).

Liu, L., Song, H., & Liu, Y. (2001). HDBIS supporting e-collaboration in e-

business. Proceedings of Computer Supported Cooperative Work in

Design: The 6th International Conference, (pp. 157-160).

Monday, P.B. (2003). Web services architecture patterns. Apress.

Morris, A. (2002). The challenge of collaborative commerce. IEEE Review,

48(6), 33-37.

Pradhan, A. (2003). Sensible business models. Talks delivered at University of

Technology, Sydney, Global Information Systems class, spring and autumn.

Sanjiv, K.R., Cantara, M., & Shetty, S. (2003). Web services - reality behind

the hype. Gartner Inc.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !192 Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Siegel, D. (1999). Futurize your enterprise: Business strategy in the age of

the e-customer. John Wiley & Sons.

Thompson, A.A., & Strickland, J.A. (2001). Crafting and executing strategy:

Text and readings (12th ed.). Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin.

Unhelkar, B. (2003a, October 1-3). Critical issues in modeling WSDLs with

UML. Proceedings of the OASIS Open Standards Conference, Sydney,

Australia.

Unhelkar, B. (2003b, November 23-24). Understanding collaborations and

clusters in the e-business world. Proceedings of We-B Conference with

Edith Cowan University, Perth, Australia.

Unhelkar, B. (2003c). Case study in establishment of a chemical plant by an

Indian company in Australia. Journal of the Australian Institute of

Management.

Unhelkar, B., & Arunatileka, D. (2003, December). Mobile technologies,

providing new possibilities in customer relationship management.

IITC Conference, Sri Lanka.

Unhelkar, B., & Elliott, R. (2003, November 23-24). The role of Web services

in e-business and globalization. Proceedings of We-B Conference with

Edith Cowan University, Perth, Australia.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 193

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter X

Quantitative Modeling

in Introducing and

Managing New

Information Technology

in Global Business

Operations

Somnath Mukhopadhyay

University of Texas at El Paso, USA

Kallol Bagchi

University of Texas at El Paso, USA

Abstract

This chapter introduces the concept of using mathematical models to select

international markets for global business operations. It uses predictive

modeling of the Internet growth of many international countries as examples.

The authors hope that it will help multinational enterprises and policy

makers of any nation to study the importance of using quantitative planning

models in introducing and managing new information technologies to new

markets.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !194 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Introduction

The use of the Internet and mobile information technology has become prevalent

in today's world. The Web has reached all over the world. Mobile technologies

are impacting the global business domain. This means new opportunities for

communications among individuals, businesses, and nations. As a result, it is

important for both private and public sectors and policy makers of any nation to

study the growth of new, innovative information technologies from their incep-

tion to subsequent en masse use. Statistics are available about the growth of

previous technological innovations. However quantitative models explaining the

new technology growth in global business operation appear very infrequently in

the literature.

The basic question here is how should businesses decide to enter new markets

with new technology and manage the new information in the new market? The

answer to this question can obviously be obtained in thorough study of many

dimensions that impact the decision. For example, one factor could be the

mathematical modeling involving market selection. Success or failure in the

proper selection of target markets could lead to disastrous results in terms of

growth of the company. Another factor could be to study the potential new

markets (countries). Mathematical models can be developed to study the

potential growth of the new technology based on many factors related to the new

markets. Similarly one can think of many other factors that impact the success

of the strategic decisions to select target markets based on research. Before the

birth of computers, the decision maker (DM) had to depend on gathering

knowledge about the new markets and drawing conclusions from the data based

on mostly intuitions. With the advent of new technology we can introduce

mathematical models that can help DM to make these basic strategic decisions.

In the event of a bad decision, DM can go back and tweak the relevant model

parameter and apply that new model for future enterprise.

It is beyond the scope of this chapter to focus on all the dimensions that are

relevant to a successful strategic decision of finding the right target markets.

Instead we focus on the introduction of mathematical models to study the

potential markets for introducing the new technology. A solid understanding

through mathematical modeling should lead to a successful decision. Also, just

a successful introduction of a new technology is not good enough, because one

has to maintain the leading edge during the product cycle that goes through

internal as well as external competitions.

The objective of this chapter therefore is to discuss quantitative modeling to

introduce and manage new information technology successfully in global busi-

ness operations. We will use new information technologies data such as the

Internet and mobile technology as examples.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 195

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The remainder of the chapter is organized in the following way. In the

background section we introduce the topic and incorporate views of other

researchers. In the mathematical models and data section we introduce the

mathematical models that involve conceptualization of the problem and its

abstraction to a quantitative framework. The dependent and the independent

variables are identified, and the mathematical relationships are established

between them. In the next section we provide results, analysis, and recommen-

dations. Finally in the last section we discuss conclusions and future research.

We list a set of relevant references.

Background

In this section we discuss the business cycle shown in Figure 1 in introducing new

information technology in global operations that involves quantitative modeling.

Before launching any business operation that involves information technology in

a global market, historical information should be gathered about the status of

information technology adoption in different countries all over the world. Once

relevant information has been gathered about how in the past new technology

grew over time, mathematical models can be set up to predict the potential

market size of the proposed new technology in the new market. This is very

important, because DM will decide whether to venture in a new market based

on these models. Once DM selects new markets for the global business

operations, the new technology is implemented. DM's job is not finished yet.

Data is gathered to track down the success of implementation. If the market size

is not big enough as predicted, the operation may have to be terminated. If the

implementation is successful as planned, the process continues. The prediction

error can be quantified and fed back to a math modeling group for future effort.

Figure 1. Quantitative modeling opportunities in global business operations

Performance

evaluation of

operations and

decisions to

continue or

pull out

Feedback

Implementation

of new

technology in

selected markets

Math

modeling

in market

selection

Historical

Information

about new

technology

adoption in

global

operations

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !196 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The major benefit in introducing quantitative model in helping DM make

decisions is to solidify the business decision-making process. Today's global

operations are very complex and decision making based on sheer intuition

without any quantification is risky. Quantifying the decision-making process not

only helps DM pinpoint what went wrong if anything is wrong, it eases the

decision-making process for any future enterprise through effective learning. If

properly adopted, the performance of the global business system can be

considerably enhanced.

In the next sections we will focus first on introducing mathematical models for

this strategic decision making. We will emphasize the explanatory power of the

models. We will use the Internet growth data for model results. Subsequently

we will discuss the predictive power of the model by introducing a validation

scheme. As shown in Figure 1, we will also discuss the feedback aspect from

prediction error to mathematical model rebuild. As discussed in the previous

sections, we start with the idea of modeling the spread of the Internet over many

countries or potential markets. We start with the basic class of models that were

developed over the last two decades. The purpose of this chapter is to build on

those modeling schemes.

A review of literature on the Internet adoption suggests that many recent models

were based on contagion effects from diffusion of innovation theories (Gurbaxani,

1990; Mahajan, Sharma, & Bettis, 1998; Press, 1990; Rogers, 1983). Diffusion

models were tried in several fields, such as management, sociology, marketing,

communication networks, and medicine, to model diffusion throughout a popu-

lation of adopters (Rogers, 1983). The underlying assumption in those models

was that the nonadopters (those who do not have the access to the Internet, in

our case) are increasingly likely to imitate adopters over time. That means the

Internet growth rate depends on the imitation behavior between adopters and

nonadopters. Subsequent analyses (Rai, Ravichandran, & Samaddar, 1997)

found that contagion effects alone might not completely explain the Internet

growth. The study found that logistic and Gompertz models had less predictive

validity compared to the exponential models. The logistic and Gompertz models

are based on contagion, whereas the exponential model is not. However a study

on the growth of e-commerce (Samaddar, Nargundkar, & Mukhopadhyay, 2002)

suggests otherwise. They concluded that logistic model predicted better than the

other two. In a different study Mahajan et al. (1998) also questioned the

appropriateness of the imitation hypothesis for the adoption of the M-form

structure among the U.S. firms. Results from another study on the diffusion of

the M-form structure (Venkatraman, Loh, & Koh, 1994) could not substantiate

the role of imitation. Therefore we conclude that contagion alone reflects an

incomplete understanding of the mechanics of the Internet growth. A new

direction is required in modeling the growth of Internet adoption. This chapter

focuses on the global adoption instead of focusing on a few nations.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 197

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

IBRD/World Bank Group (2000) suggests that many factors such as spread of

technology, literacy, and economic development of nations may be interrelated.

Motivated by this observation that the Internet diffusion could be both a social

and technological phenomenon, Dutta and Roy (2003) captured the relationship

between Internet growth and many social and technical attributes in a cause-

effect structure. They observed that their feed back causal model worked much

better than the logistic and Gompertz models (Mahajan et al., 1998) on the data

from two countries - India and the U.S. Instead we introduce a new approach

here that starts with a simple baseline model with a few attributes. These

attributes are chosen based on previous research. We then build the model based

on explanatory power of the incoming attribute from a set of attributes. This

approach has a solid foundation of basic statistical techniques. This not only helps

explain any model that we build but also helps look for a model that generalizes

over time. As a result we run our models on many countries instead of just one

or two to report the generalization power of the model. We next discuss the

development of theory in the adoption, which serve as the basis of the

mathematical modeling.

Kwon and Zmud (1987) laid down an analytical framework to explain informa-

tion technology (IT) adoption. However, in their work, national-level indicators

were not mentioned. These indicators are needed to explain IT adoption in a

multi-national adoption context. In a recent work (Bagchi, Cerveny, & Hart,

2001) it has been empirically shown that economic, social, cultural, and institu-

tional indicators are needed to explain the adoption of IT in a multi-national

situation.

A simple conceptual model of multi-national IT adoption involves three types of

adoption indicators: economic, infrastructural, and educational. Hofstede (2001)

mentions that simpler explanations should have priority over more complex ones.

If "hard" variables such as economic (such as GDP per capita), technological

(technology base), and so forth predict a country variable better, those make

other variables redundant. We want to explore this basic model with some hard

variables that are grounded in previous work and add on other indicators as

needed.

Economic indicators such as GDP per capita are important in such adoption. It

has been shown that economic indicators such as base GDP per capita are

important in explaining economic growth of a nation (Barro, 1991). The better the

economic health of a nation, the larger the prospect of the Internet adoption, as

the economic power of individuals grow in such prospering economic environ-

ments. Internet use requires use of computers and telecommunication gadgets

such as telephone or cell phones, mostly at home. GDP per capita is the standard

measure of a country's economic development. Other economic indicators such

as inflation rate, income inequality, and so forth could also be important

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !198 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

determinants of adoptions of certain IT. Based on this we can build our first

hypothesis:

Hypothesis H1: The Higher the GDP Per Capita, the

Higher the Internet Adoption

Education could be another important indicator in Internet adoption. Primary and

secondary education enrollments of a nation have been used as determinants of

economic and IT growth (Bagchi et al., 2001; Barro, 1991). In most nations

children go to school, although the number of schooling years could vary. In

affluent nations years of schooling could be longer. For using the Internet

efficiently, one needs education and training. In many nations emphasis on

learning technologies is considered a good thing. Governments are wiring their

educational institutions. The argument in favor of this is: If the nations have to

remain competitive, students should learn to use the newest technologies such as

the Internet. The more technology-trained a student is, the better the prospect

of adopting and using the Internet in a given nation. So better education and

training can improve the use of Internet. This "technological literacy" training is

more likely to happen at secondary school level. So our second research

hypothesis is:

Hypothesis H2: The Higher the Percentage of Secondary

Education Enrollment of Nation, the Higher the Internet

Adoption

Human societies and organizations use technology to defend against uncertain-

ties, to gain competitive advantages to become more efficient. Technological

Imperativeness theory implies that once underway, the technology's march is

irreversible or unstoppable. Chandler (1996) cogently articulates:

Those who pursue certain problems primarily because they are 'technically

sweet' are following the technological imperative. It implies a suspension

of ethical judgment or social control: individuals and society are seen as

serving the requirements of a technological system which shapes their

purposes.

The evolution of the Internet appears very much in consonance with this theory.

It simply means that mechanization has affected social organization and indi-

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 199

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

vidual behavior in such a way as to create a foundation for further development

along certain lines (Mowshowitz, 1976). Thus advances in telecommunications

and PC revolution may have paved the way for the Internet. So we can describe

the next research hypothesis as follows:

Hypothesis H3: The Higher the Level of IT

Infrastructure, the Higher the Internet Adoption

Mathematical Models and Data

Before we describe the mathematical models, readers must be familiar with the

data we have used to build the models. In the model validation section we

describe the validation data set and discuss the importance of creating good

validation data sets.

The data are obtained from the World Bank Database (http://

www.worldbank.org, 2003). The GDP data is obtained from GDP per capita at

PPP. The Internet data is the number of Internet users per 1,000, PC and

telephone data are on PC and mainline telephone usage per 1,000, and the

educational data is percentage of secondary enrollment in schools. The informa-

tion technology variables are used as infrastructural variables. It is well-known

that the PC and telephones serve as basic infrastructure of the Internet. The

number of nations varied from 62 to 68 depending on availability of data. Nations

with partly missing data had to be deleted from the dataset.

We consider two approaches to organize our data. First we look at model

relationships between dependent and independent variables on cross-sectional

data. We look at 1996 and 2000 data for 62 countries to test the three hypotheses

described in the earlier section. After analyzing the model explanatory powers

and significance levels, we expand the analysis on the time-series data. To

analyze the predictive power of the models, we split the data sets in two while

building the longitudinal models. Data for years from 1991 through 1999 are used

for calibration while data for year 2000 are held for model validation. This way

we could remove the bias from the model validation.

All the diffusion models are tried on longitudinal data for a group of nations

categorized by the World Bank based on some criteria. For example, the

Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) set of 28

nations have a similar aim and objective: to achieve the highest sustainable

economic growth and employment in member countries while maintaining

financial stability, to contribute to sound economic expansion in member and non-

member countries, and to contribute to the expansion of world trade

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !200 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

(www.oecd.org). This example set of nations has been used in many economic

studies as a benchmark example. Instead of building country-by-country models,

models are more powerful if they work on a group of similar nations. We will

report the results on the following nine groups of nations that represent more than

150 countries around the world: heavily indebted poor nations, high-income

nations, high income: OECD, high income: non-OECD, least-developed coun-

tries, low and middle income, low income, lower-middle income, and middle

income.

As we explained before, it is good to find out first if there is any functional

relationship between the Internet use level, the attribute of our interest, and the

selectively chosen socio-economic factors that impact the Internet use level. We

look at the cross-sectional data for the years 1996 and 2000. We use the

following cross sectional regression model:

Model 1: INTxx = f (GDPxx, TELxx, PCxx, EDUxx) (1)

INTxx is the Internet access per thousand, GDPxx is the base GDP per capita,

TELxx is the number of telephones per 1,000, and EDUxx is the average

secondary-level enrollment ratio in year xx in each candidate nation.

We discuss in detail the analysis performed on these results in the following

section. After looking at the explanatory power the model, we expanded our

research to diffusion models and other regression models on longitudinal data for

normative as well as predictive analysis. For benchmarking purposes we start

with a classical exponentially smoothed classical model instead of a naïve model:

Model 2: INTt

= alpha*INTt-1

+ (1-alpha)*Ft-1

(2)

INTt

= Internet use at time period t for a country, Ft-1

is forecast of it at time period

t-1, and alpha is the smoothing constant. This is used as a base bench-marking

model for time series data even though we know that this model will always try

to catch up with the actual value of the Internet usage because of an upward

trend in the data. Otherwise the bias of Model 2 will always be on one side.

Clearly any good model should perform better from the base model. We propose

next the very standard exponential model analyzed a lot since 1980 in the

literatures:

INTt

= A*e(t*B)

(non-linear functional relationship) (3)

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 201

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

A and B are parameters to be estimated from the data and "e" is the natural

logarithmic constant, approximately 2.71828. For B>0 the LHS is an ever-

increasing growth that reaches infinity as time instance t approaches to infinity.

By taking the natural logarithm of both LHS and RHS, the model is converted to

a linear one:

Model 3: log(INTt

) = log(A) + B*t = B0 + B1*t (4)

Next we consider a traditional pure contagion diffusion model. The Gompertz

diffusion model is selected because of its ease of use in linear form. The model

can also be easily extended, keeping the linear form with parameters obtained

from adoption Model 1. The linear approximate form of Gompertz model is given

below:

Model 4: log(INTt

)- log(INTt-1

) = α*(log(INT*)-log(INTt-1

)) (5)

INT* is the equilibrium point for the Internet use. We now discuss how to extend

the Gompertz model with relevant indicators obtained from Model 1. If we

assume that INT* is a function of certain variables (GDP per capita, education

level per 1,000 population and IT infrastructure expressed in terms of PC and

telephone adoption per 1000 population) affecting the equilibrium level, then:

log(INT*) = B0+B1*log(GDP)+ B2*log(EDU) + B3*log(PC) + B4*log(TEL)

(6)

We can substitute this expression of log(INT*) of equation (6) in equation (5) and

after some simplification of the equation, we can derive the equation of Modified

Gompertz (Chow, 1967):

Model 5: log(INTt

) = B0 + B1*log(GDP) +B2*log(EDU) + B3*log(PC) +

B4*log(TEL) + B5*log(INTt-1

) (7)

B0, B1, B2, B3, B4, and B5 are parameters to be estimated. Also, as mentioned

earlier, GDP, EDU, PC, and TEL are the values for GDP per capita, education

level, number of PCs, and number of telephones in each country (per 1,000

population), respectively. Many models can be generated from the combinations

of the attributes GDP, EDU, PC, and TEL from equation (7) to derive various

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !202 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

versions of Model 4. The model-generating process adds one variable at a time

to build a model. Based on the explanatory power of the current model the

process keeps the existing variables in the model and adds a new one. After the

addition of a new variable the process looks at all the variables and determines

if all the existing variables in the model stay in the model before adding a new one

based on the standard F statistic test of significance of the overall model , t-

statistics of individual coefficients, and the expected sign of coefficients. The

model that has the best fit (in terms of R2

) as well as all coefficients with relevant

magnitude and sign is selected as the representative Model 4 of a given nation

or groups of nations. In the following sections we will analyze the results obtained

from Models 1 through 5.

Our data consist of the number of Internet users per 1,000 from a set of nations

collected from the World Bank. In particular our analysis is based on various

groups of nations, the details of which are given in Table 1.

Our education variable (EDU9899, or simply EDU) is the average percentage

secondary education enrollment in years 1998 and 1999. Our IT infrastructural

variables, PC1995 (in short, PC) and Tel995 (in short, TEL), denote PC and

telephone adoptions per 1,000 in 1995. Finally GDP1996, or GDP, denotes the GDP

per capita of a nation in 1996. The various country groups as classified by the World

Bank and United Nations have markedly distinct income and indebtedness.

Table 1. The economic classification of nations

Economic Group of

Nations

No. of

nations

Average GNI per capita, PPP

(current international $) in

2002

Heavily indebted poor

country

30

1240

High income 56 27590

High income:

OECD

24 28180

High income:

nonOECD

32 --

Least-developed

country

49 1210

Low & middle

income

21 3910

Low income

64

2040

Lower-middle

income

54

5130

Middle income

45 5630

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 203

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The World Bank's main criterion for classifying economies is gross national

product (GNP) per capita. These various nation groups would exhibit markedly

different growth in Internet use and thus present contrasting scenarios in Internet

growth study. Theses sets are overlapping and cover the entire set of nations.

An outlook of Internet growth for these groups of nations is particularly

significant. The world's poorest and most heavily indebted countries (HIPC)

have three of four key ratios (averaged over 1999-2001) above critical levels:

debt to GNI (50 percent); debt to exports (275 percent); debt service to exports

(30 percent); and interest to exports (20 percent).

Results and Analyses

We start with Model 1. The aim is to identify relevant indicators of Internet

adoption. Initially years 1996 and 2000 are selected for the empirical study

concerning hypotheses 1 to 3 for 68 nations. The OLS regression results are

shown in Table 2.

The Pearson's correlation coefficient values are first computed for the variables

to find out if there is any real relationship between the factors and the internet

adoption. As predicted all independent variables have significant correlation with

the dependent variables. Data rows containing missing data are deleted using

list-wise deletion scheme.

Except for the education variable, GDP and some infrastructural indicators are

significant in both regressions. The variance of the dependent variable explained

by the set of independent variables varied from 0.45 to 0.76. Table 2 shows the

step-wise regression after controlling for Internet users in 1996. The results are

somewhat identical: not only GDP and some infrastructural indicators were

significant, the education variable also became significant. This shows that

supports for hypotheses 1 and 3 are there. Support for hypothesis 2 is limited. The

Table 2. Model 1 OLS regression of Internet adoption, 1996 and 2000

Standardized

Coefficients

1996 t 1996 Sig. 2000 t 2000 Sig.

Beta 1996 Beta

2000

.

(Constant) -.705 .484 -1.818 .074

EDU9899 .118 .916 .363 .048 .290 .773

PC1995 .404 1.938 .058 .224 1.321 .090*

TEL1995 -.219 -.989 .327 .514 5.696 .000

GDP1996 .483 3.481 .001 .214 2.550 .013

1996: R2

=.45, N=62 nations, F=13.55 (p<.000), 2000: R2

=.76, N=68 nations, F=50.72 (p<.000)

45, N=62 nations, F=13.55 (p<.000), 2000: R2

=.76, N=68 nations, F=50.72 (p<.000)

α Dependent Variables: INT1996 and INT2000. *: 1-tailed t test

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !204 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

results from Model 1 help us to identify the key variables (GDP per capita, PC

per 1,000, Telephone per 1,000) related to adoption of the Internet over time. We

also retained EDU as another key variable, as correlation results showed that

EDU is strongly correlated with Internet adoption (in both 1996 and 2000). We

are going to use these variables in constructing the modified Gompertz diffusion

model (Model 4).

We now consider the Internet growth (time-series) data over the period 1991-

1999. Models 2-5 will be applied and tested on this time-series data. We use here

Model 2 as the benchmark model. This is a classical forecasting model used to

predict time-series forecast. The model does not have any analytical explanatory

power. However it has been used as a standard forecasting tool. For our purpose

it will only serve as reference model for performance validation. We will also

discuss this in the next section. However we want to point out a few things here

about the model. When the time series data have a consistent upward trend, a

regression analysis is better than an exponential model because the smoothing

model will always try to catch up with the data. Usually a small value is chosen

for the smoothing parameter alpha so that only a small amount of weight is given

to what actually happened in the last period. However, in our case, it is not

expected to work as there is a clear upward trend in the data. In the next section

we will present our validation results by using two values of alpha (0.2 and 0.9).

We do not expect 0.2 value of alpha to work well because this model will try to

catch up slowly with the upward trend in data. However using alpha = 0.9 gives

us a model that tries to catch up faster. This is also close to a model that is widely

called a "naïve" model in predictive scenario because it essentially sets the

forecast to the last data point. Naïve models are widely used as reference point

for forecasting. Any good model should do better than the naïve model when

validated in an unseen data set.

Our purpose here is to find the explanatory as well as predictive power of the

quantitative models in gaining information about the market a company wants to

penetrate. Our next model is the exponential model. We include this model as

past research (Rai et al., 1997) has shown that the global Internet adoption is

exponential in nature. However exponential models lack in analytical power -

no innovation can go on increasing forever, which is the underlying assumption

of the exponential model. Thus we do not expect much explanatory power from

the exponential model (Model 3). It just uses preset functional relationships

between the data. Even though the model should explain the variability in data

(as we will see below), it is expected to fail when validated for predictive power.

Model 4 is the "Gompertz" model that is widely used in diffusion research. Model

5 has the "cause and effect" structure embedded into it. Therefore, model 5 is

different than the previous models. Model 5 is expected to do well in both

explanatory and predictive stages because of its "cause and effect" relationships

between dependent and independent variables.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 205

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

In Table 3, we report the Model 3 fit statistics for all countries in nine groups

mentioned in the previous section. Clearly almost all the models have a good fit,

with adjusted R-square value of more than 99 percent at a low p-value

significance .001 or less.

Model 3 does not have the cause and effect structure. Even though the model

fit is good, we believe this model is bound to fail in the long-term projection.

We next introduce a pure contagion-based diffusion model, the Gompertz model.

Results are shown in Table 4.

The model obtained good fits with the last-period Internet use, with positive

coefficient values for seven groups of countries. The adjusted R2

values are all

high at an acceptable significance level. However the main problem with this

model is that even though it explains the variability in calibration data, it is a pure

Table 3. Fit statistics of Model 3 (exponential)

Table 4. Fit statistics of Model 4 (Gompertz)

Country B0* B1* Adj-R2*

Heavily indebted poor country -10.068 1.146 0.952

High income 0.913 0.506 0.991

High income: OECD 0.952 0.502 0.990

High income: non-OECD -6.934 0.174 0.997

Least-developed country -11.863 1.276 0.991

Low & middle income -4.763 0.780 0.989

Low income -9.662 1.253 0.915

Lower-middle income -4.756 0.779 0.989

Middle income -4.116 0.763 0.990

* All p-value < .001

Country B0* B1* Adj-R2*

Heavily indebted poor country -- --

High Income .485 .994 .983

High income: OECD** .481 .995 .982

High income: non-OECD** -- --

Least-developed country -- --

Low & middle income .711 .848 .992

Low income .673 .841 .914

Lower-middle income .745 .861 .978

Middle income .784 .846 .989

* All p-value < .01; -- coefficients are not significant or inadequate data

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !206 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

contagion model. As a result, it is not expected to do well in the long-term

projection. We will also look later in the validation section at how this model has

performed on the common validation sample that the other models are tested on.

Next we look at the Model 5 fit statistics. Model 5 has five independent variables.

We used the stepwise regression method to look at the best combination

variables based on a stepwise selection of variables, as discussed earlier. Each

variable is added to the model one by one based on the F statistic value at an

acceptable significance level. Variables may also be deleted from the model

instance if it is not significant (F statistic) at the model instance. We give the

Model 5 fit statistics in Table 5 for five groups of countries.

The attribute telephone (TEL) was not used in the model because telephone data

were non-available for these groups of countries. The models shown in Table 5

have only one modifier variable (GDP, EDU, or PC). The model GDP-Gompertz,

for example, denotes the modified Gompertz model with only GDP as the

modifier variable.

If we look at the fit statistics from Table 5, we see that Model 5 had accepted

GDP and EDU as modifiers. Education level and GDP are important variables

in the final model instance. This confirms what we observed earlier in Internet

adoption results. Some models were thrown out even though they had good

adjusted R2

values. However since this is a time series data, the fit statistics have

to explain both the longitudinal and the cross-sectional activities. The adjusted R2

values are very high, which means Model 5 explains the variability of the

dependent variable more than Models 3 and 4.

Table 5. Fit statistics for Model 5 (Modified Gompertz) on groups of

countries

Country Intercept INT(t-1)

GDP-

Gompertz

EDU-

Gompertz

PC-

Gompertz Adj-R2

High Income -73.032 .532 7.496 -- -- .993

High Income:

OECD -77.996 .493 7.992 -- -- .993

Low & middle

income -10.486 .492 -- 2.773 -- .999

Lower-middle

income -12.783 .373 -- 3.099 -- .991

Middle

income -12.1143 .445 -- 2.909 -- .998

* Almost all the statistics are significant at 0.1 levels; -- coefficients are not significant or

the fit is not the best one

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 207

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Model Validation

In our numerical example we used Internet usage data. Planning ahead is

possible in any technology business if one can predict with a reasonable accuracy

the Internet usage at least in the short-term. We therefore tried to do that by

calibrating a few important models of the Internet usage. Most of the diffusion

models were focused on the fitting of novel models on the past data and

explaining them. A solid understanding of the Internet adoption models is

required for a theoretical grounding in the field. Later Collopy, Adya, and

Armstrong (1994) stated that utilization of the findings from the forecasting

literature can be used to improved assessments of predictive validity of any such

models in information systems research. They discussed three basic principles

of good validation procedures: different data set for validation, well-accepted

models for benchmarking, and adequate sample of forecasts. We discuss in the

following section the importance of doing so.

If the model, after careful investigation, seems to be a good one that explains the

past data very well, it is then expected to do well on the data set it has not seen

(prediction). This process is usually called "generalization." However often a

model with good fit statistics does not perform well on unseen data. There may

be a few reasons why a model that seems to explain the calibration data very well

does not have the predictive power. One reason may be that the data could just

remember the sample point locations in the solution space during calibration and

reduce the calibration error. However the location-specific memory fails when

the locations of validation samples change considerably with respect to the

training samples. This process is called "memorization." This can happen when

there are more variables in the model than needed. That is why it is important to

build a good model validation data set. Models that perform well on a good

unbiased validation data set ensure that memorization did not happen during

calibration. There are many ways a good validation set can be prepared.

However we chose to do it in the simple way that always works. We built our

models (2-4) on data from years 1991-1999. We held out the year 2000 data for

validation. The only problem with that is we could not use year 2000 data in the

calibration. However if we consider the importance of a true validation, this

information loss during model building is well justified. We used Model 1 to make

sure that the attributes we chose are meaningful in terms of explaining the

Internet usage over many countries. Once it was established that they can

reasonably explain the Internet usage for many countries, we focused on model

types 2-4 to calibrate and validate.

The third element in model validation is about avoiding "training on the validation

set." This happens when a researcher calibrates repeatedly on the training set

to make sure that the tweaked model performs well on the test set. The

researcher inadvertently brings information from the validation set to calibration

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !208 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

data in this way. Unfortunately results reported on model performance in

literature may often be tainted by this unique phenomenon. We made sure that

this did not happen here.

We now give below the results from the validation of Models 2, 3, and 4. We start

with Model 2, which is our benchmarking model. In Table 6 we report the

validation statistics. The forecast and actual values for year 2000 for alpha=0.2

are reported in Table 6 along with the prediction performance statistic. As

anticipated, an exponentially smoothed time-series forecast did not work here as

there is an upward trend in Internet use over time for all countries. In other words

the forecast of Internet usage will never catch up with the actual values. We used

0.2 for the value of the smoothing parameter. The following two test statistics

measure the quality of prediction:

• MAPE = (1/n)*((Forecast - Actual) / actual)

• BIAS = (1/n)*((Forecast - Actual) / actual)

where n = number of groups the forecasts were made for. While BIAS gives the

general direction of forecast (up or low), MAPE indicates how far off the

predictions are from the actual. In Table 6 the MAPE and BIAS are reported in

a cumulative way. The last-row MAPE and BIAS give the prediction quality over

all the groups under study.As expected the MAPE is very high (80.5%). The bias

is also negative as predicted. The obvious conclusion is that it is not a good model

to be selected for this problem.

Table 6. Validation statistics for Model 2 (Alpha = 0.2)

Country

Actual

Internet

Use Forecast Error BIAS MAPE

Heavily indebted poor

country 2.135 0.272 -1.863 -0.873 0.873

High income 337.895 88.889

-

249.006 -0.805 0.805

High income: OECD 343.715 89.726

-

253.989 -0.783 0.783

High income: non-

OECD 242.126 73.230

-

168.896 -0.762 0.762

Least-developed

country 1.194 0.154 -1.040 -0.783 0.783

Low & middle income 15.245 2.716 -12.529 -0.790 0.790

Low income 4.046 0.670 -3.376 -0.796 0.796

Lower-middle income 19.673 2.966 -16.707 -0.803 0.803

Middle income 25.720 4.599 -21.121 -0.805 0.805

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 209

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

We next consider the validation statistics of the "naïve" model (alpha = 0.9) that

is used as the base reference model for prediction. It is expected to do better than

the previous Model 2 (alpha = 0.2), since it dampens the weights coming from

previous time-series data. This forgetfulness property works better in this

particular situation. In Table 7 we give the model validation statistics.

The improvement is phenomenal. The MAPE has come down to only 47%, so we

can set this model as our reference model. Any good model should better this

prediction rate. We earlier gave the fit statistics for both Models 3 and 4. In Table

8 we report the validation statistics for model 3.

Table 7. Validation statistics for Model 2 (Alpha = 0.9)

Table 8. Validation statistics for Model 3 (exponential)

Country

Actual

Internet

Use Forecast Error BIAS MAPE

Heavily indebted poor

country 2.135 0.860 -1.275 -0.597 0.597

High income 337.895 205.471 -132.424 -0.495 0.495

High income: OECD 343.715 206.256 -137.460 -0.463 0.463

High income: non-

OECD 242.126 188.310 -53.816 -0.403 0.403

Least-developed

country 1.194 0.523 -0.672 -0.435 0.435

Low & middle income 15.245 7.680 -7.564 -0.445 0.445

Low income 4.046 1.873 -2.173 -0.458 0.458

Lower-middle income 19.673 9.124 -10.549 -0.468 0.468

Middle income 25.720 13.068 -12.651 -0.471 0.471

Country

Actual

Internet

Use Forecast Error BIAS MAPE

Heavily indebted poor

country 2.135 4.007 1.872 0.877 0.877

High income 337.895 391.888 53.993 0.518 0.518

High income: OECD 343.715 393.461 49.746 0.394 0.394

High income: non-

OECD 0.005 0.006 0.000 0.320 0.320

Least-developed

country 1.194 2.459 1.264 0.468 0.468

Low & middle income 15.245 20.921 5.676 0.452 0.452

Low income 4.046 17.652 13.606 0.868 0.868

Lower-middle income 19.673 20.806 1.133 0.766 0.766

Middle income 25.720 33.620 7.900 0.715 0.715

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !210 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The MAPE is very high for this model. Even though the model did very well

during calibration, it did not do well at all in the test set. This is the classical case

for prediction studies. Model 3 did worse than the reference model. One has to

be cautious about not being carried away by the fit statistics at the calibration

stage. On the other hand if a model is built based on a few meaningful factors,

it is expected to do well on the unseen test data. We give the validation statistics

for model 4 in Table 9.

From validation results in Table 9 we can see that the MAPE has come down to

34.5% even though on a slightly different number of groups. This is certainly an

improvement over Models 2-4. We next look at the performance of Model 5. The

validation statistics are given in Table 10.

From the validation statistics it is clear that Model 5 is performing well in

calibration as well as in test set. The MAPE is very low (18.5%) compared to

that of Models 2-4. It has also done much better than our reference model

(exponential smoothing).

Table 9. Validation statistics for Model 4 (Gompertz)

Table 10. Validation statistics for Model 5 (Modified Gompertz)

Country

Actual Internet

Use Forecast Error BIAS MAPE

High income 337.895 336.147 -1.748 -0.005 0.005

High income:

OECD 343.715 336.146 -7.569 0.008 0.011

Low & middle

income 15.245 11.976 -3.269 0.077 0.084

Low income 4.046 3.474 -0.572 0.093 0.156

Lower-middle

income 19.673 14.93 -4.743 0.123 0.248

Middle income 25.72 20.147 -5.573 0.138 0.345

Actual

Internet

Use

Forecast

Error

BIAS

MAPE

High income 337.895 458.684 120.79 0.357 0.357

High income:

OECD 343.715 467.605 123.89 0.359 0.359

Low & middle

income 15.245 15.986 0.741 0.256 0.256

Lower-middle

income 19.673 18.374 -1.298 0.175 0.208

Middle income 25.72 27.145 -2.43 0.121 0.185

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 211

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Validation Feedback

Previously, in Figure 1, we showed that what we learn from the validation can

be fed back to the quantitative modeling scheme. The general feedback scheme

that works for any quantitative modeling should work here also. We give below

the general scheme of feedback for continuously revising the current model:

Step 1. Learn from the validation and document the validation results

Step 2. Quantify the feedback amount

Step 3. Send the information (numerical as well as qualitative information) back

to modeling unit through a typical automatic feedback loop periodically

Step 4. Incorporate this new knowledge into the current model

Step 5. Revalidate the adjusted model with new test data

Step 6. Implement the adjusted model if validation results are good. If not, then

wait for the next periodic feedback and document the current feedback

We can use our example to explain the above steps. Before we start to venture

into a foreign market, let us say we are exploring how many Internet users will

be in that market in the next five years so that we can plan our entry. Let us say

we already have a model (in this case Model 4). We implement the model in the

first year. We observe that on the whole the model is forecasting upward (4.5%).

At this stage we have finished step 1 and step 2. We then send that information

back to the modeling unit (step 3). The modeling unit can then adjust the model

by "m*bias" downward, where m is the momentum factor or adjustment factor

having value between 0 and 1 (step 4). At this stage a new test data set has to

be created through" bootstrapping" or "cross validation" (step 5). If we are

satisfied, we would go ahead with the implementation of the new model (step 6).

This has to be continuously monitored periodically unless the company decides

to quit the market or ceases to operate there for some other reason. As a result

the process will work better if automated.

If there are two current models and one of them is projecting upward and the other

one is projecting downward, then the modeling unit can combine them together.

Conclusion

This chapter demonstrates how managers may select the best predictive and

explanatory model of Internet use, using a step-by-step approach. To start with

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !212 Mukhopadhyay & Bagchi

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

several standard diffusion and forecasting models are considered. The model

selection process selects the best model, which has both predictive and explana-

tory powers. The modified Gompertz model (Model 5), as introduced in this

paper, is better in terms of explanatory power as well as descriptive power.

Future work should be on validating these results on many more nations. Also,

to test the generalization power of the models, they should be tested on more

longitudinal data.

References

Bagchi, K., Cerveny, R., & Hart, P. (2001). Does national culture play a role in

IT adoption? Proceedings of International SSGRR Conference, Italy.

Barro, R.J. (1991). Economic growth in a cross section of countries. Quarterly

Journal of Economics, 106, 407-443.

Chandler, D. (1996). Engagement with media: Shaping and being shaped.

Retrieved November, 2003, from http://www.aber.ac.uk/media/Docu-

ments/short/determ.html

Chow, G. (1967). Technological change and the demand for computers. The

American Economic Review, 57, 1117-1130.

Collopy, F., Adya, M., & Armstrong, J.S. (1994). Principles for examining

predictive validity: The case of information systems spending forecasts.

Information Systems Research, 5, 170-179.

Dutta, A., & Roy, R. (2003). Anticipating Internet diffusion. Communications

of the ACM, 46(2), 66-71.

Gurbaxani, V. (1990). Diffusion of computing networks: The case of Bitnet.

Communications of the ACM, 33(12), 65-75.

Hofstede, G. (2001). Anonymous culture's consequences: Comparing val-

ues, behaviors, institutions and organizations across nations (2nd

ed.). Sage Publications.

IBRD/World Bank Group. (2000). Beyond economic growth: Meeting the

challenges of global development. Retrieved November, 2003, from

http://www.worldbanl.org/depweb

Kwon, T.H., & Zmud, R.W. (1987). Unifying the fragmented models of

information systems implementation. In R.J. Boland & R. Hirschheim

(Eds.), Critical issues in information systems research. New York: John

Wiley & Sons.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Introducing and Managing New Information Technology 213

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Mahajan, V., Sharma, S., & Bettis, R. (1998). The adoption of m-form organi-

zational structure: A test of imitation hypothesis. Management Science,

34, 1188-1201.

Mowshowitz, A. (1976). The conquest of will: Information processing in

human affairs. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

Press, L. (1990). Tracking the global diffusion on the Internet. Communications

of the ACM, 33(12), 65-75.

Rai, A., Ravichandran, T., & Samaddar, S. (1997). How to anticipate the

Internet's global diffusion. Communications of the ACM, 40(11), 11-17.

Rogers, E. (1983). Diffusions of innovations. New York: Free Press.

Samaddar, S., Nargundkar, S., & Mukhopadhyay, S. (2002). The growth of e-

commerce: An empirical study of the diffusion of Internet host sites.

Proceedings of DSI 2002, San Diego.

Venkatraman, N., Loh, L., & Koh, J. (1994). The adoption of corporate

governance mechanisms: A test of competing diffusion models. Manage-

ment Science, 40, 496-507.

World Bank Database. (2003). Data. Retrieved November, 2003 from http://

www.devdata.worldbank.org

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !214 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter XI

Comprehensive Impact

of Mobile Technology

on Business

Khimji Vaghjiani

K & J Business Solutions, Australia

Jenny Teoh

K & J Business Solutions, Australia

Abstract

In this chapter we explore the concept of enterprise, or organisational

mobility. We examine how mobility in a business can provide a competitive

advantage and enhanced sustainability. Potential industry applications

for mobile technology are discussed. We delve further by exploring the

growth areas of mobile technologies and outline key success factors for the

stakeholders in the mobile technology arena. We assess the many

opportunities mobile technology brings to various businesses. Furthermore

the impacts of mobile technology on organisations and society are evaluated.

We then conclude by outlining various competing mobile technologies

available to the market both today and in the future.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 215

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Introduction

The business need for mobility and real-time connectivity are terms that are

being used frequently in the technology industry but often without compelling

business applications or concise and agreed-upon definitions. While it is impor-

tant to note that technology on its own is only a means to an end, the purpose, or

business objective, to which the most suitable technology is required has to be

developed.

Mobility can enhance productivity, as workers are not constrained to their desk

in order to perform everyday business tasks - for example, employees can still

work whilst waiting in meeting rooms for a meeting to start. Furthermore, it can

also help organisations enhance competitive advantage by allowing the organisation

to move toward the concept of real time enterprise (RTE) through real-time data

input and quicker decision making regardless of location.

However, despite these benefits, mobility does have its disadvantages, namely

blurring the divide between work and non-work life. This is especially evident in

the Information Age.

Certain components of the value chain have leaped ahead of other aspects,

prohibiting greater uptake of mobile technology. While mobile device manufac-

turers continue to produce devices at an alarming pace, uptake and adoption has

slowed due to factors outside their control. Apart from commercial reasons such

as cost, security fears (both real and unfounded) are inhibitors. There are also

external factors that can inhibit the movement toward a truly mobile society. The

limitations of carrier infrastructure and standardisation issues are just a few.

Enablers to greater mobile uptake would be greater applications provided by a

single device, with faster connectivity than the traditional GPRS technology.

The Internet has been a blessing in disguise to the apparent and recent surge in

the mobile age. Mobile technologies leverage on the strengths of the Internet for

services such as data communications and information services. Where will it

lead to? What opportunities will it provide to businesses? How will mobile

technology impact on daily life? These and other questions will be answered in

this chapter.

Mobile Technology

Mobile technology has evolved from the early '80s. It now includes wired LANs

(local area networks), laptops providing a sense of mobility, and computing

power in a handbag. In 2003 we saw more and more proliferation of wireless

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !216 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

connectivity, and growing wireless hubs have brought with them multiple device

manufacturers. Devices include laptops, phones, and PDAs (personal digital

assistant), as well as those in the converged marketplace, that is, a PDA

combined with a mobile phone. The predominance of higher transmission speeds

will allow devices to be more useful in accessing the ever-growing applications.

The growth in devices, infrastructure, applications services, and consumer

demand to be "always connected" will exponentially drive mobile technology

needs.

Consumers will find greater availability to information, and opportunity to

complete transactions such as purchasing goods and services within the mobile

environment. This will become increasingly predominant and common over the

next few years, before a slowing down or a catching up of one or more of the

components of the value chain.

Some Industry Facts

Increased mobile technology and the desire for corporations and executives to

be "always on" and "always connected" has led to some exciting industry

developments; below are some extracts of these developments.

• Datamonitor (2003) claims that as "shipments of mobile hand-held devices

will reach 300 million by 2006, the need for dedicated, specialised functions

for business applications will increase for most corporations."

• Forrester (2001) claims between 2001 and 2003 corporations have become

more mobile, with usage of certain corporate applications increasing up to

100%, with growth of 50% year-to-year.

• Kwikhand (2003), a Palm solutions provider, claims in its recent report

entitled "Logistics & Materials Management," that, "To stay competitive,

it is imperative that you drive down costs, accelerate productivity, and

synchronise operations. The supply chain generates increasing 'data

capture' requirements, across the corporation, instantly, and accurately.

The corporation needs to be more mobile and aware."

Symbol, the largest worldwide scanning player with global sales of $1.5 billion in

2001, has generated sales of $600 million on scanning devices alone, of which

mobile devices are only a small amount. Symbol has recently installed 600 mobile

scanners in grocery stores in Europe, allowing customers to immediately scan

and pay much faster while providing merchants immediate supply chain informa-

tion. This application demonstrates benefits of immediacy, real time, and data

quality integrity as benefits for corporations. This installation is just one of many

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 217

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

reported globally that are being trialed and subsequently implemented. Symbol,

a leader in scanning technology, has created market openings in many other

industries such as law enforcement, health, and logistics.

• Forrester, in its report entitled "Doctors connect with Handhelds" (2001),

claims the hand-held MD solutions will grow to $1.2 billion by 2006, with

core applications of uplifting patient data and ordering prescriptions online

in real time, reducing multiple handling and errors. Doctors claim, " we can

reduce errors, and redundancies and communicate to staff better."

• eMarketer (2000) claims 23% of workers are now considered mobile and

spending more then 20% of their working time outside of their offices.

While the selling price of PDAs has thus far prohibited the diffusion of

hand-helds, this will now change, with prices expected to fall down to $167

by 2004, making the devices more affordable to corporations and individu-

als. This has been proven partly by the number of PDA manufacturers

entering the market, from Palm back in 1996 to Handspring, Sony, and

Microsoft, who developed their own operating system in competition with

Palm. Since the introduction of the PDA there are now 17 manufacturers

operating on Palm, Microsoft, and the Symbian operating systems. The

same eMarketer report claims approximately 1.3 million mobile bar code

scanning PDA devices will be shipped in 2004.

• A company called Research in Motion (www.rim.com) has recently

developed the Blackberry, a Personal Information Management (PIM) tool

capturing the "always on" executive market. Blackberry has also been

eyeing the mobile data capture market with great interest as an extension

to its so far highly successful PIM market.

Mobility in Context of Organisations

Enterprise mobility is the ability to work anywhere, anytime - at home, on the

road, even in the office building away from your desk. To stay competitive,

enterprises are mobilizing their businesses and workforce.

There are three components of mobility:

1) Mobile devices, for example, handheld devices, or points of access

2) Technology standards for transmission of data and/or voice, for example,

Bluetooth, GPRS

3) Service providers and applications developers

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !218 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

A leading research firm, Roper/NOP, published findings in April 2003 based on

a unique global research study (RoperASW & NOP World, 2003). The findings

from the project "Business-Critical PCs" indicate that when small and medium

businesses (SMBs) deploy wireless applications in innovative ways, whether

using tablets, Pocket PCs, or laptop PCs, they are able to reduce costs, provide

their staff with more flexibility, and in many cases gain competitive advantage.

Organisations need to ensure that mobility solutions integrate into existing

enterprise systems and are capable of extracting data from a wide variety of

back-end systems, such as databases, content servers, e-mail systems, customer

relationship management (CRM) applications, supply chain management (SCM)

applications, and other enterprise software.

Industry Applications for Mobile

Technology

Potential industry applications are varied and diverse; below is a list of potential

mobile application for various industries:

Figure 1. The end-to-end mobile story

End user

devices

Corporate

Applications

CRM

system

This diagram depicts the relationship between the different components of mobility in an example

of how mobile technology can be used in an organisation.

Email

system

Enterprise

Portal

Network Infrastructure

VPN

802.11

Broadband

3G

GPRS

GSM

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 219

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Medical records management - That is, records could be travelling to

various departments, and the scanner can be used to log the exact location

of such records.

• Highway patrol for on-the-spot-fines - Licences and registration can be

scanned immediately, with fines being logged at the central computer. This

market needs to be developed further, and much background effort is

required by the authorities.

• Retail stores - It is believed that in the U.S. Home Depot is using the

mobile devices to track and order stock immediately. This is potentially a

huge area of the market that is currently being, albeit partially, addressed

by Symbol. Other U.S.-based retailers have also started to explore wireless

technology for stocktaking and automated ordering of depleted stock.

• Asset management - Large corporations that own PCs and printers and

so forth need to locate and audit their equipment. These devices are all bar

coded; it would be easy and less time-consuming if the auditor simply

scanned the bar code rather then having to manually write the serial number

for data entry later. The new process would eliminate duplicate serial

numbers or equipment that is misplaced, improving data quality.

• Tracking - This category has many growing applications for mobile

technologies. Tracking of stock and inventory, for example, for chain of

custody or for the tracking and entry of people at sporting events. Tickets

can be issued with bar codes, allowing wardens and staff to monitor and

police entry to various events, say, at tennis matches.

• Ordering - At restaurants and sporting events. Mobile solutions are being

developed for the food and beverages industry, for example, by allowing

people at various remote locations or at large sporting arenas to order their

meals whilst seated. Each seat could be bar-coded, with an attendant

simply taking the order, which is wirelessly transmitted to the central

kitchen, prepared, and taken to the customer without the customer having

to walk to a take-away station.

• Home delivery - A mobile device with the capability to capture data such

as credit card or depot card information would potentially have a large

market with, say, pizza delivery companies; in fact, Domino's Pizza is

known to be trialing the concept.

• Military applications - The battlefield could benefit from the ordering of

supplies and products in the field directly from the main store, as well as

providing inventory management capabilities.

• Manufacturing - Chrysler in the U.S. has shown interest in using these

devices for the tracking and ordering of stock. This provides various

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !220 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

employees the ability to order on-the-spot components when required as

well as update stock levels.

These are but some of the industries that are looking at mobile technology as a

means to deliver better customer service and enhanced profits. The maturity of

end user, and infrastructure in mobile technology, will see greater usage,

providing the industry with greater revenue opportunities.

What predictions for mobile solutions?

Mobile technology will enable anytime, anywhere access and connectivity to

information, and transactions, from ordering and automatically paying for pizzas

to paying for a holiday apartment on the other side of the world to booking a flight

with your favourite seat, on the fly, just before you get to the airport.

Businesses will be able to serve customers on site or from remote locations.

Corporate staff will be able to access and perform business transaction such as

interrogate customer relationship software while on the road, or simply to find a

work colleague's contact details by connecting onto the corporate directory from

the coffee shop. Placing customer requests from the retail location without

having to return to the office will become more of a reality, hence increasing the

"immediacy" of customer service. User interaction will be increasingly driven by

speech recognition and could bring with it greater security.

What is the Growth Business for

Mobile Technology?

Mobile technology will become more personalised. The device will no longer be

just a mobile phone. It will now include a diary, an address book, a wallet (as seen

by recent trial in Japan), and a mobile credit card. The technology will allow

greater transmission speeds, lending it self to richer applications such as movies

and live broadcast. Mobile technology will be ubiquitous to any specific device.

Instead of asking for a Nokia or a Panasonic, consumers may be asking for a

"communicator," similar to asking for a copier, rather then a Canon or a Hewlett

Packard.

The competitive landscape is becoming customer-focused. Consequently, the

customer base is becoming more demanding of the service it expects and

receives. This leads organisations to deliver more service more efficiently, with

greater levels of quality, possibly at a higher cost.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 221

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

More and more organisations are mobilising their resources to better deliver

customer service. The core functions of mobility revolve around product

ordering, data capture, data entry, and asset management as detailed below:

• Automated product ordering - based on data capture of stock numbers

• Field service ordering and data capture of product

• Sales force automation - product inquiry function

• Reporting - of asset management functions

The main value proposition that these core functions and values bring to mobile

solutions is:

• Immediacy of action - data capture and information processing

• Data quality - due to "once-only" data entry

• Speed of service - via end-to-end automation rather then manual actions

The return on investment, or ROI (to be discussed in more detail later), starts to

take effect once the above parameters are considered, particularly more for

time-, quantity-, and quality-sensitive businesses. The benefits outweigh the cost

of technology, cultural change, and training, as businesses become more

responsive to customer need and customers in return reward through return

business.

Hence the growth areas for mobile devices will be in the area of delivering better

customer service and in innovative, and often unique, customer solutions that can

be derived from these devices. Suppliers able to better meet the needs of

customers around these core values will reap financial rewards in the mobile

business.

Product differentiation is intrinsically linked to delivering innovative customer

solutions. Consequently businesses will want to adapt new technologies in order

to remain competitive and outgrow their competition.

What are the inhibitors to mobile technologies, and how

will they be overcome?

Data transmission speeds will be the core inhibitor going forward for greater

mobile usage, not applications. Mobile services will be limited by simply the type

of application a consumer can possibly perform on a mobile device. For example,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !222 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

downloading a movie on a laptop provides a completely different experience than

performing the same exercise on a mobile phone.

Cost of mobile transmission will also be a large inhibitor to the mainstream. While

the early adopter and enthusiast will not be deterred by cost, the majority will

exercise restraint based upon cost, until price reduction and levelling set in.

The usability aspects of mobile devices, or the lack thereof, will discourage

mainstream uptake. However the onus to ease usability is not only on the mobile

device designers but also on service providers who also have an equally

important role to play.

Online services providers and their respective Web sites need to be re-designed

for the smaller screens that are characteristic of mobile devices. It has been

found that most are basically scaled-down versions of Web sites designed for PC

users - that is, without the graphics and multiple columns. According to Nielsen

(2003), to cater to mobile devices, Web sites and services should offer much

shorter articles, dramatically simplified navigation, and highly selective features.

The message is clear for service providers - tailor online services and their

presentation to the device or risk being left behind by the discriminating

consumer.

Organisations currently face the issue of the trade-off between cost of support-

ing workers using mobile devices and the increased benefits gained through

improved productivity. The total cost of ownership increases as mobile workers

support their devices on an ad-hoc basis.

A way forward is to implement a centralized management solution. This means

that support staff is able to deploy, configure, monitor, and troubleshoot the

mobile device systems and applications from a central console manager.

Another key issue to consider is compatibility between different mobile devices.

There is a variety of software available on the market, produced by different

vendors, for different mobile devices. For example, Hewlett Packard's PDA

uses Microsoft Windows CE operating system (OS), while Palm's PDA uses its

own proprietary operating system Palm OS. Consumers are faced with many

choices. The challenge is to ensure that different peripherals, file formats, and

applications are compatible between different vendor's products as well as

within a single vendor's product range.

When will "value-added" mobile technology become

mainstream, as distinguished from voice mobile

technology?

The notion of "immediacy" of information and transactions will drive the growth

of mobile technologies. Mainstream adoption will surge once device prices

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 223

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

reduce, similar to what happened with mobile phones, or be offered in different

cost models for the consumer. The complexity of user functions needs to be

made simpler, and there must be value in the information being accessed, and it

must be worth paying for. In addition greater services proliferation will enable

mainstream adoption, increase supply and influence cost. This argument is a

contradiction in terms; greater functionality (which is a function of the technol-

ogy) needs to be simple and intuitive.

Organisations' attitude toward adopting value-added mobile technology would

be dependent upon several factors:

• Speed of delivery of services for mobile devices - Today's consum-

ers understand that time equates to money. It is therefore imperative that

services are delivered speedily with minimal delays.

• Ease of use - The workforce in organisations generally consists of users

with different skill sets based on technology adoption curve. To ensure

adoption of the technology, mobility solutions should be easy to use,

requiring minimal effort by the consumer.

• Reliability of service - As workers have the ability to be always

connected, they assume that the network will be available when demanded.

Service providers must minimise network dropouts and implement policies

to safeguard against any interference

• Accuracy of transactions - Service and application providers need to

ensure that the integrity of transactions is maintained. For instance, if you

asked for specific information, you are delivered that specific information.

Or when you send information to a remote server, that information will not

be altered during transmission.

Key Factors for Service Providers with Mobile

Applications

While mobile applications and services offer enormous opportunities both to end

customers and service providers alike, mobility brings with it many challenges.

These challenges rest in the devices, carrier capability, infrastructure, and the

application service provision.

The following text details the complexity of the wireless end-to-end solution. We

can simplify the architecture around three main areas, the device, carrier

capability, and application.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !224 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Below is an analysis of these challenges and factors that will affect take-up of

mobile applications.

Mobile Device End:

• Length of battery life - Mobile applications rely heavily on the capacity

of the battery. Frequent charging deters users from using the technology.

On the other hand, a longer life often implies a larger battery, implying a

heavier and larger-sized device, which may inhibit take-up. As battery

technology improves, devices will become smaller and more versatile.

• Size of display area - The size of the display on a phone, a PDA, or a smart

phone is limiting for many applications such as watching a movie. However,

a small screen size would be ideal for stock quotes and purchases or

ordering commodity items.

• Mechanism for data input - Performing data entry onto a small handset

would severely limit the mobile device usefulness for organizations that

require large amounts of data entry. Automated bar code reading or Radio

Frequency Identification Tags (RFID - an emerging technology) would

provide fast and efficient data capture, reducing the need to manually enter

the data and hence improving useability.

• Overall form factor - The form factor is the actual size, look, and usability

of the device. Form factor used to describe the usability ("feel-ability") of

the device measures how well the device performs the functions that it has

been designed for, how well it does data entry, and how well it does data

extraction work. All these issues are vital to ensuring the best device, with

the best form factor, is chosen for the type of work being performed; that

is, "fit for purpose."

• Loss of device leading to loss of vital information - Recently a device

was stolen in the U.S., resulting in vital information of a financial organisation

being lost to the underground market. This begs the question of whether the

device should be an intelligent one or not - enabled to protect the data it

holds through encryption. Should auto-synchronisation be a mandatory

feature, although it would place demands for additional telecommunications

and increasing costs? Should devices utilise their hard drives to allow for

better availability, in case wireless connectivity is unavailable? Loss of

mobile service should not prohibit a business from functioning, and while

business operations would be best served in some cases with wireless

connectivity, working offline (without connectivity to the network) should

not stop an organisation from performing limited business functions. These

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 225

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

questions must be answered, particularly where data quality, integrity, and

immediacy of information is concerned.

• Processing power - Devices are becoming faster and smaller, though no

sooner have the devices become faster and smaller than the application has

become obsolete. This has lent itself to greater applications being available

to consumers and will continue to increase with more players entering the

mobile market, as profit potential materializes.

• Cost of procurement - Mobile devices, be it a PDA or a converged

device (voice and data), are still in the early adopter phase, with manufac-

turers developing many varied devices, searching for an application that will

capture the market. A converged device is one where the voice and data

functionality are physically combined. It is early for these devices but the

proposition to replace with a single voice and data end-user devices is high.

Unlike mobile phones, these devices may take a while, say another one to

two years before the majority takes up this technology. The cost will not

reduce until there is a larger adoption, which will create a gradual reduction

in price.

Carrier End:

• Types of wireless technology - Over the next two to three years, the

maturity of the technology will determine which is predominant. As noted

earlier, a variety of mobile technologies are available from the carriers.

Which is most suited to the particular application needs to be assessed to

ensure adequacy of speed. Costs will continue to play their role in consumer

take up.

• Security factors - While mobile phones have "crossed the chasm" as far

as security fears are concerned, transferring data, making stock purchases,

merchandising purchases, and performing corporate data transactions stills

remains the domain of the "technology enthusiast." Security fears seem to

be less of a concern, industry pundits talk about the general adoption of

wireless devices, and limited trials currently underway are developing

greater confidence in the business community and amongst users.

Application End:

• Third-party application availability - The richness of the applications and

functionality will also impact the user uptake.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !226 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Key Success Factors for Mobile Industry Players

The following are excerpts from leading industry product and service providers

addressing the need to assess and understand factors prior to penetrating the

emerging mobile market. A short explanation is provided for each aspect

covered below.

• Targeting demographics for particular devices - That is, wireless

tablet PCs would be best suited in, say, an office environment, while a PDA

would be best suited to personal use where carrying a large device is

prohibitive. A wireless tablet is essentially a laptop-style computer with the

capability to perform hand and speech recognition. Hand recognition is

provided by simply using the touch screen to write on, as if it were a paper

notepad, allowing greater flexibility. Tablet PCs are smaller and light-

weight; most manufacturers now have a form of tablet PCs in the market

as part of their emerging range of computer products.

• Development of modular architecture and devices - "Any device, to

any application", a plug-and-play architecture, will be key to mobile

technology uptake. Common industry standards will be vital to mobile

technology adoption.

• Developing relationships with service providers and systems inte-

grators - Industry players will need to work together, to enhance each

other's capabilities. Working with others in the value chain to develop

functionality would provide greater uptake of mobile applications.

• Investigate advertising & corporate sponsorships opportunities -

Need to take advantage of various players operating in the mobile space

working cooperatively to exploit market opportunities, not only for eco-

nomic reasons but also for cross sell opportunities.

• Producing small footprint applications devices - That is, niche

functionalities to cater to specific needs of various market segments.

Manufacturers will need to investigate and fully understand market seg-

mentation before investing large amounts of capital. A single standard

mobile device may not suit all applications or business services, and hence

compatibility and understanding business needs will be key.

• Continue to develop next generation application - Innovation is the

key to sustainability. Manufacturers who continue to test and trial will

eventually dominate the market. Continuous improvements to form factors

and applications will reap technology providers with increased consumer

uptake, market share, and profitability.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 227

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Cost of end-to-end solution - Solutions need to be affordable and

effective. Cost of telecommunications needs to be reduced for data

transmission, as already evident in voice transmission.

What will kill the potential "killer application?"

Mobile technology proliferation should learn from its voice predecessor. More

compelling cost models and plans, suited to consumer lifestyles, will foster

growth in demand. Poor data speeds and breaks between connections while

moving (from mobile access point to another) will hinder the market. A non-

ubiquitous network infrastructure, that is, one in which carriers do not cover a live

session from each other's customers, will slow down adoption. An ubiquitous

network could potentially allow any device from any carrier to be connected

seamlessly, providing roaming from one carrier jurisdiction to another without

loss of connectivity.

Other factors that will inhibit adoption:

• Poor data transmission speeds - Particularly for high imagery and

interactive applications. Basic applications with limited graphics and writ-

ten around simple text-based informational business functionality will

develop the initial market. This will create market appetite and develop

experience amongst the user community for these devices.

• Cost of devices - High end, for at least the foreseeable future, will prohibit

mass uptake of usage amongst non-business markets. The business market

will have more compelling reasons to adopt mobile technology. There will

be some challenges faced by businesses to justify these costs, as seen by

some organisations that wish to deploy PIM solutions via mobile PDAs.

• Security of personal information-based applications - For example,

banking and other financial transactions. While the finance community

have been looking for that elusive application that propels mobility, consum-

ers are still, and will continue to be, reluctant to use mobile technology

particularly for personal financial transactions. Informational interaction

could be the driver for more meaningful uptake in the finance industry.

• Loss of device - Losing the mobile device can be considered a serious

factor to faster mobile uptake. A mobile device can be a PDA, a smart

phone, or a laptop/tablet PC. This can be considered similar to losing a

mobile phone; however the above devices are still not mainstream and cost

considerably more than a mobile phone, and, more importantly, contain

valuable information that, if lost, could cause considerable financial harm

or embarrassment to any organisation.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !228 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• And finally, a lack of a simple set of valuable reasons for businesses

to use mobile devices - However this is unlikely as all the evidence

suggests otherwise; applications are plentiful. It will nevertheless be

imperative for businesses to ensure the application has specific business

value, addressing propositions and real business needs. Wireless services

will not be adopted simply because of "cool technology" reasons, or at least

not by the masses. Compelling business value must be the core objective.

Speed of customer service, data quality, time and cost savings, and

innovative customer solutions will foster greater wireless uptake.

Social Implications of Mobile Technology

The ability to always "be connected" has many implications on societal values.

Organisations will be able to implement "work from home" programs helping

employees optimise flexibility and, as a result, achieve an improved quality of life.

The opportunity exists to place a greater emphasis on family society and see a

shift in family values as employees find a suitable work-life balance, all the while

maintaining or even improving productivity. Furthermore the widespread adop-

tion of flexi-work programs could help reduce traffic congestion, air pollution,

accidents, injuries, or deaths associated with commuting to work.

However mobile technology also has negative impacts on society by blurring the

divide between work life and social life. The demise of standard working hours

for full-time work is already evident in today's society - especially at the highly

skilled spectrum of the job market. Furthermore employees are finding an

increased need to be multi-skilled in the usage of technology, and there is a

requirement to work longer hours in order for the organisation to stay competi-

tive. It is no surprise that children of the Information Age see less of their working

parents.

In an article by Shipley (2003), she acknowledges that it is not only the mobile

device or the network that is "always on." Sometimes it is the employees who

can never switch off and tune out of work. Whether habitual or not, this has the

potential to increase stress for employees. This extra stress can have measur-

ably adverse effects on our health, from insufficient sleep to chronic stress

fatigue and even increased blood pressure.

Not only must society find a common ground for the definition of work-life

balance, individuals, too, have to define the right mix of work and non-work life,

bearing in mind that every individual has a different outcome. Individuals need

to define their own priorities - the priorities of their careers, of their families, the

time for themselves, and the time for others.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 229

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Organisational and Workforce Implications of Mobile

Technology

There are three main areas that organisations will need to address when

evaluating mobile technology's impact on the workforce:

• Cultural changes in the workforce,

• Segmentation of workers into different worker types,

• Occupational health and safety (OHS) issues surrounding the use of mobile

technologies.

Enterprise mobility involves a cultural change in the workforce of an organisation.

Adapting employees' attitudes toward working in new environments and work-

ing in ad-hoc manners requires change management strategies. Organisations

need to assess how to train employees to use different types of technologies and

how to design a best-fit training program. Organisations need to ensure that

employees are able to knowledgeably retrieve, manage, and act upon information

in a more flexible and efficient way, such that newer and more efficient business

processes can be created, bringing increased levels of productivity.

As organisations move forward and embrace the concept of a truly mobile

workforce, they need to understand the needs of their employees. These needs

will vary, depending on factors such as role, location, network access, and types

of information or applications required. Gartner (2003a) has classified mobile

workers into five categories (see Table 1).

These categories all exhibit common patterns of mobility but distinct needs for

information, devices, networking costings, support issues, and work patterns.

Furthermore Gartner believes that by segmenting users into worker types,

organisations are able to create strategies around these groups, thereby creating

effective solutions for the use of mobile technology.

Occupational health and safety (OHS) is one of the crucial objectives of training,

in particular educating employees on the correct posture to adopt when using

mobile devices and to conduct their own workplace assessment, whether at

home or in the office. Research has shown that prolonged use of laptops while

travelling on the road hinders blood circulation in the abdominal area and

increases the likelihood of "economy class syndrome." It may also lead to

chronic back problems and bad posture habits. Furthermore, poor lighting

increases the risk of eyestrain.

All these health issues arise due to the extra mobility, allowing employees to work

anywhere, especially in places that were not designed for working long periods.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !230 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

ROI for Businesses to Provide Mobile Transactions and

ROI for Customers' Uptake of Mobile Solutions

Consumers are looking for access to information and transaction capability.

Businesses are only willing to provide mobile services if the value proposition is

compelling enough - that is, there are significant and quantifiable financial

improvements associated with the technology adoption.

Return on investments, or ROI models, will be driven by reduced infrastructure

costs, both from carriers and applications providers. To date mobile services

have been restricted due to these two core reasons. Overcoming consumer

resistance to timed mobile "information calls" would encourage greater uptake

and hence impact positively the ROI model of the service provider.

A report by Sage Research Inc. for Cisco Systems (http://www.cisco.com),

prepared in 2001 and entitled "Wireless LANs: Improving Productivity and

Quality of Life," outlined productivity benefits around three main areas:

Table 1. Categories of mobile workers

Worker

categories

Requirements and characteristics

Alerts workers Require small amounts of data in short bursts, and one or

two button responses. These workers generally use thin

clients as their work tools.

For example, service notifications via SMS used by field

staff.

Message workers Require high mobility, as these workers are e-mail-

centric whether on-site or off-site at customer locations.

For example, sales managers need to touch base with

their team constantly, employing devices such as a

Blackberry to access their email.

Forms workers Require high degree of connectivity and clipboard or

form replacement applications. Work tools can be either

thin or thick clients.

For example, geomatic engineers, medical staff.

Knowledge

workers

Require heavier forms and generally have broader needs

than form workers.

For example, detailed blueprints and images sent by

construction managers to construction workers.

Power workers Require mobility and almost desktop-like performance in

order to access e-mail, but using thick clients.

For example, executives.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 231

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Time savings

• Flexibility

• Quality of work

Time-Based Savings: The Sage Research report claims "a wireless LAN use

can save up to eight hours per week versus a wired LAN use." Time savings

often result in dollar savings, although how you measure these dollar savings can

open a great debate. If these savings do not equate to revenue generation, their

value can often be diluted. The time savings also have different values depending

on the type of organisation and function an employee performs. Time-based

savings with higher-paid employees potentially bring more value to the organisation

being armed with mobile capability than does a lower-paid employee base. Time-

based cost savings can be substantiated by idle time being better utilised by

company executives; for example, a wireless device can provide connectivity

while waiting at the airport or while in a cab.

On the other hand, service-based businesses such as tradespeople would benefit

from "immediacy of action" by entering job data while on site, receiving

payments while at the customers' premises rather than waiting for more

traditional paper-based transactions.

Flexibility: Mobility brings the opportunity to, for example, remove your cabled

tablet PC and seamlessly connect to the wireless connectivity, whether an

employee is in the office, conference room, inventory area, training room, or even

the café on ground floor. Apart from within the building, CDMA and other

technologies will provide greater mobile range. A sales force can be connected

via wireless connectivity while serving a customer many miles from base, hence

eradicating the need to return to base to serve customer requests.

Quality of work: Sage Research claims "data can be fed directly from various

locations instead of being manually entered at a later date." This improves data

quality, reduced entry error and leads to potential cost savings.

Competing Technology Standards that Enable Mobility

Below we look at the various mobile technologies either in use now or slowly

gaining momentum in the marketplace.

Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Technologies

Note that the transmission range figures (Deutsche Bank, 2003) provided for the

IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) standards are a general

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !232 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

guide only. In reality, it will depend on the mobile devices' antenna gain, the

transmit power applied to the antenna, the reception sensitivity of the radio card,

and the obstacles between end points.

• IEEE 802.11a

Frequency band: 5 Ghz

Transmission range: 50 ft

Transfer rate: 54 - 100 Mbps

Advantages: Higher transmission rates than other 802.11 standards. This would

be an optimal choice for dense networks with bandwidth-intensive applications.

The frequency band is not crowded, so there is less interference than in the 2.4

GHz band.

Disadvantages: 802.11a is not as popular as 802.11b. Currently this standard

appeals only to niche markets. There is no backward compatibility with other

IEEE standards. High capital cost to set up.

• IEEE 802.11b

Frequency band: 2.4 Ghz

Transmission range: 300 ft

Transfer rate: 11 Mbps

Advantages: This is the lowest-cost solution for small wireless networks.

Decreasing chipset prices and increased volume of production will lead to

notebooks embedded with chipsets. This is the most mature of the IEEE

standards.

Disadvantages: Complex technology causes implementation issues such as

security. Lack of support for quality of service, and the new 802.11g has been

approved by the IEEE standards committee (12 June 2003) and may shift

worldwide acceptance.

• IEEE 802.11g

Frequency band: 2.4 Ghz

Transmission range: 150 ft

Transfer rate: 36 - 54 Mbps

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 233

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Advantages: This standard allows for more demanding applications like wireless

multimedia video transmission. This has a higher transmission speed than

802.11b. Provides interoperability as 802.11b and 802.11g devices can coexist

in the same network.

Disadvantages: Total available bandwidth remains the same as 802.11b as

restricted to three channels in 2.4 Ghz (this frequency band is getting crowded).

• IEEE 802.11i

This standard is currently under development by the IEEE 802.11 Task Group I.

The driving objective behind this standard is to improve the standard and close

gaps in current 802.11 WLAN IEEE standards. 802.11i provides a new

authentication framework that encompasses several components to address and

enhance the current security controls, including the integration of 802.1x

(security for wired and wireless Extensible Authentication Protocol authentica-

tion).

An interim draft of IEEE 802.11i is now being circulated within the IEEE

community, known as Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).

Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN) Technologies

• Bluetooth

Frequency band: 2.4 Ghz

Transmission range: 10 m

Transfer rate: 1 Mbps

Advantages: The Bluetooth standard allows communication between mobile

devices such as mobile phone and notebooks and peripherals. Users can

communicate with another Bluetooth device without the need to configure the

hardware or drivers.

Disadvantages: Short-range transmissions range. Despite tremendous momen-

tum Bluetooth has not been adopted widely due to ease-of-use and interoperability

issues.

Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Technologies

• GPRS over GSM

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !234 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Frequency band: Uses GSM's 900 MHz, 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz

Transmission range: Global

Transfer rate: Up to 170 kbps

Advantages: This standard allows for remote communication involving data. For

example, PDAs or phones can be used to browse the Internet or e-mail on the

road. Users are always connected and can send and receive data without the

cost and delay of making a call each time. Users are charged by volume of data.

Take-up of GPRS services has been slow in the consumer market but is steadily

growing in the business market.

Disadvantages: Transfer rate usually slower as you share with other users within

the range of the mobile transmitter.

•3G

3G wireless systems largely revolve around two ITU (International Telecommu-

nication Union)-approved standards, CDMA2000 and W-CDMA (Wideband

CDMA), both of which are developments of CDMA (Code Division Multiple

Access). The current dominant markets for 3G are in North America, South

America, and parts of Asia-Pacific (South Korea and Japan) only.

Japanese giant NTT DoCoMo's brand name for 3G W-CDMA services is

FOMA (Freedom of Mobile Multimedia Access). In Europe 3G W-CDMA

networks are known as UMTS (Universal Mobile Telephony System). In

America the favoured technology is CDMA2000.

TD-SCDMA (Time Division Synchronous CDMA) is an upcoming wireless

WAN broadband service that has recently attracted significant interest in China

as an alternative to W-CDMA and CDMA2000. Universities in China, as well

as research organizations, provided major contributions toward the development

of TD-SCDMA. This is a major step in helping to bring China into the league of

countries defining the future wireless industry, giving a boost to the Chinese

wireless industry.

Transmission range: Within 3G network coverage areas.

Transfer rate: Ranges from 144 kbps in rural wide areas to 2.4 Mbps in stationary

urban areas

Advantages: 3G allows for high-speed transmission of data and voice both for

personal and business applications. Furthermore it supports enhanced multime-

dia, e-mailing, fax, videoconferencing, and Web browsing. The standard works

by allowing multiple users to share radio frequencies at the same time without

interfering with each other.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 235

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Disadvantages: There is currently uncertainty surrounding the 3G mobile ser-

vices market as it is considered high risk with dubious returns. For example, in

Hong Kong, Hutchison and CSL have taken opposite strategies in their 3G roll

out, with the latter taking a "wedding cake approach," according to CSL Chief

Executive Hubert Ng (Australian IT, 2003). The competing 3G standard W-

CDMA has not found commercial application and has encountered numerous

issues, such as expensive auctions for the use of new frequency spectrum, as

well as difficult development of handset products. 3G poses significant chal-

lenges for call "hand-over" from 3G to 2G networks with factors such as

different network configurations, vendor equipment, and even operating condi-

tions making the task difficult. The signals are more prone to interference from

hills, buildings, and other tall structures.

Today's market is still in the 2.5G arena, a "light" form of 3G. SMS is a big

success factor for 2G and 2.5G, and the MMS market (offered through 2.5G) is

following suit as evident with the growing number of photos sent from mobiles.

However despite the slow uptake of 3G mobile devices today due to factors such

as lack of a mobile handset or high rollout costs, we believe that the dominant

uptake of 3G will lead to the phasing out of 2.5G in the upcoming years. Service

providers and carriers need to find applications at the right price point that will

attract consumers and therefore generate a return on their investment in 3G. The

evolution of 2.5G to 3G and beyond into 4G is inevitable.

• WiFi with Wireless Broadband Services

Broadband wireless technology players and network infrastructure providers

are seeking to take advantage of the growth and usage of WiFi. According to

Gartner (2003b) they are looking at ways to integrate the WAN solutions with

WiFi either as a complementary solution or as a backhaul of WiFi.

With the number of hotspots increasing globally, users can leverage the strengths

of both technologies. For instance, 3G together with WiFi can ensure a user who

is connected in a building can seamlessly roam onto a 3G network when he or

she leaves the building and walks out to the street. Wide-area broadband

wireless service providers are able to offer flexibility and convenience of access

that WiFi technologies are lacking in.

The latter solution involves the use of broadband services as a backhaul for WiFi

or PAN. The backhaul could be at a fixed location such as at a hotel or in a moving

location such as on a train. According to Gartner the advantage of using this

mobile solution is that a WiFi device is much more universal and less expensive

than a wide-area device.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !236 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Wide Area Network Technologies

• Fixed Broadband

Broadband allows for high-speed data transfer, providing fast-speed Internet

access with high levels of interactivity, facilitating services such as digital video

on demand, simultaneous phone and data, and a range of applications and content

that can reduce the cost of performing or delivering business services.

Broadband technologies provide organisations the link between their corporate

network and the other networks such as the Internet and those of their trading

partners. Broadband technologies enable the employee to access their corporate

network and perform work tasks from their own home.

Consumers also use broadband technologies such as ADSL, cable or broadband

satellite as a mode of accessing the Internet from their homes.

The increasing take up of Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL) technology in Australia

has contributed to the number of broadband connections reaching 500,000 and

more than doubling from June last year.

Recommendations

Mobile technology, like most, will take time to become mainstream; however, as

people have become accustomed to mobile phones, the new wave of wireless

mobility will see a faster adoption of data- and voice-converged devices as users

become more familiar with the technology and its potential uses. To this end the

following recommendations are worth considering:

1. Devices will need to be made simple to use but highly interactive.

2. Fast and efficient logging on to the telecommunications services provider

will be key to fast uptake. Delays in dial-up or access based around high

security will hinder uptake.

3. Eloquent form factors, appealing and lifestyle-based products will be more

successful. For example, Nokia has been the leader in mobile telephony

products.

4. Applications that have purpose, that is, provide a real-time service and

enhance knowledge will fast-track mobility uptake. Consumers will be

more compelled to endure early adoption issues if there is value.

5. Process and time savings will increase mobility uptake. Organisations will

constantly look for opportunities to reduce times to serve customers. On the

way look for reduction of paper, hence improving the bottom line.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 237

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

6. Regular new and innovative products and services will continue to drive

innovative applications. Organisations will constantly challenge the usage

patterns of products. Device manufacturers and service providers will need

to be ahead of the industry demands to ensure customer demand for

mobility does not wane.

In general wireless technology is just about to take off. As more and more

organisations are taking the plunge to "try it out," some will benefit, some will not.

If the above points are considered, many will come out singing the praise of

wireless technology, but more importantly, their bottom line.

Summary

Mobile technology will offer enormous opportunity for players up and down the

value chain, from the device suppliers to carriers to the end user. The Internet

has entered the second phase, the mobile phase bringing with it a mature Internet

platform and one where business models are based on customer value proposi-

tions and sound return on investments.

Amazingly different types of end-user devices are being developed and providing

users with an array of choices. Some time during the maturity of mobile data

devices, a set of particular characteristics will develop, forcing out many wild-

end user device designs. Much potential exists for the end-user device manufac-

turer and application service provider who can develop characteristics and uses

for mobile data devices.

As part of the evolution process, the technologies that fail to succeed and gain

mass-market adoption due to lack of demand or other reasons will vanish from

the market.

In this chapter we have covered many aspects of mobile technology with

businesses. The core issues have been highlighted, from business applications,

issues facing organisations, and benefits. Technology also plays a large role in

the overall uptake, and this has been covered in this chapter with a view to

highlighting the various types of technologies currently being developed by

companies.

Over the next few years there will be winners, and some losers, a consolidation

of manufacturers and service providers, a wide array of end-user devices and

applications will continue to drive the organisation's need to explore new and

innovative ways of serving their customers better. Innovative customer solutions

and innovative organisations will continue to drive the market and set the pace

of mobile and wireless technology adoption.

The only question is, will growing health concerns curb the enthusiasm?

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !238 Vaghjiani & Teoh

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

References

Datamonitor. (2003). The future decoded - global devices to 2006 - A

saturated world?

Deutsche Bank AG. (2003). Wireless LAN, fool's gold? Global Equity

Research, Industry Focus.

eMarketer. (2000). PDA market report, global sales, usage, & trends.

Forrester. (2001). The Forrester Brief: Enterprise handhelds OS: Advan-

tage Microsoft . Retrieved November 13, 2003, from http://

www.forrester.com

Forrester. (2001). Doctors connect with handhelds. Retrieved November 13,

2003 from http://www.forrester.com

Gartner. (2003a). Enterprises must plan for five categories of mobile workers.

Gartner Research, DF-19-0590. Retrieved November 25, 2003, from

http://www.gartner.com

Gartner. (2003b). Wireless WAN broadband service and technology alterna-

tives. Gartner Dataquest, Market Analysis. Retrieved November 25,

2003, from http://www.gartner.com

Korporaal, G. (2003). Telstra's CSL puts 3G on ice. Australian IT. Retrieved

November 2, 2003, from http://australianit.news.com.au/articles/

0,7204,8033926%5e15320%5e%5enbv%5e15306,00.html

Kwikhand. (2003) Logistics and materials management. Retrieved December

10, 2003, from http://www.kwikhand.com/logistics.html

Nielsen, J. (2003). Mobile devices: One generation from useful. Retrieved

November 6, 2003, from http://www.useit.com/alertbox/20030818.html

Research In Motion & Ipsos Reid. (2001) Analyzing the return on investment

of a Blackberry deployment. Retrieved November 10, 2003, from http:/

/www.rim.com

RoperASW & NOP World. (2003). CMP/HP Technology Innovations Study.

Retrieved November 12, 2003, from http://cmp.agora.com/hp/pdf/

research_2.pdf

Sage Research, Inc., prepared for Cisco. (2001). Wireless LAN's improving

productivity and quality of life.

Shipley, C. (2003). Mobility changes everything. Retrieved November 10,

2003, from http://www.nwfusion.com/columnists/2003/0825shipley.

html

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Comprehensive Impact of Mobile Technology on Business 239

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Symbol Technologies. (2003). Results from 2003 report. Retrieved November

10, 2003 from http://www.symbol.com

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !240 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter XII

E-Business in the

Global Automotive

Industry:

Key Value Propositions

Abstract

This chapter reviews the components of e-business from a procurement

perspective in order to explore the key value propositions of e-business

practices in the global automotive industry. It is easy to simply state that a

product or service "adds value" to a firm's operations. It is critical that the

value proposition of e-business be analyzed from a rational perspective by

any organization competing in the "post-irrational exuberance" era of the

digital economy. Using an exploratory case study of the automotive

Lisa Bari Herwick

Purdue University, USA

Thomas Hegel Gunther

Purdue University, USA

An Wang

Purdue University, USA

Mahesh S. Raisinghani

Texas Woman's University, USA

Ramesh Pullamsetti

Purdue University, USA

Vanessa Caisan

Purdue University, USA

Andrzej Koszut

Purdue University, USA

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 241

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

industry, the key questions for identifying a true value proposition of e-

business are identified, including their e-procurement, e-catalog order

processing, e-auction and e-capacity systems. We intend this chapter to be

helpful to practitioners, researchers, and students who either are

contemplating updating their legacy e-business systems and/or trying to

gain insight into the value proposition of these systems. It is undisputed that

e-business will bring at least some level of benefit to a vast majority of

organizations, regardless of size or industry. We intend this chapter to be

valuable for evaluating and implementing a successful e-business strategy,

structure, and solution.

Overview of E-Business

Components of E-Business

E-business is the integration by an organization of business processes and e-tools

to achieve efficiency and competitive advantage. In addition it combines the

horizontal functionality of the organization along with the vertical information

systems. It is not only buying, selling, and providing customer relationship

management online but also integrating all aspects of the business that include

all of the suppliers and customers. It also provides the flexibility to redefine

business process.

E-business speeds up business processes, bringing the costs down and adding

value to the products and services provided. It replaces the traditional tools of

business in order to automate and facilitate pre-sale, sale, and post-sale

processes. The main components of e-business are as follows:

Supply chain management (SCM):

To reduce the cost of goods supplied to the end customer, and thereby adding to

the value chain of the business, companies have introduced online supply chain

management in their organizations. Supply chain management is the intercon-

nection or network of suppliers, distributors, customers, and manufacturers to

reduce cost and supply the goods to the customer as early as possible with exact

customer specifications. It is the effective and efficient way of using the Web

to reduce inventory, manage lead time, reduce costs, and share sales forecasts

between all the intermediaries to reduce costs and bottlenecks and sustain

competitive advantage in an increasingly competitive global economy.

SCM involves a two-way flow of information as illustrated in Figure 1.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !242 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Traditional supply chain management was dedicated to private networks,

whereas e-business supply chain management is a global network. The e-

business model is based on virtual connections and is inter-company rather than

intra-company.

Customer relationship management (CRM):

Marketing experts tell us that, "It costs six times as much to acquire a new

customer than to keep an existing one." CRM is the implementation of

information technology (IT) to integrate all the processes involved in satisfying

existing customers and finding new customers. The IT system enables the

analysis and differentiation of customer information.

Business intelligence:

Business intelligence is a solution provided to compile huge amounts of data

about customers' behaviors and tastes, which can help the organization know

what the customers desire and what their buying patterns are. Business

intelligence gives a clear and intelligent picture of vast quantities of customer

data.

Figure 1. Two-way flow of SCM

E-marketplace Online virtual market for buyers and sellers whose

common interests are served by establishing an open

and public marketplace, for example, e-steel.com.

E-procurement Online procurement of goods that helps reduce costs,

for example, the e-procurement marketplace in the

automotive industry called Covisint, formed by GM,

DaimlerChrysler, and Ford.

E-distribution Online distribution system created and governed by

sellers to smooth out distribution costs and influence

the price of products/services, for example, Petroleum

Mexicanos (PEMEX).

Table 1. Important components of e-commerce

Customer Manufacturer Distributors Supplier

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 243

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

E-commerce:

E-commerce is the online sale of goods and services. It is most successful when

the system is built with the total e-business structure in mind. Companies like

Cisco, Dell, and FedEx are the pioneers of this integration of e-business with e-

commerce.

E-procurement is at the heart of e-business, in particular in the automotive

industry. Therefore we will examine e-procurement in detail in the next section.

Overview of E-Procurement

E-procurement is defined as the business-to-business purchase and sale of

supplies over the Internet. E-procurement can be done in a variety of ways,

ranging from public e-marketplaces that involve many firms in a particular

industry to private exchanges for a big company like Siemens. An important

benefit of an e-procurement system is that it makes it possible to automate some

routine buying and selling. The main reasons for switching to an e-procurement

system includes reducing costs, bypassing of unnecessary supply-chain ele-

ments, and improving productivity (http://searchcio.techtarget.com/sDefinition/

0,,sid19_gci214418,00.html, 2003).

One e-procurement model is the sell-side model, or Web shop. In this model, a

supplier sets up an online shop and catalog, and buyers from different organiza-

tions shop there for supplies. This is one of the simplest methods of e-

procurement and is often the first foray into e-business for many small compa-

nies.

Another e-procurement model is the buy-side model. A good example is

Siemens' e-procurement system, which has a very high volume of suppliers and

supplies needed, as well as diverse divisions with different needs, as do the e-

procurement systems of large automotive manufacturers. Siemens has set up an

e-procurement system called click2procure that provides employees with a view

of offerings from different hand-picked suppliers that are familiar with the

company's requirements and standard procedures. Siemens' employees can

then choose the best price and monitor their orders through the system. Auctions

can also be held with this system, and Siemens claims that savings of up to 40%

have been realized through the approximately 800 auctions it has held since the

installation of the system. A real benefit to Siemens is that all of the transactions

are recorded in their system, and that they have control over the cost of goods

bought. The high level of process standardization, the transparency created, and,

finally, the simplified nature of the procurement process, are important benefits

of click2procure (http://www.click2procure.siemens.de/en/c2p/about/pro-

vider/index.cfm, 2003).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !244 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

E-procurement makes sense for firms that could be losing money during the

critical process of procuring supplies. In the past companies obtained supplies by

using hardcopy catalogs directly from the suppliers or from aggregators that sold

products from a number of smaller suppliers. Orders were sent to the suppliers

by snail mail, fax, or telephone. The downside to this method of procurement is

that it is slow, inefficient, and does not easily lend itself to comparing prices or

creating a transparent and well-documented process. Also, a significant amount

of non-value-added administrative time is spent on these tasks.

As the Internet grew into a viable tool for business in the 1990s, suppliers began

to move their hardcopy catalogs online and created the first sell-side Web shops,

which were essentially nothing more than a searchable version of the hardcopy

with a simple online purchasing option. Such activities first became possible with

the advent of standard online payment and e-commerce security systems

(Withers, 2001).

With staggering advances in technology, some firms have begun to recognize the

potential for a more integrated e-procurement system. These newer e-procure-

ment systems (public and private exchanges) are not only digitalized catalogs but

also include features for storing order information, order tracking, price compari-

sons, online auctions, and automatic ordering. New generation e-procurement

software is made by two different types of companies, "pure play" vendors such

as Ariba, CommerceOne (the choice of Siemens for their click2procure system),

and Clarus Corp., and ERP (Enterprise Resource software) providers that

package an e-procurement system into their complete ERP software system,

such as SAP, PeopleSoft, and i2 Technologies. There are advantages and

disadvantages to both types, mainly because the pure play software vendors

include the most current developments in e-procurement in their software

packages, while the ERP vendors include software that is fully integrated into the

enterprise system. Of course, the pure-play systems can be hooked into the

back-end financial systems, but it is a very complex process.

The value proposition for e-procurement is very high. Automating the procure-

ment process can reduce unauthorized spending, cut administrative costs, and

enable companies to better manage purchasing by analyzing spending patterns.

Research from the Aberdeen Group in Boston has shown that the average cost

for processing a purchase order (PO) manually is $114 per PO. When the

procedure is automated, the cost goes down to an average of $31.50 per

purchase order. E-procurement also cuts down the time factor of procurement,

from over a week to two days (Hildebrand, 2002).

The main value proposition of e-procurement is found in reducing the adminis-

trative transaction costs and increasing the portion of procurement time that is

spent on the strategic side of procurement. Of course, the overall time of the

procurement process will be significantly reduced. Since time is money, this in

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 245

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

itself reduces costs. Other cost reductions will be found in e-auctions, reductions

in administrative errors, reductions in unauthorized purchases (rogue buying),

consistency in ordering, and transparency throughout the whole process.

However, e-procurement presents significant challenges for an organization.

First of all, the integration of an e-procurement system into the back end of an

enterprise system is extremely complicated. Second the expectations of the

users and managing the change in systems can be difficult to coordinate because

there is often more resistance in the organization to a new system than is

expected. Third, getting existing suppliers to take part in the new system is not

always as easy as anticipated, even though it can mean cost savings for them as

well. Finally, managing the content of the system can also be very complicated

(Hildebrand, 2002).

As with any new business initiative, the important question remains: Where does

this system add value to the business? Therefore we will examine the topic of the

value proposition of e-procurement and other e-business initiatives in the next

chapter.

Analysis of the Value Proposition In E-Business

Integrating all the components of e-business can provide organizations with a

single, comprehensive network of the different processes and add significant

value. E-business integration includes business process automation and linking

all of the processes. Integration provides for data transfer, communication flow,

and connectivity between different groups through e-tools. The process of

integration includes understanding the processes in the specific industry and

breaking it up into levels for analysis.

Any investment or new plan proposal must be viewed from the economic side

(looking at the external environment influencing the organization, the organization's

goals and challenges, and ever-changing preferences of customers and its

competitive advantage) to analyze whether it is suited for the organization. The

strength of economic analysis comes from its maturity, rigor, and analytical

techniques, attributes that are highly desirable for the study of e-business

(Walden, 2001).

The automotive industry is one of the most dependent networks of suppliers and

distributors for materials (modules such as seats or cockpits). With just-in-time

implementation by the automotive manufacturers, the precision time for supplies

has become critical. Next is an example of order handling in the automotive

industry. The time consumed by each activity before e-business implementation

and the time consumed after implementing e-business is compared.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !246 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Process Example: Order Handling

The effective implementation of e-business reduces supply time of the deliverables,

reduces the bottlenecks in distribution, reduces costs, and increases profits.

According to the micro-economic law of demand, the reduction in cost increases

demand for the product or service given that all other factors are constant.

Nevertheless, the competitor could also effectively implement e-business in their

strategy. It is therefore the responsibility of the management to utilize e-business

to remain competitive, not only to increase profits. To emphasize the importance

of both strategic management and economic analysis, we compare Covisint, an

e-procurement site for the automotive industry with Volkswagen AG's in-house

e-procurement system in the later section.

Table 2. Order handling process (Admova Consulting, 2002)

Table 3. SWOT of e-business

Process: Order

Handling

Activity Responsibility Traditional E-business

Purchasing

Requisition

Disposition 24 Hrs 15 Mins

Examination of

Suppliers

Disposition 3 Hrs 20 Mins

Purchase Order

Processing

Supplier 24 Hrs 30 Mins

Confirmation of

Order

Supplier 4 Hrs 15 Mins

Conformation of

Order

Purchase 24 Hrs 5 Mins

Return Product Logistics 48 Hrs 60 Mins

Strengths Weaknesses

Improve efficiency and effectiveness High cost of implementation

Lower cost and increase profit Difficult to integrate all components

Assist senior management in decision

making

Cooperation and trust of suppliers

and buyers

Improve the industry and all

dependent organizations

Upgrade of the legacy system and

physical components

Opportunities Threats

Integration of global markets Data transfer and security

Competitive advantage Failure of forerunner companies

Emergence of digital firm

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 247

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

General SWOT Analysis Of E-Business

Table 3 illustrates the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT)

of e-business.

E-Business in the Automotive Industry

Research Methodology

The automotive industry is one the most important industrial sectors in terms of

revenue, global market share, technology innovation, and design. Therefore, we

chose one of the large, global firms in this industry, Volkswagen AG, to provide

our readers with a practical case example of e-business system applications.

We focused primarily on B2B, as it is one of the most representative e-business

components in the organization of car manufacturers. Nevertheless, it would be

interesting to see future research covering all e-business components, projects,

and initiatives in depth.

Overview of E-Business in the Automotive Industry

E-business plays a very important role in the automobile industry in reducing

inefficiencies, enabling collaborative design and production globally, connecting

supply and demand, and optimizing sourcing from various parties. Many func-

tions are now at least partly carried out through Internet technologies, such as

design and R&D through internet-based EDI; purchasing and wholesale through

business-to-business systems (B2B); marketing and commerce through busi-

ness-to-customer systems (B2C); management and accounting through e-

management; internal and external communication through e-mails; and other

Internet-based medias such as Web conferencing and training through e-

learning.

The benefits realized from the Inbound Planning Engine (IPE), the supply-chain

decision-support tool of Ford Motor Company, are described in this quotation

from their director of global logistics:

If you just take a reasonably decent network and simply apply the IPE

program, you can achieve a boost in efficiency from 20% to 30%. In terms

of efficiencies for the inbound materials program, we're not just looking to

save freight costs at Ford - in some cases we're holding freight costs

constant while significantly increasing delivery frequency to move toward

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !248 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

more of a lean logistics network and ultimately to the lean manufacturing

environment. And where we have implemented the IPE plan, we have gone

from an average of 22% of our parts being delivered at least once a day to

97% being delivered once a day. That in itself is a huge benefit to Ford

(Hoffman, 2002).

Among various forms of e-business, B2B systems have been attracting much

attention for their seemingly vast potential to cut costs and create new business

formats. Within a traditional manufacturing industry such as the automotive

system, e-business is a true revolution in industrial organization and managerial

practices. It clearly requires new business models. As an example, we describe

the e-business service for the automotive industry provided by a company called

World Markets Automotive (WMA). WMA is an innovative automotive intelli-

gence service that provides companies with comprehensive reports on more than

50 countries and 150 vehicle and components manufacturers. It is a kind of data

analysis technology. The main services provided by WMA are illustrated in

Figure 2 and include daily analysis, country reports, and competitive intelligence

reports. One of its main services, unique same-day analysis, is complemented by

an industry database that tracks information on vehicle sales and production.

Country reports cover sales, distribution, and production in the individual country.

As for competitive intelligence, it provides an evaluation of potential competitors,

Figure 2. Three main functions of the World Markets Automotive (WMA)

Same-Day Analysis

Country Markets Analysis

Competitor Intelligence Database

Market Awareness

Market Research

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 249

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

suppliers, or customers. Also, there are strong databases with comprehensive

sales and production information (http://www.wmrc.com/wma_a.html, 2003).

To get a better understanding of how an automotive manufacturer implements

e-business systems, we examine Volkswagen AG as a case study in the next

section.

Introduction to the Volkswagen Group

The Volkswagen Group, with headquarters in Wolfsburg, Germany, is one of the

world's leading automobile manufacturers and the largest car producer in

Europe. In 2002 the Volkswagen Group achieved the second-highest profit

before tax in the company's history at • 4.0 billion. The 2002 group sales totaled

• 86.9 billion (2001: • 88.5 billion). With 4,984 million (2001: 5,080 million)

vehicles delivered to customers in 2002, the company attained a global market

share of 12.1%. In Western Europe, the largest car market in the world, nearly

every fifth new car came from the Volkswagen Group.

The group's passenger car business is divided into two brand groups. Under the

leadership of the group, the Audi and Volkswagen brands are responsible for the

results of their respective brand group worldwide. Audi's brand group is made

up of the Audi, Seat and Lamborghini brands.

The Volkswagen Brand Group is made up of the Volkswagen, Škoda Auto,

Bentley, and Bugatti brands (see Figure 3). Each brand retains its differentiated

brand-image and operates as an independent entity on the market. Together the

product ranges extend from the low-consumption three-liter vehicle to luxury-

class vehicles. The group's commercial vehicles are the responsibility of the

Volkswagen Commercial Vehicles brand (Volkswagen Nutzfahrzeuge)

(Volkswagen AG, 2003).

Figure 3. Divisions and brand groups of the Volkswagen Group (Volkswagen

AG , 2003)

DIVISION/

SEGMENT

BUSINESS LINE

PRODUCT LINE/

BUSINESS FIELD

VOLKSWAGEN GROUP

AUTOMOTIVE DIVISION FINANCIAL SERVICES

DIVISION

Volkswagen

brand group

Audi

brand group

Commercial

Vehicles

Remaining

companies

VW

Passenger

Cars

Skoda

Bentley

Bugatti

Audi

SEAT

Lamborghini

Financing

Services

Financial

Services

Europcar

Dealer and

customer

financing

Leasing

Insurance

Fleet business

Rental

business

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !250 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

See Appendix A for more detailed information on the Volkswagen Group.

E-Business at Volkswagen

The Volkswagen Group and most other big automotive companies started to

strengthen and to consolidate their e-business activities at the end of the 1990s.

Some research publications predicted many advantages after the implementation

of e-Business. American carmakers could expect the following savings (Lapidus,

2000):

• Savings of $3,650 per vehicle or total cost reduction of 14%

• Supply chain cost savings of $1,064 per vehicle

• Further savings potential from make-to-order and online direct sales

Other analysts predicted lower potential savings for Europe and Japan compared

with North America. The following advantages were mentioned (Deutsche

Bank, 2000):

• Purchasing and auctions will make up a third of the B2B cost savings

• Cost savings in Japan: $540 per vehicle

• Cost savings in Europe: $640 per vehicle

Figure 4. Budget/investments for 2001 in e-business

Ticketing

The Ritz-

Carlton Hotel

system

Restaurant/

shop POS

system

Automobile

systems:

production &

distribution

system

Deutsche

Bahn transit

reservation

system

Customer

care center:

new-vehicle

pickup

Internet

visitor

registration

POI

terminal

Oracle8i

database

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 251

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The advantages of e-business were clear for the automotive industry, so

Volkswagen decided to consolidate all activities in this area. Volkswagen Group

currently has more than 250 distinct e-business projects running worldwide.

B2C is business to customer, B2B is business to business, E2E is engineering to

engineering and B2E is business to employee

Volkswagen has used e-business largely in its core processes and value

channels. It has moved into the world of e-commerce by building extranets for

B2B and B2C commerce. Like other companies Volkswagen is moving toward

sharing data with customers and suppliers, and taking advantage of the Internet's

ability to disseminate information at lower costs and higher speeds than ever

before. In the long run, Volkswagen Group wants to connect all business

processes, from product development to production, among suppliers, dealers,

and customers over the Web (Schwartz, 2001).

Based on the volume of projects at Volkswagen AG, we will focus our analysis

on its B2B initiatives and then explore some of its B2C initiatives.

Business to Business (B2B)

Volkswagen developed its own marketplace, deciding in favor of an in-house

system instead of joining Covisint. The following were the reasons for this

decision:

• More advantages from optimized processes (at Volkswagen)

• Strengthen competitiveness

• Avoid suboptimal compromises

• Security of proprietary information

The system partners for the development and implementation were i2, Ariba, and

IBM (for software and hardware). The implementation took place in 2000, a year

before Covisint was launched.

E-Procurement

Volkswagen has not only reorganized its processes but also created the right

technical requirements for an easy integration of the supplier industry. To date

500,000 transactions have flowed over the e-marketplace from around 5,500

suppliers. The primary capabilities offered include online purchasing, auctions,

and capacity management. The e-marketplace's catalog holds 360,000 products.

To date, more than 600 online negotiations have been conducted by more than

4,000 suppliers. With Volkswagen Group's capacity management system, called

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !252 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

eCap, suppliers and Volkswagen Group share requirements and capacities

quickly online and can view Volkswagen's annual, monthly, and weekly planning,

all of which result in lower inventories throughout the supply chain (Kaneshige,

2001). Volkswagen Group says process time has decreased by 95% through the

simplification of procurement procedures and the optimization of logistical

processes. Volkswagen says it has passed the break-even point for e-business

investments through process and material cost savings (Kaneshige, 2001). As

mentioned above Volkswagen's e-procurement and sourcing was moved from

a hosted to an in-house model because Volkswagen's board of management

wanted to assure that there was only one access point to the sensitive data for

the company as well as for its partners. Thus managers thought that this could

only be achieved if the software was running on Volkswagen servers (Schwartz,

2001). Next we discuss the three B2B systems at Volkswagen that have been

used since 2000.

Catalog Ordering Process

With the transaction software (Ariba), it is possible to order material (c-items like

laptops, stationary material, indirect production items) on an Internet-based

catalog directly from the supplier. The prices are negotiated beforehand by the

procurement department. The payoff from developing and implementing this

system was quickly realized. The savings were achieved by reducing material

cost (reduced price due to the direct buying scale effect), reducing process costs

(just-in-time delivery and reducing personnel numbers), and reducing "soft

costs" (other transaction costs).

E-Auction/E-Negotiation

By developing a Web marketplace, Volkswagen was able to negotiate over the

prices of parts in a more effective and efficient way. In the past, it took four to

six weeks to choose the right supplier for a special part. The procurement

procedures were also very personnel-intensive. After the introduction of the

Web-based negotiation, the competition between suppliers was more transpar-

ent. The key advantages of the Web marketplace to Volkswagen were:

• Drastic reduction in negotiation time

• Reduction of human capacity (which was used for other procurement

tasks)

• Suppliers from different continents involved in the negotiation process

• More transparency about the market offerings (supply)

• Better results after negotiation

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 253

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The procurement cost (transaction cost) per part is reduced by the use of the

Web-based marketplace.

E-Capacity

In order to do need and capacity planning, Volkswagen developed a communi-

cations platform with internal and external suppliers. The suppliers and the

purchasing department are involved in the common planning process. Using the

Internet, these departments are able to exchange information about the needs or

demands and the capacity of different suppliers. With this information, simula-

tions can be run to define different scenarios, which is important for decisions.

Involving the customer and the supplier, the production can be planned more

effectively. The result is a win-win situation for the three partners involved

(customer, supplier, and original equipment manufacturer (OEM), in this case

Volkswagen).

The key advantages are:

• Suppliers know about Volkswagen's demand (middle-term and long-term

planning)

• Reduction in freight and warehouse costs due to better planning

• Enables supply Chain management

• Early recognition of bottlenecks (material to be delivered)

• Optimization of procurement

Using this system, Volkswagen makes sure that important parts are always

available to manufacturing plants.

Today e-business is a standard tool at Volkswagen. Successfully implemented

projects have been rolled out to the other companies of the Volkswagen Group.

Other E-Business Initiatives at Volkswagen

Volkswagen is involved in many different e-business projects. Some notable

ones are discussed next.

E-Commerce in U.S. and Canada (B2C)

Today customers from Canada and the U.S. can visit www.vw.com to custom-

configure a vehicle and access a variety of information. Making the Web site as

e-commerce optimized as possible is key to the company's overall strategy. This

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !254 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

is the first contact with the customer, and all of the group's advertising is focused

on getting customers to go to its Web site.

By this token, Volkswagen developed an online B2C application to sell limited

editions of cars for the U.S. market via the Internet at www.vw.com. This pilot

was developed to test customer response to online buying that allows customers

to learn about the models, pick a dealer, configure a desired car, check its

availability within Volkswagen's distribution system, get financing, discuss

purchasing terms, and, finally, arrange a delivery date, all online through a dealer

selected by location. Rather than farming out the online buying model to a third

party or some other channel of online sales, Volkswagen supported the entire

enterprise, including the brand, customers, and dealers, recognizing that dealers

are a critical part of the Volkswagen value chain to customers (http://

www.silverline.com, 2003).

The danger of the pilot online B2C system was that it created channel conflict

between Volkswagen AG and its dealers, because the Web site sent the

customers to a dealer selected only by location. Due to its failure in solving the

channel conflict problems, Volkswagen did not develop the pilot program into a

worldwide model. Instead, today, the Web site only offers the possibility to create

various vehicle configurations and get a quote sent to the customer by a dealer.

However, start-to-finish online sales are not offered.

Information is a key point in today's business, and Internet suppliers and other

Volkswagen business partners have varying degrees of access to this informa-

tion. Depending on their level of access, partners and suppliers can access parts

data, accounting and invoicing information, and training materials, all housed on

various Oracle databases, and, still depending on the access level, some can not

only view material, but manipulate it (Schwartz, 2001).

E-Business Strategies With Dealership in Canada (B2B)

Since Volkswagen believes that its dealers are the core of its business, it

expanded its U.S. dealer e-Business program into Canada so that the company

has now the ability to more efficiently offer its vehicles and services to a much

larger audience. The idea of extending its online presence into Canada consisted

of providing 150 Canadian auto dealers with e-business marketing and reporting

tools, and custom French- and English-language branded Web sites (Anderson,

2001).

Online CRM in Germany: Autostadt

One of Volkswagen's corporate objectives was to develop a strategic invest-

ment in building long-term, online customer relationships. One outstanding idea

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 255

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

was to create an ever-changing marketing venue where visitors could experi-

ence state-of-the-art automotive technology. Buyers could collect their new cars

from one of the park's automated glass-and-steel towers. As a result, in 1999,

after defining Volkswagen's business as production of adventures and values, an

information technology (IT) infrastructure that would support this unique and

highly customer-centric automotive theme park was built, named Autostadt, or

"car city," which is located near Wolfsburg, Germany. So far it has attracted

more than 6 million visitors. Some 6,000 per day have visited its car museum and

six brand pavilions, which offer a variety of interactive and computerized exhibits

and Web-based point-of-information (POI) terminals. Most importantly 349,000

of Autostadt's visitors have taken delivery of new cars. This is the theme park's

key success indicator, since its end goal is to impress every person who comes

through Autostadt to the point of buying a new car (King, 2003). This involved

the combination of different systems such as Volkswagen's mainframe-based

factory systems, proprietary Unix-based systems that run the car towers, plus

packaged and proprietary Web-based applications written in Java for reserva-

tions, customer service, and multimedia entertainment systems. All of this

information comes together at Autostadt over a three-tier information architec-

ture called the Integrated Autostadt System (IAS) illustrated in Figure 6. This is

governed by Vignette Corporation's V6 Content Suite software, which functions

as the Web-based window through which information about car deliveries, event

bookings, and daily ticketing, plus reservations for the Autostadt-owned Ritz-

Carlton Hotel, are drawn together. The system presents information to Autostadt

and Volkswagen employees based on their predefined roles. The architecture

also provides Internet and intranet services that let customers and employees

access more general information (King, 2003).

All software and hardware upgrades and other changes must take place after

visiting hours, that is, after 10 p.m., since the park is open seven days a week,

52 weeks a year, and all systems must operate at 99.95% reliability for at least

12 hours per day. On the software side, the Vignette system functions as the

digital heart and soul of the IAS and Autostadt as a whole. Vignette is not a

solution itself, but it is a development environment, or tool kit for making

applications, and an area in which Volkswagen's managers have huge know-

how. Autostadt began using Vignette StoryServer Version 4.2 in June 2000

because it was the best fit for meeting the company's e-business objectives. The

car distribution center uses Vignette applications as a notification tool for

customers; whenever a dealer sells a vehicle, they give the buyer a customer

card, much like an encoded credit card. Buyers then use their customer code

online to find out when their car will be ready and arrange a pick-up date.

The Web sites include www.autostadt.de, where consumers can buy tickets,

reserve a hotel room, or learn more about the theme park and educational and

entertainment events, and www.autosphere.autostadt.de, which features flash

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !256 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

animation, films, and music for visitors with a high-speed Integrated Services

Digital Network or Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line connection. Both sites

are populated with content from the Vignette server and were completed by the

three in-house Vignette developers, who worked on them full time for six months

(King, 2003).

Autostadt's three-tier information architecture (center) is the Web-based

window through which information about new-car deliveries, event bookings,

daily ticketing, and hotel reservations is drawn together.

E-Procurement in Action:

Comparison of Covisint and

VW Supply.com

Covisint

B2B exchanges can dramatically transform the way in which companies do

business with each another. An example of such a B2B exchange is Covisint,

which was formed to meet the needs of the automotive industry. The name

Covisint stands for Cooperation, Vision, and Integration. Covisint was created

by DaimlerChrysler, General Motors, and Ford Motor Company and began

operations in the U.S. on January 1, 2001, and in Europe, Asia-Pacific, and Latin

America in July 2001. Renault SA, Nissan of Japan, and PSA Peugeot Citroen

have also joined the automotive e-marketplace (http://www.upenn.edu/

researchatpenn/article.php?335&bus, 2001).

According to experts, the automotive industry is not integrated enough and the

flow of information is not satisfactory. The lack of information is causing

expensive inefficiencies that pose an enormous cost to the industry. The most

important are the costs of processing and managing quality process, which are

estimated to amount to $6 billion to $8 billion, and the costs of administering

warranty at $2 billion to $3 billion. The asset utilization is less than 50%, and 30

days on average are wasted on waiting for a response from suppliers to each

quote. Experts estimate that $3 billion to $4 billion of excess inventory becomes

obsolete due to inability to inform about design changes, and 15% of all tooling

is obsolete before it is used. Moreover the costs of transportation are three times

higher due to premium freight. Platform development taken into consideration,

about 25 % of time is wasted on duplication of work and waiting for responses

(http://www.covisint.com/about/pressroom, 2003).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 257

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Covisint is a technology services company whose applications and communica-

tion services connect the global automobile industry. It cooperates with manu-

facturers, suppliers, and industry trade groups worldwide to define and imple-

ment effective common processes for the whole industry. It enables them to

reduce costs and make business operations more efficient.

The three major goals of Covisint are:

• Promoting collaborative product development by harnessing the Internet's

communication powers.

• Streamlining procurement in the industry by launching market mechanisms

such as auctions.

• Lowering the cost of cars by up to $3,500.

(http://www.upenn.edu/researchatpenn/article.php?335&bus, 2001)

VWGroup Supply.com

VWGroup Supply.com was created in 2000 by the Volkswagen Group in order

to reap the benefits of e-procurement for the group, which has a worldwide

purchasing power of • 50 million. At this time, Volkswagen was contemplating

joining Covisint. While Covisint seemed to hold a promise of huge cost savings

and streamlining of procurement processes, Volkswagen eventually decided to

create a proprietary e-procurement system. In the beginning, VW was using an

outside procurement system from eBreviate, an online sourcing company that is

part of the ATKearney group. It then decided to move the system behind the

company firewall, and build it out for the significant cost savings and customization

that it was looking for.

Volkswagen's decision to not join Covisint made ripples through the automotive

industry. The main concern VW had with Covisint seems to have been security

issues and worries about the quality of a shared platform. Volkswagen states

that, "Joining a public initiative generally means that numerous participants have

to find the 'lowest common denominator,' and thus their own processes cannot

be displayed in a satisfactory way anymore." Furthermore, it claims that, "...we

want to be sure that sensitive data are only exchanged between [the supplier] and

our company." Another key point was the potential cost savings of a proprietary

exchange. The private exchange allows VW to run as many auctions as it wants

without worrying about the transaction fee. With a private system the cost goes

down with every new auction it runs. The e-procurement system includes online

catalogs, inquiries, negotiations, and capacity management. The final platform

was launched in summer 2000 and was created with five strategic partners,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !258 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

ATKearney (eBreviate), IBM, Ariba, gedas, and SupplyON. To date

VWGroupSupply.com has conducted more than 3,190 online negotiations, with

22,000 suppliers participating (http://www.vwgroupsupply.com/VWPortal/

Navigation, 2003).

Volkswagen's decision to not join Covisint raised some serious questions about

the value proposition of the public B2B exchange. Covisint promised cost savings

by hosting applications for the automotive industry and setting standards.

However, many suppliers are still resisting Covisint because of the risk that it will

treat highly customized products as commodities. Also, working with a public

exchange means less choice and customization for the automotive manufacturer.

Eventually, it would have to accept a standardization that was not 100%

acceptable. Covisint has not gained much support beyond the big three automo-

tive manufacturers, with companies like VW, BMW, and Honda building their

own proprietary systems, which received support from suppliers. In terms of the

value proposition Covisint was not completely able to follow through on this

promise. In contrast, companies claim that their private systems have already

paid for themselves through process and material savings (Karpinski, 2002).

Limitations of Research,

Recommendations, and Conclusion

Although our research was carried out as rigorously as possible with regard to

verifying sources and only including the most pertinent information, the field of

e-business, e-procurement, and e-marketplaces is a rapidly changing one.

Additionally, it is not always possible to have complete transparency into an

organization's e-business strategies and solutions, nor their motivations and

background in their choice of a system or an upgrade. Although we had to rely

on secondary sources for our discussion on all companies mentioned, we believe

that our information on these companies is as accurate as possible.

In this chapter, we have described the main components of e-business, including

SCM, CRM, business intelligence, and e-commerce. We have given specific

examples of successful e-procurement and e-marketplace systems in the

automotive industry and some of the limitations of these systems. Through our

exploration of the value proposition of these systems, we have come up with

some recommendations for the industry manufacturers who are implementing or

updating these systems.

Company executives should be completely aware of the potential benefits and

costs of these systems. They should also be aware that some systems, like the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 259

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

e-catalog at Volkswagen AG, can provide a noticeable financial benefit quickly

and easily, but others are more complex, and therefore their benefit is not so

easily measured. However, both types of systems can give competitive advan-

tage to a firm. Another key point is that the most successful companies tend not

to be early adaptors of new e-business technology tools but rather quick

followers. It is a good strategy to wait and see whether a new technology has

staying power in the industry and provides real value. It is also essential to ensure

that the organization's goals are aligned to the system's capabilities. In fact, this

point extends to all of the elements affected by any new system, in effect the

people, processes, and the planning. In the case of an e-procurement system, the

suppliers must be a part of the strategic planning process. This is absolutely

necessary if the system is to function and to provide any real benefit to the

company involved.

A general tip for the implementation of any type of system is to focus on the core

processes and value channels so that it will not only help to reduce large

inefficiencies but also add value to customers and suppliers. First, identify the

critical processes and later define and focus on the most important components

that will add the most value to the organization. The amount of time and money

that is invested in e-business initiatives should be proportional to the size and

amount invested on average in the industry, or else it is likely that the cost will

exceed the competitive advantage gained.

A specific point that was discussed in this chapter was the decision that

Volkswagen AG made in creating its own proprietary e-procurement system

instead of joining Covisint, a public e-marketplace. We believe that the decision

that a company makes should be based on the following three points: First, does

the company see a need to protect its information assets from competitors? Is

there a significant risk of compromising its competitive advantage if some

information about its purchasing habits could be accessed by outsiders? Second,

the cost consideration must be taken into account. Volkswagen's system was

able to pay for itself quickly, but this may not always be the case. A rigorous study

into the costs of a proprietary system must be undertaken before ruling out the

use of a (possibly) cheaper public e-marketplace. Third, and perhaps most

importantly, the company must ascertain whether its suppliers are willing to take

part in a proprietary system. Volkswagen found that its suppliers were willing to

be a part of VWGroup Supply.com, but this is probably only the case because of

the huge purchasing volume of the group. A company with a smaller purchasing

volume could have trouble convincing its suppliers of the need to switch to a new

system.

In conclusion, we would like to stress the need to examine the structure of the

organization before planning or upgrading a system, or before joining an e-

marketplace or exchange such as Covisint, to be sure that the solution fits the

organization's specific requirements.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !260 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

References

About click2procure. (n.d.). Retrieved September 10, from http://

www.click2procure.siemens.de/en/c2p/about/provider/index.cfm

About World Markets Automotive. (n.d.). Retrieved September 15, 2003, from

http://www.wmrc.com/wma_a.html

Anderson, A. (2001). The Cobalt Group and Volkswagen expand dealer e-

business services into Canada, para. 1 & 4. Retrieved September 15, 2003,

from http://www.cobaltgroup.com

Brock, D. (2003). Is there real value in your value proposition? Retrieved

September 10 from the Partners In Excellence Web site:

http://www.excellenc.com/I s%20There%20Real%20Value%

20In%20Your%20Value%20Proposition%20DOE%20Version.pdf

Covisint media Kit, page 3. (n.d.). Retrieved on September 16, 2003, from http:/

/www.covisint.com/about/pressroom

Definition: e-Procurement. (n.d.). Retrieved September 7, 2003, from SearchCIO

Web site at: http://searchcio.techtarget.com/sDefinition/

0,,sid19_gci214418,00.html

Deutsche Bank, Roland Berger Strategy Consultants. (2000). Automotive e-

Commerce, A (Virtual) Reality Check. Pages 10-13.

Hildebrand, C. (2002). How to save money with e-procurement. Retrieved

September 10, 2003, from SearchCIO Web site: http://

searchcio.techtarget.com/originalContent/0,289142,sid19_

gci843895,00.html?Exclusive=True

Hoffman, K.C. (2002). Distributor cures supply-chain indigestion with

visibility solution. Retrieved September 15, 2003 from http://

www.supplychainbrain.com/archives/8.02.atalanta.htm?adcode=10

Kaneshige, T. (2001). Volkswagen's e-business bug, para. 3. Retrieved

September 15, 2003, from http://www.line56.com

Karpinski, R. (2002). Covisint restructures to address key opportunities.

Retrieved September 16, 2003, from http://www.internetwk.com/story/

showArticle.jhtml?articleID=6406109

King, J. (2003). IT is central to the company's customer-centric automotive

theme park. Computer World Magazine. Retrieved September 15, 2003,

from http://www.ComputerWorld.com

Lapidus, G. (2000). Goldman Sachs Investment Research, eAutomotive. Pages

5, 6 and 11.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 261

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Platform: VW Group Supply.com. (2003). Report. Retrieved September 12,

2003, from http://www.vwgroupsupply.com/VWPortal/Navigation

Schwartz, E. (2001). Volkswagen turns back on hosted e-business solutions,

para. 11. Retrieved September 15, 2003, from http:/archive.infoworld.com/

articles/

Schwartz, K.D., (2001). Case study: Someday you'll buy a Bug on the Web,

para. 1. Retrieved September 15, 2003, from http://www.zdnet.com

Silverline. (2000, December 6) SeraNova designed online buying application

allows Volkswagen of America, Inc. and participating VW dealer to

sell special color edition of New Beetles, para.5 & 6. Retrieved Septem-

ber 15, 2003, from http://www.silverline.com

University of Pennsylvania. (2001) Will Covisint thrive as a B2B exchange?

RetrievedSeptember 16, 2003 from http://www.upenn.edu/

researchatpenn/article.php?335&bus

Volkswagen AG. (2003). Annual Report 2002 electronic version, page 68.

Retrieved September 10, 2003, from http://www.volkswagenir.de/down-

load/Q1_03/vw_gb_2002_en.pdf

Volkswagen AG. (2003). Retrieved September 10, 2003, from http://

www.volkswagenag.de/english/defaultIE.html

Walden, K. (2001). Economics and electronic commerce: Survey and re-

search directions.

Withers, S. (2001). E-procurement models: What are the options? Retrieved

September 9, 2003 from SourceUK Web site: http://www.sourceuk.net/

articles/a01729.html

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !262 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Appendix A: Key Information on the

Volkswagen Group1

Volkswagen Group Key Figures 1998 - 2002

Share of Passenger Car Market worldwide

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !E-Business in the Global Automotive Industry: Key Value Propositions 263

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Production

Workforce

Sales Revenue

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !264 Raisinghani, Herwick, Pullamsetti, Gunther, Caisan, Wang & Koszut

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The financial statements drawn up in accordance with International Accounting

Standards (IAS) are not comparable with figures prepared in accordance with

the German Commercial Code (HGB).

Endnotes

1

Source: http://www.volkswagen-ag.de/english/defaultIE.html

Profits after Tax

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 265

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Chapter XIII

Global Information

Systems in the

Publishing Domain:

An Experience Report

Christopher Payne

John Fairfax Holdings Ltd. Sydney, Australia

Bhuvan Unhelkar

University of Western Sydney, Australia

Abstract

This chapter discusses how globalization in the publishing domain is

achieved through global information and communication systems. Global

information systems (GIS) enable not only integration of applications

within an organization (leading to what is known as EAI), but also enable

extensive connectivity between applications across varied platforms and

software domains both within and outside the organization. This timely

connectivity has created tremendous opportunities for the publishing

industry - increasingly dependent on split-second timings to report news

- to integrate its business processes as well as devise new and innovative

ways of collecting, assimilating, and disbursing information. This chapter

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !266 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

is based on the experience of the lead author in one of Australia's largest

publishing groups, John Fairfax Holdings Ltd.

Introduction

This chapter deals with the application of the concepts of GIS to a news,

advertising and information publishing business. GIS encompasses a gamut of

technologies and business facilities that are based around the concept of

information creation and management and, more importantly, information shar-

ing through excellent communication mechanisms. This, together with the

innovative business process thinking, creates an ideal environment for globaliza-

tion of various types and sizes of businesses. GIS includes understanding,

discussion, and application of business alliances, analysis and segmentation of

the e-customer, application of the concept of Customer Relationship Manage-

ment (CRM), Supply Chain Management (SCM), Digital Nervous System

(DNS), and global project management. Technologies like XML, encompassed

by Web services as well as mobile applications, all come together under the

umbrella of GIS and facilitate the globalization of enterprises (Unhelkar, 2003b).

This report is based on the experience of application of systems and technologies

of GIS to John Fairfax Holdings Ltd., a globally well-known publishing business

established in Sydney, Australia. Fairfax is known for its publications of the

Sydney Morning Herald, the Melbourne Age, and the Australian Financial

Review together with a group of regional newspapers, magazines, and a

comprehensive set of dominant Web sites containing both editorial and classified

advertising content.

Application of the concepts of GIS in Fairfax happened simultaneously with the

significant contribution made by communication technologies in the news, news

advertising, and publishing domain. This is so because of the need in the

publishing domain for split-second timings in reporting, acute need for indepen-

dence from time and location, and the need and ability to correlate events and

reports that may have happened far back in time and perhaps in unrelated places.

Given the availability of technologies as well as constant pressure from competi-

tors, this particular publishing organization decided to apply GIS to reach a wider

audience and clientele not only within the greater regional areas of Australia but

also across the world. This chapter describes in detail the concepts of GIS and

how they are applied by an organization like Fairfax to achieve competitive

advantage in the publishing domain.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 267

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Understanding E-Publishing

What is E-Publishing?

E-publishing results from the application of GIS to a publishing organization. It

is therefore appropriate to start this discussion with an understanding of what can

be considered as e-publishing. Ciolek (1997) defines e-publishing as: "Electronic

publishing activities are aimed at systematic harvesting, processing and delivery

of substantial chunks of information (scholarly/factual materials, news, soft-

ware, entertainment, games, etc.) in electronic format to the public (users,

purchasers)."

The resultant electronic information can be distributed either:

• via a network (LAN, WAN, Internet, intranet) or

• on physical media such as computer diskettes, tapes, CD-ROM disks.

They can be made available either free-of-charge or at some cost to the user.

The above definition makes it obvious that e-publishing is heavily dependent on

information and communication technologies. Thus, e-publishing cannot exist

without the World Wide Web and its associated infrastructure. However e-

publishing has also come into being and proliferated because of the available

connectivity in large number of modern households as well as institutions such

as schools and universities. In this communication age huge amounts of

information are made easily available electronically at the fingertips of most

individuals and organizations that are able to access and consume this informa-

tion. Thus e-publishing is emerging as a robust reality with implications for

businesses as well as society. E-publishing is facilitating a new way of collating,

distributing, and presenting information that is unique to the communication age.

It is a new reality that is set to become a part of the everyday routine of

individuals as well as organizations.

Current State of E-Publishing in Australia and Fairfax

Having mentioned what e-publishing comprises and its tremendous importance

to modern businesses and individuals, we will now consider the state of publishing

within Australia and, in particular, John Fairfax Holdings Ltd. To start with,

electronic publishing (e-publishing) in the major metropolitan newspaper seg-

ment of the publishing market has undergone some fundamental changes in the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !268 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

last two to three years. These changes can be found in three discreet areas of

e-newspapers:

• classified advertising

• display advertising and

• editorial presentation

Classified advertising may be defined as advertisements whose cost is based on

a rate per line or centimeter basis plus added extras such as logotypes, small

images, and some elaborate borders and their appearance online. Additionally

such advertisements are usually entered into a publishing system by (still in-

sourced) call-centre staff. Up until this time last year these advertisements were

assembled for publishing in the conventional print medium and then passed

across to a relevant Web portal such as real estate, motors, or employment. This

was done at no extra charge to the client. By definition these advertisements

have first appeared on classified pages, typically with no editorial content.

John Fairfax Publications Ltd., publishers of The Sydney Morning Herald (SMH)

and the Age, recently enforced a significant but subtle change in the way these

advertisements are sold. An "assumptive upsell" was introduced. This is where

the customers on the phone to the call-centre staff are charged a percentage

extra over the conventional costs in order to allow the advertisement to be

published on the relevant classified web portal owned by Fairfax (MyCareer,

Domain, and Drive). The online division of Fairfax is known as Fairfax Digital.

This division is still somewhat experimental in that they are edging closer and

closer to break even in their costs versus revenue equation. Once they are able

to stand alone, without the support of the more conventional printed product base,

they will be an even more significant revenue centre for Fairfax as a whole. The

standard dialogue with the public does not require the ad taker in the call-centre

to identify this extra charge. However if the customer inquires as to the make-

up of the costs of the ad, the portion of the cost attributed to appearing on the web

is revealed. The client then has the option to decline that portion of the cost and

therefore the publishing of the ad on the Web. Few customers decline this extra

service. Naturally the portion of the cost of the advertisement being published on

the Web is counted as revenue for the Web division of the Fairfax. Is the Web

site portal really self-supporting in this case?

In the area of display advertising (defined as a pre-booked space followed at

some later time with some complex creative art work and published on a news/

editorial page) there are some clever Web sites such as that of the Wentworth

Courier in Sydney's eastern suburbs (www.wentworthcourier.com.au). If an

advertiser purchases a display advertisement in this publication, then, as a result,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 269

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

the readers are offered more options in such e-published ads compared with

readers of print pages. For example, registered site users of these electronic

publications find that some of the advertisements have hot links within them that

are activated when a mouse passes over them. For instance, if there were an e-

mail address within the ad it would become active, or hot, and would prefill an

e-mail header if the viewer of the page clicked on it. Further to such small but

significant innovations, the editorial components of the newspapers now pub-

lished online are expanding their depth and capabilities. For instance, the SMH

once only published online news items after they had been published in the

conventional printed product. Now updates to articles and even late-breaking

news are also published online prior to the printed page containing this informa-

tion. An example of this was the Sydney Olympic Games, where the SMH portal

recorded record hits with information uploaded almost as it was being reported

and recorded from the various Olympic venues. Furthermore interactive prod-

ucts like crosswords - which obviously could not be deployed in their electroni-

cally interactive format in the physical papers - are now available from within

the major newspaper editorial online portals (such as smh.com.au) and are

proving to be quite popular and represent higher-than-expected hit rates.

E-publishers like Fairfax are now providing their customers direct access to

some of the core publishing systems or back-end systems via extranet-like

mechanisms. This allows the advertisers to enter both classified and display

advertisements for publication into the newspaper and online. These activities

provide a win-win experience for both the publisher and the advertiser (more on

this subject later). The publisher has the advertiser do the actual work of entering

the advertisement (thereby reducing staff in the contact centre), and the

customers have the benefit of an instant quote and image preview of what the

ad will look like when printed.

Finally, on the editorial presentation, provisions are being made to allow

numerous editorial activities to be deployed online. These include activities such

as comments and letters to the editor, running editorial surveys and publishing the

results almost instantaneously, and enabling community sporting groups to upload

weekend sports results to the relevant Web sites where they may be published

online. This data and information is eventually passed over to the print publishing

systems, but before that stage this information has achieved a certain valuable

purpose due to e-publishing.

Considering all the above, within Australia and globally, it is quite clear to the

Fairfax strategists that they need to understand and serve their customers in line

with the e-publishing facilities that are becoming available and that are almost

expected by the customer. This requires proper understanding of the require-

ments of the customer today and in future. Furthermore the e-publishing

organization has to anticipate changes and rely on technologies to provide the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !270 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

infrastructure needed to deploy such e-publishing business. This matching of the

technology and provisions of e-publishing with the requirements of the customers

can only be achieved by undertaking a regular and comprehensive customer

analysis.

E-Publishing Customer Analysis

Major metropolitan publishers such as Fairfax and News Ltd are beginning to see

evidence (Hornery, 2000) of trends of the customer, resulting in changes to some

business practices. For example, as more and more school children, taught with

the presence of the Internet, become consumers and become time-poor, they are

naturally accessing the Internet to obtain their newspaper-like fulfillment, just as

they do for banking and many other services.

Despite such trends, though, it is worth mentioning that so far, this move toward

online information has not been at the expense of the printed product (newspa-

pers), although the printed product has had to change considerably to remain

competitive with the corresponding electronically published product. Witness the

ubiquitous color presence throughout the papers and the more targeted

sectionalization such as the classified portals like Drive, MyCareer, Domain,

Good Living, and so forth. In fact Fairfax spent considerable time defining the

names of the three major classified portals: Drive.com.au, domain.com.au, and

mycareer.com.au. Each of these portal names are fairly obvious, reflect the

content of the sites, and are easy to remember. These names also make sense

to a cross-cultural market as recommended by Deitel, Deitel, and Nieto (2001).

These changes to newspapers have facilitated circulation and added value to

what is being offered physically as compared to the electronic versions.

However the classifications and electronic portals are on the rise and, together

with the mobile technologies on offer, are expected to provide a tough challenge

to printed newspapers in terms of availability and readability.

Customer satisfaction is an excellent indicator of the future revenue and profits

for a business (Best, 2000). In the newspaper industry revenue comes mainly

from advertising; in Fairfax's case, more than 80%. Hence high hit rates attract

advertisers on the Web site and in return increase income source for a company

like Fairfax. In order to keep the hit rates up and therefore the attraction for

advertisers, the Web sites have to be reliable, professional, and interesting. This

required Web site quality will help in keeping customers loyal, which is crucial

in stabilizing business profit. "In general, it costs five times more to replace a

customer than it costs to keep a customer" (Best, 2001, p. 17).

Fairfax's Web-based AdOnline product recognizes certain regular business

customers based on their login identity. The site inserts that customer's business

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 271

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

logo or trademark onto the Web page, making them feel that Fairfax knows and

values them. Involvement and sense of belonging always prove the major

attraction for people coming back to a Web site (Stewart & Eugene, 2001).

The changing publishing paradigm, especially with respect to Fairfax, has had an

effect on the three main customer types of the publishing organization. These

three identities are the e-advertiser, the e-reader, and the e-employee. These are

further discussed.

e-Advertiser

Within this new publishing paradigm interaction with the advertiser has changed

significantly. In the case of the advertiser providing material to be published in

the printed product, there are now a number of alternatives available. Some

publishers, like Fairfax, provide Web sites that allow regular advertisers who

require template-based display and or linage advertisements to construct those

ads themselves. This web site is generically called internally "AdCompose." A

typical advertiser in this category would be real estate agents who publish similar

advertisements each week. Once constructed those ads can be downloaded into

the required backend publishing system. This service allows the publisher to

ensure that the quality of the constructed image strictly conforms to the

mechanical specifications of the printed product. For instance, when a new

display ad is created for publication in the SMH, the template will already have

been preset in an acceptable dimension for that publication. If the advertiser

wanted an ad to be 3 columns wide and 10 centimeters deep, then the template

for an ad of this dimension will be available in the template library or the

advertiser can construct such a shape. The system will not be able to construct

a shape that is not an even multiple of a set number of columns to centimeters.

An advertisement 3.5 columns wide by 10.5 centimeters deep would not be

acceptable and would be rejected.

Similarly if the advertisement is to carry an image of, say, a house or a car for

sale, the advertiser will be forced to provide an image that is the correct file

format and is not too large or small in terms of file size. It is very easy to generate

a huge file containing a digital image the quality of which will be lost in the

rendition within the printed product. There is no value in accepting a huge file in

the server or on the network when that file's content can never be fully utilized.

Such a file would be rejected upon upload with an appropriate message.

Services like AdCompose and another known as AdOnline allow the advertiser

to deal directly with the publisher. Previous interaction may have been via

agencies or other third parties that claim a commission on the interaction.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !272 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

"Advertising revenues currently account for approximately 80 percent of a

newspaper's revenues and take 40 to 60 percent of its space. Given the size

restrictions of a computer screen, more imagination must be used in the design

and presentation of ads used in electronic news delivery systems" (Shepherd,

Watters, & Burkowski, 1997). Services like AdCompose allow the customer to

be as creative as possible without necessarily requiring a third party creative

agency. A middleman is removed.

Other organizations (typically advertising agency and art houses) that provide

regular bulk advertisements with the publisher are now able to interact via a

batch interface, or Web service, using the Internet (virtual private network

(VPN)) as the conduit. These sorts of Web services are now becoming more

prevalent within the publishing industry.

e-Readers

The reader of the e-news site has a different opportunity from that of the reader

of conventional, paper-based newsprint. Most news sites allow the reader to

customize a portfolio of regular reading. For instance, a reader (who more and

more is "known" to the Web site by virtue of a record in an eCRM system) may

be able to select a couple of subjective news, business, sports, and lifestyle

articles. This allows them to not have to wade through unwanted and uninterest-

ing articles.

Such selections, however, provide a potential advertiser with an opportunity to

target particular demographics as identified from the eCRM. A packaged portfolioed

reader who has a special interest in sports may be subjected to more sports-related

advertisements online rather than business-centered advertisements.

"In its simplest terms, eCRM provides companies with a means to conduct

interactive, personalized and relevant communications with customers across

both electronic and traditional channels" (Frawley, 2001). It can include call

handling, before-sales, and after-sales activities, transaction support as well as

many other functions (Deitel et al., 2001).

Objectives of customer relationship management are (Steward & Eugene,

2001):

• Retain existing relationships to grow revenue

• Making use of the integrated system to deliver excellent service

• Encourage and enhance repetition of sales

• Value added and instill loyalty

• Faster and proactive solution strategy

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 273

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

E-readers of the classified advertisements have the advantage of customizing

specific searches of the commodity they are searching - jobs, motors, or even

real estate. These searches can be refined to such an extent that alerts can be

issued upon a matching entry appearing in the database. These alerts can be

issued instantly via SMS or paging service and/or via e-mail.

All editorial material published in the Fairfax press and online is available via a

search engine from the various masthead Web sites, such as smh.com.au, or

theage.com.au. Each publication contributes to the same group database. Web

surfers are provided with the headline and a brief introduction for the item. If

interested, they may select a viewing of the required document but will first have

to join Fairfax Digital (Fairfax Online membership). They are then required to

sign up for a credit amount (minimum $11, a GST friendly number) from which

each selected article's cost will be taken. This is a standard online business

alliance with the credit-card agencies and hence the banks.

Fairfax has had to be very conscious of the ability and experience of the online

customer, whether they are advertisers or readers. The level of skills of these

customers range from beginners to experts, and the Web screens must be

designed to cater for this range.

A publishing organization like Fairfax, which prides itself on its neutral stance on

general issues, must also be very careful when it ventures into global information

systems that can be, and often are, accessed by international individuals. For

example, Web pages carrying news content and or advertisements must be

carefully screened for sensitive or offensive information, images, or text to

ensure that is does not offend certain cultures and also individual sensitivities. It

is a financial folly to lose a customer, reader, or advertiser simply because of

ignorance of a cultural or social issue. Thus for organizations like Fairfax

treading the path of e-publishing, it is crucial not to offend or overlook customer

segments within the broader internal and international community. Furthermore

Fairfax needs to consider the following issues with respect to its e-readers:

Fairfax can no longer use the luxury of taking down a Web site for maintenance

in the early hours of the morning, as the number of expatriate readers in places

New York and London are demanding the smh.com.au web site be available to

them in their business hours.

Fairfax must be careful to not publish political material that would suggest a

particular party preference. This could repel readers and advertisers if the

published material was deemed to be supporting one political party over another.

Even more significant these days are the possible religious impact aspect of e-

publishing. Typically Fairfax's low weeks for publishing both printed and online

material is over the Easter and Christmas periods. Should demand from non-

Christian groups require this situation to change, and so long as the commercial

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !274 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

opportunity exists, then the printed and electronic content may be made more

available during these Christian holidays.

e-Employee

Recently Fairfax committed to an upgrade of the six-year-old PeopleSoft ERP

system. One of the reasons for this upgrade was to enhance the ability of its

employees to deal with customers as well as their own internal HR requirements.

One of the requirements of committing to the new version is that it had to be

accessible to the staff via a Web browser rather than the more conventional "fat"

client. The technologies for GIS ensured that this is a much simpler and therefore

less-expensive implementation over the current fat client interface. This is

resulting in "globalization" of its employees as well.

Fairfax now has an internal policy that, where possible and practicable, any new

systems or software should be available to its users via a Web browser. This type

of interface is not only valuable to its users but also has benefits from the aspect

of administration and installation. Typically no physical desktop installation is

required at all as the user simply needs to enter a new URL into the browser. This

address is then saved to the favorites list within that browser. The cost savings

of not having to have a help desk member or a technical person visit a desktop

to install new software or upgrades is substantially significant.

Many organizations are seeing evidence of changing job roles, and the job

definitions are becoming less clear. More and more people are becoming

knowledge workers and are able to fulfil different roles within organizations

thanks to the supporting technology offered by the organization. There seems to

be an expectation that employees in jobs that might not usually have much

association with IT now must be literate in IT matters. They must be able to "talk-

the-IT-talk." To this end it is evident that many graduates from tertiary and

higher education are now emerging from their courses with dual degrees - IT

and accounting, IT and commerce, IT and law, engineering and IT. As global

information systems spread into all areas of business, the expectation of

employees to be familiar with IT concepts and principles has grown. One only

needs to look at the IT content of MBA courses offered by nearly all the leading

tertiary institutions to determine how closely IT and business are now linked.

Employees are often no longer content to stay in the same organization as they

once did. Few people expect to be in a job for life these days. Typically job

tenures are shortening in most industries. This is one reason why it is important

for an organization to have simple and consistent internal systems that do not

require employees to have extended training classes and that the employee could

expect to be able to use intuitively.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 275

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Many employees require the ability to telecommute. This is often due to lifestyle

options, heath, and or family requirements. Global information systems allow

staff to work from home and still have access to a complete suite of applications

and services.

E-Publishing Business Analysis

Prior to any organization launching into a new e-publishing initiative, preparatory

investigative work must be completed. This requires the organization to identify

areas that need to be assessed in order to identify the ability of the organization

to undertake an electronic transformation project. Questions that need to be

asked to determine this status include (but are not limited to):

• Is the current technology suitable or powerful enough for a new e-

publishing project?

• Is the staff skilled enough?

• Is there sufficient budget?

• Is there sufficient time?

Many of these issues can be summarized and assessed via a capability evaluation

process as discussed next.

The capability evaluation is the process where an organization is analyzed to

determine if there are sufficient resources in all the required areas to allow an

initiative or project to proceed and reach a successful conclusion. Areas such as

staff numbers with appropriate skills, technology base, budget, time constraints,

and other business priorities combine to provide the organization with a set of

parameters that would help determine if the organization is capable of success-

fully completing a new project. The existing business is dissected in order to

clearly understand how it works, and then there is an effort to identify what the

future capabilities might be.

Often the organization will need to form an alliance to complete a new initiative.

There are two types of alliances relevant to this situation: vertical and horizontal

alliances.

Vertical Alliances

A vertical alliance is defined as partnering with companies in the same industry

or different stages in the supply chain (Thompson & Strickland, 2001). In the

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !276 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

publishing industry, for example, partnering with other publishers, paper manu-

facturers, multimedia specialists, or Internet service providers would be consid-

ered as vertical alliance. The aim of this is to strengthen the publishing

company's competitive advantage through the alliance.

The idea of one publishing company aligning with another is quite interesting and

perhaps unexpected. But it is not just an idea. There are a couple of examples

already involving both Fairfax and News Limited in Sydney and Melbourne,

where joint ventures or vertical alliances already exist.

Project "Connect" is where all major suburban newsagents, common to both

Fairfax and News Ltd, are able to provide the two publishers with updated

information relevant to subscribers and readers via a Web service. For instance,

the Web site allows the newsagent to log in securely and enters details such as

the number of each product (for example, SMH or Telegraph) required in the

following days or weeks. Similarly they can enter the number of returns1

for each

publication. This information is then automatically and in real time fed into the

back-end business systems of each of the major publishers. As this Web service

currently caters for the majority of all newspaper readers in both Sydney and

Melbourne, the technology and systems are fast becoming a standard for the

industry to which the newspaper association has to conform. This is an example

of where dominant players in an industry can force de facto standards on others

in the industry.

Each day, after publication of the major newspapers of the two dominant

publishers (again, Fairfax and News Ltd.), the published articles are exchanged

and loaded into the private electronic archives of each organization at no cost to

either. This provides the research staff from each organization a rich and up-to-

date source of information on every article published in the major press. This

resource is unavailable to anyone but the staff within the two organizations.

Although it has not happened yet, it is not inconceivable that one might be able

to construct a Web portfolio where one is able to select a preference of different

types of news content from different and competing publishers. Sports might

come from the News Ltd stable, local news from the SMH, business news from

the Financial Review, and international news from London's Guardian.

A vertical alliance with other similarly focused organizations could assist an

organization like Fairfax to achieve even better results from its Web sites. Such

an alliance with a radio and or television station would allow textual content to

be presented in a more attractive and interactive way. An example would be to

illustrate the related articles with audio and video clips (Shepard, 1997). Fairfax

has been lobbying the federal government to repeal the current cross-media

ownership laws. If this were to happen, Fairfax would be very keen to obtain a

majority share in a TV station, free-to-air or even pay TV. This would enable

easier, more cost-effective cross publication of information. Nonetheless it has

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 277

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

technical limitations because the wide bandwidth required for audio and video is

not complete. Another example is the use of hypertext within the articles'

content. The customers can have an alternative approach of the news: "the

hypertext software will allow the consumer to roam at will freely through the

daily electronic newspaper" (Elderkin, 1996).

Horizontal Alliances

A horizontal alliance is partnering with a different business type altogether. Such

alliances could include various businesses. For instance, Fairfax could partner

with a bank(s) to offer electronic commerce service. It could ally with telecom-

munication companies or advertising companies for mobile commerce services.

It could also ally with hotels or tourist agencies to provide travel services. The

advantage to this is that Fairfax would be more diversified and can attract

customers from different target areas and markets.

If Fairfax were to ally with a bank, it may attract more customers from the

regional and outback areas, as banks are pulling out of those isolated locations.

As most banks in Australia are promoting e-banking, Fairfax can negotiate with

a bank to promote each other through Web sites. For example, banks could put

their banner/URL in Fairfax's smh.com.au Web site and vice versa. This can

allow customers a new channel to get access to banking services when they are

on the Fairfax Web site. Besides banks, Fairfax could ally with TV stations to

provide video clips of news for Fairfax's news section in the Web site. Hotels

and tourist agencies can provide travel information or discounts on Fairfax's

travel Website. The aim is to attract overseas readers.

A classic example of an existing horizontal alliance is that of the SMH and the

Australian Stock Exchange (ASX). All company announcements since 1990 are

available for search and access via the smh.com.au Web site and the

Tradingroom.com.au Web site. Each article viewed costs a preset amount. This

revenue is split between the two organizations, Fairfax and the ASX.

These alliances and the publishing business itself function more efficiently if

procedures and events happen digitally. The fewer manually processes required,

the better for all involved. To this end a digital backbone or digital nervous system

must exist.

Digital Nervous Systems

A useful definition of a Digital Nervous System is:

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !278 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

When thinking and collaboration are significantly assisted by computer

technology, you have a digital nervous system. It consists of the advanced

digital processes that knowledge workers use to make better decisions

(Gates, 1999).

Fairfax has a significant digital nervous system with strengths and weaknesses

in some of the 12 major defining areas of a DNS (Gates, B. 1999).

Insistence on e-mail: Even though there are employees who might feel over-

whelmed by the volume of e-mail arriving in their accounts each day, they cannot

and do not deny that the information exchange is swift, efficient, and usually

concise. E-mail has the added benefit of being able to be filed logically in

whatever sequences the recipient desires. Fairfax has very little internal or

external communication that is not completed or augmented by e-mail. Added to

that, at least two of the newspaper production systems have proprietary instant

messaging systems.

Trend spotting: All successful organizations are able to monitor their own

performance in various areas. This requires various measuring tools and

statistics being maintained and regularly analyzed. This process often allows

trends, both positive and negative, to be spotted and addressed accordingly.

Fairfax utilizes a data warehouse for this purpose and recognizes that it has only

scratched the surface of the potential of this database. It will be expanded in the

near future.

Use PCs for business analysis: All employees should have access to a PC/

workstation that allows access to intranets where various corporate communi-

cations can be lodged in a consistent location. All Fairfax staff have access to

a PC. Some staff in the more mechanical, industrial areas have access to PC-

marts. These PC-marts allow staff who don't need a PC for their day-to-day

duties to still use the company services electronically and be accessible

electronically.

Use digital tools to create cross-departmental virtual teams: This can be as

simple as using video-conferencing to allow staff in remote locations to commu-

nicate face to face with colleagues. Additionally there are many digital workspace

tools that allow remote or dispersed staff to communicate and collaborate on

tasks and projects. Fairfax has digital video conference equipment connections

between all the major sites. This equipment is used regularly and with confi-

dence.

Convert every paper process to a digital process: Paper moves slowly. Digital

alternatives can be swift and are less likely to be lost. They are usually more

accurate, as data can be validated as it is being entered onto electronic forms.

Fairfax is in the process of upgrading its main business system, PeopleSoft, to

implement much more sophisticated and comprehensive workflow tools.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 279

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Use digital tools to eliminate single-task jobs: This is good for the employee who

would otherwise be completing these tasks as it is removing often mundane and

repetitious work, and it is good for the organization in that it frees the employee

to do other tasks. Fairfax uses a product called BinuScan that allows a digital

image to be automatically enhanced according to set parameters for the best

rendition in the printed product. This process, once a somewhat mundane and

boring task, is now automated and provides excellent results.

Create a digital feedback loop: This allows employees to constructively criticize

any part of the business that they might see as inefficient, dangerous, costly, or

poorly conceived. Often such feedback loops are associated with rewards that

help with staff morale. Fairfax satisfies this requirement by having a regular set

of internal surveys, delivered electronically. There is an annual IT survey that

solicits opinions on systems and provides extensive options for feedback. Prizes

are awarded at random for participation and at least one prize is awarded for the

most constructive or useful comment. A more general corporate survey is

regularly distributed for staff comments. This, too, is delivered electronically.

Use digital systems to route user complaints: This allows the customer to have

direct access to the expert within the organization. The customer and the

organization build a closer, stronger relationship if such complaints and the

routing and handling of them is done the correct way. Fairfax, for example,

provides a service called "Readerlink" that invites any sort of comment,

criticism, or praise from the customers to be channeled to the correct internal

staff. Readerlink is available via a Fairfax Web site or via e-mail.

Use digital communications to redefine the nature of the business: This sugges-

tion indicates the business should become somewhat of a chameleon in order to

present to the customer a best fit. If the customer wants intimacy or an individual

to speak with directly, then this should be allowed and catered to, especially if

there is a trouble-shooting or problem-solving process to be completed. Alterna-

tively the organization must be able to look as if it has power and strength behind

it in order to provide the customer with confidence in the organization.

Fairfax's internally developed classified advertising tool - AdOnline - fits this

category. This tool allows contracted advertisers to enter their own advertise-

ments into the backend publishing systems via a Web interface. The advertiser

can complete this task whenever it suites it (obviously subject to press deadlines).

It does not need to discuss the details with any internal Fairfax contact centre

staff. It will receive a real-time quote for the ad, and it will receive an image

preview of what the ad will look like when it goes to press.

Trade information for time: Where possible an organization should deal with

suppliers electronically. This saves time and costs. An example of this at Fairfax

is the way staff air travel and accommodation is booked. Fairfax has a

relationship with an online travel organization called TQ3. TQ3 allows authorized

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !280 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Fairfax staff to book flights and accommodations into its database through the

use of a web service. Fairfax is given discounts for the amount of business it

generates, and it can do this business when it suits it.

Use digital delivery of sales and services to eliminate the middle man: Kerry

Packer, Australia's richest man, uttered the phrase that "Internet will kill the

middleman" (Crowe, 1999, p. 15). Eliminating the middle man is another way of

bringing the customer closer to the business and reducing costs for the customer

or redirecting the revenue from the middle man to the organization or removing

the middle man's costs altogether, thereby reducing the cost to the customer.

Fairfax's publications are all available online via each of the masthead Web sites.

Many customers choose to view their daily news via these Web sites rather than

using the conventional newsprint delivery method. This removes the middle man

issue of printing and delivery, both of which constitute a substantial cost effort.

Use digital tools to allow customers to solve problems for themselves: Some

customers would prefer to help themselves if they encounter problems or need

to make inquiries of the business. Facilitating this service is often as simple as

providing online answers to a set of frequently asked questions. More substantial

solutions to these sorts of issues provide online knowledge-based systems that

allow people to search for information or likely solutions. Fairfax provides

substantial details on Web sites that prescribe how advertisements should be

provided to both print and online publications. The specifications, deadlines,

delivery methods, general rules, and details are often used by advertisers wishing

to ensure their ad image specifications are correct prior to uploading.

Requirements Modeling

The process of requirements modeling would normally take place in the early

stages of an e-business initiative. It attempts to identify every e-business-related

issue that can be imagined within the project. The requirements modeling

activities will be grouped into three areas: system requirements, integration

requirements, and modeling requirements.

System requirements

This will be further broken into three logical tiers:

Front end - the Web level.

Middle tier - internal systems and business rules.

Backend - supporting database infrastructure.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 281

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Integration Requirements

The organization must question what integration with other systems might be

required if new initiatives are to proceed. How will legacy systems be able to

integrate with the new front end? What limitations will exist with such inter-

faces? Can XML be generated from these systems?

Modeling Requirements

Requirements modeling require significant attention when applied to e-busi-

nesses ventures. Very often new Web sites are required to interface with back-

office systems, many of which are legacy systems that are too expensive (and

perhaps too good) to replace just to be able to have elegant interfaces. Software

bridges and special interfaces are often required to move data into and out of

these systems.

Often an e-business will grow from a brochure-ware Web site that was more

popular than expected. A more substantial e-business is built around that

informative Web site that may not have been as well-designed or planned as if

the who e-business initiative commenced without the initial Web site in place.

Sometimes it may be better to not interface with these core business systems

directly due to security, performance, or other reasons. Alternatives to this

situation could see an organization take daily extracts from the legacy systems

and pass them across to the new e-business site, where it can be accessed

directly by the Web software. This effectively is a rework of the business

process but may be suitable and appropriate depending on how valuable and

sensitive the legacy system data might be.

The new e-business Web site must be easily navigable by the users. The

organization does not want the customer calling the help desk asking questions

on how to use the Web site. This would be expensive and would defeat the

purpose of a self-serving e-business.

Project requirements are now often determined by the using the Unified

Modeling Language (UML). UML is being utilized in the Fairfax Digital online

department of Fairfax. It allows the project design staff to walk through the

entire business process in relation to the project and detail how information and

events will collaborate.

Legal, security, and taxation issues must be considered when the e-business

service is being planned. This task must not be underestimated when the

organization considers how many potential international customers might use the

Web site, all of whom may come from countries where the legal or tax systems

are different. How much variety and international focus should the e-business

have designed into it with the expectation of a large variety of users?

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !282 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The organization building the e-business must allow the customer to trace

transactions as far as possible in the process. This becomes especially important

if the customer is required to use credit card details to purchase a good or service.

The customer will demand transparency in the credit card dealings. This

transparency must be at a very low level. What is the situation if the customer

enters all their credit card details into a Web page and submits the details for

purchase? At the instance immediately after the "SUBMIT" or "OK" button is

clicked, the connection to the Internet or Web site is broken. In what state is that

transaction? The customer will require atomicity of transactions. What is the

barest minimum of significant data that needs to be sent over the Internet in order

to complete the transaction?

There is no value in planning a sophisticated Web site if a majority of users have

old or out-of-date browsers or PCs from which they run. The organization

building the Web site must be conscious of the lowest common browser level that

might be used by clients visiting that Web site.

Successful e-business initiatives will require the organization to consider a

combination of business process re-engineering, e-commerce transaction aware-

ness, and capability and appropriate supporting technology underlying it.

E-Publishing Technical Analysis

Technical System Characteristics

The technology and software behind a modern, progressive, and competitive e-

publishing organization like Fairfax must exhibit certain characteristics in order

to remain successful. Resulting from successful application of the concept of

GIS, Fairfax business and systems already exhibit some of the desired technical

features of a global business as discussed below:

• Scalability: The system architecture to sustain long-term growth, in terms

of:

• the expansion of services offered,

• growth in the number of users, and

• natural and planned increase of information source (data).

A recent Fairfax internal example of this scalable architecture is that of the new

implementation of the PeopleSoft financial modules that are now all thin-client

or browser-based. This implementation represents a major shift from the single-

server IBM mainframe environment to a WINTEL-based server farm of more

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 283

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

than 40 HP blade servers. This farm can be added to at anytime if and when an

extra resource is required without disruption to the operation of the system.

Similar architecture is used on many of the online portals.

Adaptability: The technology must enable the organization to upgrade and

integrate its enterprise resources and customer relationship management sys-

tems. And if organizations like Fairfax seek to form partnerships with other

companies, the system integration involved across multiple boundaries and the

technology used should not impose a technical bottleneck.

The adaptability of the IT services within the organisation is what will allow it to

survive sudden changes in the market and with the competition. Some of the

mechanisms that Fairfax uses to allow its core business systems to be adaptable

and agile are tools like application programming interfaces (APIs) and web

services. APIs provide a consistent set of software interfaces allowing software

modules to communicate with the business system as if it were being done via

the primary interface. The API can limit the scope and range of software

requests that may be made, thereby ensuring the system is never overloaded or

heavy system resource requests cannot be made. Some of the core business

system packages have their own APIs from the vendor. Two such examples are

the APIs from ATEX, vendors of the primary editorial system. The other heavily

used API comes as an integral part of the system from net-linx, vendors of the

system used for classified advertising at the Sydney Morning Herald and the

Newcastle Herald.

Other internal systems have had tailor-made APIs constructed for them by

internal IT development staff. Naturally other tools such as the common data

definition language of XML allow a more consistent understanding of data and,

as a result, faster-to-market IT initiatives.

Availability: The systems must be capable of providing a 24 x 7 x 3600

service

to customers, which is essential to serve users on the global platform. The

organisation has to be aware that its new e-customers will be online on a 24 x

7 x 360° basis, which means that there will be customers connected at any time,

anywhere in the world to read news and use various e-services. Their expecta-

tions or interests in Fairfax's content and services might vary depending on their

profile. Fairfax has to be aware of who its e-customers are and what kind of

specific new e-services to offer them.

Currently, and for many years past, the standard mechanism for online authori-

zation of credit card payments has been based on a system developed internally

at Fairfax. All departments that allow customers to purchase goods from Fairfax

(advertising, circulation, subscriptions, and online), share the same credit card

processing system. It currently exists and was built on the IBM mainframe. By

its inherent nature this environment is regularly taken down for maintenance and

reorganizations. This regular maintenance is for two to three minutes every day,

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !284 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

20 to 30 minutes every weekend and two to three hours once a month. Until the

online division began processing credit card transactions at all hours of the day,

this IBM mainframe-based availability was perfectly acceptable with the

business. Most conventional business transactions took place during business

hours.

The software development department of Fairfax is now required to provide an

alternate solution to the credit card processing system on an environment other

than that of the mainframe that will NOT require regular downtime for

maintenance. The solution is not yet determined.

Compatibility: Technologies used must be "highly" compatible with the competi-

tors' and the potential partners', as well as being in line with the development of

newer technologies. For example, XML and MQ-Message are some of the

increasingly popular information-sharing mechanisms in the information indus-

try. Attention must be paid to the newly published NewsML specification from

International Press Telecommunications Council. The MQ-Series messaging

mechanism is being used to guarantee message exchange between some of the

conventional publishing and Fairfax Digital systems. The MQ-Series message

exchange protocol is exchanging XML-based packets of data. Where ever

possible and practical Fairfax will employ XML as the standard data definition

both internally and externally when dealing with partner and client organizations

and their systems. Fortunately it seems that much of the publishing industry is

quickly adopting XML as the data definition language of choice.

Reliability: Systems must be reliable and available at all times.

The nature of the conventional publishing business requires the major production

systems to be available 24 x 7x 3600

. There are few periods through the year

when the printed products do not publish. In fact it is only Christmas Day and any

Sunday that the Sydney Morning Herald does not publish. To ensure the

production systems that are used to build these products are constantly available,

major disciplines are required to ensure that they are kept in perfect working

order.

Change control is paramount. Software or system changes must not be promoted

to production until it has been thoroughly tested and signed off on by the relevant

areas of the business.

Business continuity and disaster recovery procedures and systems are now in

place and are tested regularly.

All systems require some level of maintenance, but the production systems'

maintenance and testing are carefully planned during less-disruptive periods like

Easter and Christmas.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 285

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Methodologies and Processes

Added to these system characteristics, any projects or new IT initiatives within

the enterprise that require technology applications must adhere to certain

methodological and procedural requirements. Some time ago Fairfax adopted the

IT Information Library (ITIL) standard that was formulated by the British

government in the 1980s. Methodologies like ITIL allow an organisation to have

a consistent approach to projects and operations and will achieve a level of

confidence in approaching new projects knowing that methodologies employed

have produced successful results in the past. Such project requirements fall into

the following categories:

• Scope definition

• Requirements engineering

• Scalable architecture

• Client/user experience

• Project and resource management

• Change management and project control

• Security

• Quality assurance

• Change control

• Risk management

• Documentation, training, and support

Relevant XML

As well as general approaches to projects such as a base methodology, there are

new software products that are becoming de facto standards as well as

ubiquitous in the online domain. Tools such as XML, MQ-Series, and UML are

becoming commonplace in most online organizations (Unhelkar, 2003a).

MQ-Series and XML together with an SQL database are all used in the unique

project created by Fairfax called AdOnline. This allows SMH and Age classified

account customers to enter advertisements directly into the backend publishing

systems, where their cost is calculated by the actual publishing system's costing

engines. This is a true win-win example of an extranet. The advertiser not only

enters the advertisement at a time that suites it (prior to publication deadline of

course) but it also gets a guaranteed, real-time summary and break-down of the

ad cost as well as an image preview of how the ad will look in the printed product.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !286 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

The benefit of this project to the publisher is that there are significant cost savings

through fewer staff in the call centre. More than 40% of all classified advertising

in both the SMH and the Age is entered into the publishing systems via this unique

Web initiative, and the uptake is still growing.

AdOnline is also providing another, unexpected benefit for Fairfax. In the event

of a disaster that caused a lockout of staff from the major contact centre, the

staff would be able to log on to the backend system from home via the AdOnline

interface. This distributed access potentially overcomes the issue of a central

contact centre being a business continuity risk.

Roadmap Process of Transition to New Business

Scenario

Having described a global e-publishing organization's business and technologies,

it is now important to consider the process of transitioning to this global

organization. If an organisation is to successfully transit from a conventional

business to an e-business, it will require a roadmap or plan for this process.

According to Kalakota and Robinson, in e-business (Addison-Wesley, 1999),

there are four major areas in this transition that must be understood and

implemented. They are:

Capability Evaluation

Most business initiatives at Fairfax requiring IT involvement and support usually

have some interaction with the online Web sites. While Fairfax was (and to an

extent still is) experimenting with the best way to arrange the online business as

a separate business entity from the conventional print business, the conventional

business section's IT department realized that a group of IT people needed to be

hired to ensure there was always a smooth passage from the online initiative and

the standard conventional business. This new group of IT people is the e-

commerce development team and reports to the group software development

manager. This saw Fairfax armed with a small group of IT people skilled in the

areas of Web development and interface creation.

As well ensuring there is adequate and appropriate IT staff capable of transitioning

into the e-publishing area, there is also a definite change in the technology that

is being employed for such initiatives. Fairfax is standardizing MS-SQL data-

bases for all Web servers and Web-accessed databases. Typically these

databases are on a WINTEL platform. This is a deviation from earlier UNIX/

Oracle-based platforms or even IBM mainframe, DB2-based systems. Blade

servers have become the standard server within the online environment. It

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 287

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

remains to be seen how well LINUX is adopted, but its price and reliability will

see it continuing to apply constant pressure on the Microsoft platform within

Fairfax.

Knowledge Building

Having "dissected" the business in the previous activity of capability evaluation,

one would follow that with the major activity of "knowledge building." This would

include the analysis and modeling of the potential e-customer, relationships with

customer, technology trends affecting the business, supply, and purchasing chain

trends affecting the business. Through this process it may be possible for the

organisation to identify potential opportunities. An example of this activity within

Fairfax was the investigation carried out to determine what percentage of the

commercial account-based real estate agents who regularly purchase advertise-

ments in the SMH are actually online in their organisation. If the proportion of

these customers was high enough, then it would be worthwhile for Fairfax to train

them in the use of the Web-based AdOnline advertising tool.

E-Business Design

The organisation must design the e-business in such a way as to take best

advantage of the digital capabilities at the organisation's disposal. What extra

services can the organisation offer to the customer, or potential customer, that

they currently do not have access to? Is the new service a possible "category

killer" like Fairfax's AdOnline? Are all the possible transaction types that any

customer might require available from this e-business offering? Is all the

information that any customer might require in order to do business with the

organisation available on the new Web service? Are there automatic links to the

supply chain should the amount of business require fast and automatic ordering

of goods?

The organisation must be able to focus the Web site to the customers in order to

make them feel at home. Fairfax's AdOnline service presents the identified

customers with their own logo or branding once they are on the Web site.

The Web site must have as much self-help for the customers as is necessary. The

capability of the customer may be anywhere on the scale from novice to expert.

The organisation commencing the e-business initiative also must keep best

practice ideas in mind when designing the Web service. The service should:

• Entice customers to register (for example, my.yahoo.com, f2.com.au) -

provide access to free services, customized layout, and so forth.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !288 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

• Recognize returning customers and customer retention.

• Organize site by customer needs (for example, smh.com.au, ninemsn.com.au,

ecluboz.com.au).

• Provide a customer service knowledge base (for example, cisco.com,

hp.com).

• Provide individualization (for example, Yahoo, Excite, fidelity,

homepath.com.au).

• Allow customers to customize the look and feel of the site to suit their own

tastes and needs (for example, Excite, Yahoo.com.au).

Conversion (Go-live)

The actual point of conversion, or "go-live," of the new e-business must be

planned to ensure all aspects of the enterprise work as expected. This will ensure

the organisation is not left in an embarrassing situation where much money and

fanfare has been spent on promotion and marketing of the new system and

service only to find the Web site and services are not ready, or worse, are faulty.

A good example of this situation was the launch of the David Jones web site in

the late '90s. It was plagued by technical problems and underestimations of

traffic. The site was decommissioned and later rebuilt.

Legal and Security Issues

The most common and disruptive security problem experienced by globalized

organizations, such as Fairfax and indeed many other high-profile organizations

currently, is that of the computer virus. Network interruptions, denial of service,

and destruction of files and other data have all been experienced at some stage

within the last 12 months. This is despite what might be considered a tough policy

on connection of foreign equipment and stringent, up-to-date firewall policies.

The edition of the Australian Financial Review on Friday, November 21, 2003,

was almost abandoned as a result of a denial-of-service (Dos) attack from a

virus on an SQL server. It was the result of a procedure/policy not being followed

within the organization, in that an appropriate patch was not applied to a

WINTEL server running SQL when it should have been. Fortunately this edition

was saved at the last minute, thereby avoiding a costly and embarrassing blunder.

There was a benefit from this incident, however. Fairfax immediately launched

a review of the internal system security policies and procedures. Some were

found to be lax or no longer appropriate and were quickly updated. Questions

arose, like "should corporate floppy drives and CD drives be disabled" in order

to prevent viruses coming into the corporate network? Fairfax had recent

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 289

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

examples of incidents such as a piece if legitimate software being delivered on

a CD containing a virus. Most .EXE files are already prevented from entering

the corporate environment but not .EXEs downloaded from the Web. Where

should the line be drawn?

For a significant publisher like Fairfax there is nothing new to legal issues with

published content. Libel is not a stranger to Fairfax. The advent of the online era

has provided new ground for legal issues that embroil the company. In May 2003

Fairfax first learned of a company that was trying to patent a Web service in this

country. This patent was initially considered insignificant until the patent owners

were successfully granted the patent in New Zealand. The Web service being

patented was that of construction of display advertisements via templates held

within a Web page. Ads created from these templates are then pushed to a

publishing company for appearance in either a printed or online publication.

Fairfax had been developing web service products that effectively did those

tasks (AdCompose and AdOnline, described earlier). However the patent

application predates the Fairfax tools. If successful, the patent owners could

potentially sue Fairfax for all the profits Fairfax may have made with the use of

its own product since the date of the patent reference.

"Copyright is a property right which arises automatically on the creation

of various categories of work, and protects the rights and interests of the

creator of literary, dramatic, musical, and artistic works, sound recordings,

films, broadcasts, and cable programs and the typographical arrangements

of published editions." (Pedley, 2000)

A few years ago Fairfax had to negotiate various enterprise bargaining agree-

ments (EBAs) with the journalists who are members of the Media, Entertainment

and Arts Alliance (MEAA) union. As more and more articles published in the

conventional publications found their way onto the Fairfax news portals

(www.smh.com.au, www.afr.com.au, and www.theage.com.au), the authors

demanded further remuneration for the wider publishing of such articles. Fairfax

was still able to gain copyright of these articles published on the Web sites after

the EBAs were finalized.

Change Management

One of the significant factors influencing the success of all e-transformations,

and particularly in the publishing domain, is change management. Change

management, in terms of customers and employees, as well as business

structures, software, and systems, requires a detailed process.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !290 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Uncontrolled system changes are dangerous to the business; it can cause

revenue loss, customer loss, and an embarrassing loss of face. Certain rules and

protocols need to be adhered to to ensure that the online service is not disrupted

unexpectedly. The following procedures are part of the Fairfax system/software

change management requirements.

Systems are not to be changed in any way during the known busiest periods. For

instance, the systems supporting the printed products must not be updated on

Thursday or Friday. The online systems are not to have structural or system

changes between 8:30 a.m. and 10:00 a.m. E.S.T., when most people commence

browsing the Internet. Naturally this is a little irrelevant, as the Internet doesn't really

recognize time, but the majority of the hits to the Web sites are from local users.

Formal notification must be made to the relevant user communities at least one

day prior to the change taking place.

Clear and simple back-out procedures must be available and ready to be

implemented should it be necessary.

A simple and swift test plan must be available and executed on the production

system immediately after the change has been made. This gives the business a

chance of backing out should a bug be found prior to any real users accessing the

system.

No production updates are to be completed without the signoff of the relevant

business representative

The business auditors insist on a trail of change request documents, particularly

the initial request for the change.

Evidence of satisfactory pre-promotion testing must be available.

Scope creep must be closely monitored. Changes can be made to project scope

providing all interested parties are aware of the change and understand what the

implications of that change are.

There must be a process and method for the business to formally accept the

change that has been made, both prior to the change being implemented into the

production environment and then again after it is in the production environment.

An e-publishing organisation like Fairfax employs a method of regularly review-

ing various new online services to ensure they are working as planned and that

there are no unexpected issues emerging from the initiative. Progress of projects

is closely monitored and reported openly.

Many projects within Fairfax, particularly online projects, are audited for quality

assurance by external organizations that are able to take a non-aligned, objective

view of the project. This may be considered expensive but has proven cost

effective in the long term.

The organisation must also have agreement on what formally constitutes the end

of a project. This becomes particularly important for specific payment for

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 291

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

external third parties. A clear and concise definition of the project end must be

agreed upon prior to the commencement of the project.

When is the Change Control Process not used?

• The change control process will not be used to report or identify the impact of:

• Assumptions not remaining valid.

• Risks that actually occurred.

• Delays caused by schedule slippage.

• Variances of actual work effort from estimated effort.

Risk Management

A number of risks are identified in all projects relevant to e-publishing at Fairfax.

They must be monitored and managed prudently to reduce, if not eliminate, the

likelihood of their occurrence. There are many sorts of risks that an e-publishing

organisation like Fairfax could be susceptible to. Everything from malicious

hacking, denial of service, disgruntled staff, unreliable power, terrorist attacks,

competition undercutting, and changes to government or taxation policy can

never be totally ignored.

There are various sorts of risks associated with projects and the on-going

business. Some suggestions conclude that it is a simple matter to have adequate

insurance to cover an unexpected event. Such insurance could be expensive

depending on how long the policy covers the outage. Insurance companies will

demand that adequate disaster recovery or, as it is now being referred to,

business continuity, is implemented.

An organisation like Fairfax takes great pride in never having missed an edition

of the Sydney Morning Herald since it was first published on April 18, 1831. For

Fairfax, it is not enough to rely on insurance coverage if a disaster strikes. The

corporate expectation is always to produce and publish a fresh edition each day.

Many organizations are outsourcing some part of the business. While this might

be financially beneficial in the short term, there may be long-term issues that take

the gloss from the exercise. Organizations need to be careful to not find

themselves exposed should an offshore service no longer be available due to

changes in policy. Some consumer resentment is also obvious when having to

deal with offshore call centres.

It is always useful to engage a third-party, independent group to assess the level

of risk an organisation or project might have. This could be an expensive

operation, but in many instances it is necessary for auditing purposes.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !292 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Enhancement of Back Office

The enhancement of the back office represents a number of services that could

be developed to supplement the system and may largely improve the quality of

operational control. Moreover it can form a good basis for additional service

offerings. These may include:

• Building a content management service to simplify the coordination and

development of contents in publishing.

• Developing a knowledge management service to boost the knowledge and

"business and technology know-how" of staff, thus supplementing Fairfax's

capability in becoming a global information provider on a wider scale.

• Re-engineering back-office systems and processes so as to improve

efficiency and reduce cost.

M-Commerce

With the increasing usage of mobile phones, Fairfax could attract a wider

customer base by promoting m-commerce. M-commerce initiatives can contrib-

ute to customer loyalty and goodwill. Once Fairfax has information on custom-

ers' demographics and personal tastes, this information can be used to better

service the customer and therefore potentially extract more money from them.

Certain news headlines or advertisements can be sent to a customer's mobile

phones or personal digital assistant (PDA). In order to do so, content of the

article or advertisement has to be in an XML- or WML-based format. This

format can enable the transfer of data to mobile phones and PDAs.

A new development was revealed at the October 2003 IFRA conference in

Leipzig. This new development, called "e-ink," might be the perfect blend of

conventional (printed) newspapers and the more contemporary online method of

publishing. A plastic sheet, sized somewhere between A3 and A4, would be

connected to the Internet and thence a publisher's Web sites, via your mobile

phone. The consumer would connect to his or her favorite news provider(s) and

request a download of the current desired news items and/or selection of

advertisements. This information would appear as electronic ink on the plastic

sheet. The user would be able to move between pages via a virtual button on the

e-page. Such a device could be a winner in the world's commuter markets and

could be the saviour of the publishers of broadsheet products that are not

commuter friendly.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Global Information Systems in the Publishing Domain 293

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Other mobile (m-commerce) applications through the classified sections could

also be considered in the future for Fairfax. For example, when consulting e-

news on a PDA, an e-customer might see an advertisement for a Coca-Cola

drink. The customer could potentially be able click on the PDA and directly

complete a transaction with the closest Coca-Cola distributor. Telstra and Coca-

Cola enabled such kinds of transactions for customers using mobile phones to

connect to the Coca-Cola distributor in Central station (The Sydney Morning

Herald, 2001).

Using electronic ads that are buttons, timed or activated by the mouse roll over,

will enable the system providers, in this case publishers like Fairfax, to track who

views advertisements, how often, and for how long (Shepherd et al., 1997). Then

they can report the collected information to the advertiser. Fairfax could evaluate

the number of "hits" per advertisement and forward them to advertisers. It can

also be useful to assess which type of advertising is the most effective.

Conclusion

E-publishing is a fast growing variation on an old industry, not just in Australia

but also in many parts of the world, and Fairfax has the advantage of being a

mature gatherer, assembler, and disseminator of news and advertisements.

Fairfax also has the advantage of being able to leverage the content of the

conventional printed product to supplement its online presence, both in editorial

and advertising content. Deals are done where advertisers are able to buy

advertising in both newsprint and online, thereby accessing a much wider

audience or circulation.

Fairfax must recognize that the customer demographic is changing as a result of

the Internet and World Wide Web, and those consumers are more and more time-

poor. Unless the business can agilely reposition itself and embrace the features

of the online world, the competition, which is no longer just the other newspaper in

town but any publisher on the Web, will soon take the readers and advertisers away.

The customer is now in the driver's seat more than ever before. Fairfax must be

sensitive of the customer's needs and ensure that the customer's experience of

Fairfax's online presence is as good as it possibly can be. The online distractions

coupled with the time-poor audience is a challenge for any e-publisher but it is

also an opportunity to solidify relationships with customers and attract new ones.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !294 Payne & Unhelkar

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

References

Best, R.J. (2000). Market-based management. Pearson Education.

Crowe, D. (1999, May 12). Net gets a slice of the action. The Australian

Financial Review, p. 15

Deitel, H.M., Deitel, P.J., & Nieto, T.R. (2001). E-business & e-commerce:

How to program. Prentice Hall.

Deitel, Deitel, & Steinbuhler (2001). E-business & e-commerce for manager.

NJ: Prentice Hall.

Elderkin, K.W. (1996). The future of the newspaper industry. Elderkin

Associates.

Frawley, A. (2001). Evolving to eCRM. Xer Publishing, March.

Gates, B. (1999). Business @ the speed of thought: Using a digital nervous

system. Viking.

Hornery, A. (2000, August 4). Rushed lives gnaw at newspaper sales. Sydney

Morning Herald.

Pedley, P. (2000). Copyright for library and information service profession-

als (2nd ed.). London: Aslib.

Shepherd, M.A., Watters, C.R., & Burkowski, F.J. (1997). Electronic publish-

ing: applications and implications. NJ: Logan & Gluck.

Stewart A., & Eugene, C. (2001). eMarketing @Internet (2nd ed.). Australia:

Pearson Education.

Telstra muscling on the money system (2001, April 11). Sydney Morning

Herald. [Electronic version]. Retrieved from http://www.

newsstore.f2.com.au

Thompson, A.A., & Strickland, A.J. (2001). Strategic management: Concept

and cases (12th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill/Irwin.

Unhelkar, B. (2003a, October 1-3). Critical issues in modeling WSDLs with UML.

Proceedings of the OASIS Open Standards Conference, Sydney, Australia.

Unhelkar, B. (2003b, November 23-24). Understanding Collaborations and

Clusters in the e-Business World. Proceedings of the We-B Conference

with Edith Cowan University, Perth, Australia.

Endnotes

1

Returns are the number of unsold papers from a given publication date.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !About the Authors 295

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

About the Authors

Yi-chen Lan is a senior lecturer in the School of Computing and IT, the

University of Western Sydney, Australia. Dr. Lan holds a Bachelor's of

Commerce in computing and information systems (Honours) degree and a PhD

from the University of Western Sydney in the area of global transitions. Dr. Lan

teaches information systems and management courses in both undergraduate

and graduate levels. Prior to his current academic work, Dr. Lan worked in the

industry for five years, when he held senior management responsibilities in the

areas of information systems and quality assurance programs in a multinational

organisation. His main areas of research include global transition process, global

information systems management issues, globalisation framework development,

integrated supply chain development, and heath-related information systems

development and management.

* * *

Alexander Anisimov is completing his PhD in mathematics and computing at

the Ural State Technical University, Russia. He received an MSc in economics

and finance from the Ural State Technical University. His chapter is based on

his dissertation, which is focused on different managerial and organizational

aspects of data warehousing and development of decision support systems. His

research is based, to a significant extent, on his work at the Uralmashplant JSC

heavy-machinery company, where he worked as a manager and analyst respon-

sible for planning and analytical work in different spheres.

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !296 About the Authors

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Kallol Bagchi is an assistant professor of information and decision sciences at

the University of Texas at El Paso (USA). He received his PhD in information

systems from the Florida Atlantic University. Prior to pursuing his IS doctorate,

he earned a PhD in computer science from India. He has worked in both industry

and academia and has published in both areas. His current research interests

include IT adoption and diffusion, global IT, and electronic commerce. To

contact: [email protected]

Parthasarathi Banerjee, currently with the National Institute of Science,

Technology & Development Studies (NISTADS) in New Delhi, India, has been

with several other universities/research organizations abroad and is currently a

visiting professor to a few well-known management institutes. His research

interest is in the areas of strategy, technological change, IT based changes, and

related aspects of IT/IS. Dr. Banerjee has written several papers, eight books,

and several research reports, and has organized several conferences and

seminars. His forthcoming book is titled Indian Software Strategy (2004,

London: Palgrave-Macmillan).

Dipl. Vanessa Caisan is an MBA student at Purdue University/German

International School of Management and Administration (USA). Prior to joining

this MBA, Dipl. Caisan studied business administration and pursued a career in

banking and finance for about seven years.

Sokkien Leeane Chhai is currently a master honours student at the School of

Computing and Information Technology at the University of Western Sydney,

Australia. Chhai's key research area is investigating dynamic decision making

in a global organisation through the multi-agent systems approach. Leeane is

currently working as an IT administrator. She holds a bachelor's and master's

degree in computing from the same university. Chhai published a paper in the

Global Information Technology Management Association World Conference in

June 2004.

Thomas Hegel Gunther was born and raised in Sao Paulo, Brazil, and he

earned his diploma as a mechanical engineer at the Technical University of

Munich in Germany. After working for four years in the automotive industry, he

received his MBA from Purdue University's Krannert School of Management/

GISMA Business School in West Lafayette, Indiana (USA), and Hannover,

Germany. He currently lives in Braunschweig, Germany, with his wife.

Lisa Bari Herwick was born and raised in Northern California. She earned her

bachelor's degree at the University of California, Berkeley, in cognitive science.

After graduating she worked at a high-tech public relations firm before moving

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !About the Authors 297

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

to Germany to teach English. In 2004 she received her MBA from Purdue

University's Krannert School of Management/GISMA Business School in West

Lafayette, Indiana (USA), and Hannover, Germany. She lives in Bavaria with

her husband.

Sherif Kamel is an associate professor of management information systems and

the director of the Institute of Management Development at the School of

Business, Economics and Communication of The American University in Cairo,

Egypt. From 1992 to 2001 he was the director of the Regional IT Institute, and

from 1987 to 1992 he worked at the Cabinet of Egypt Information and Decision

Support Centre. He designs and delivers professional development programs in

information technology management and applications for public and private

sector organizations and has formulated many training alliances and partnerships

between organizations in Africa, Asia, the Middle East, and Europe. In 1996 he

was one of the co-founding members of the Internet Society of Egypt. He has

published many articles in IT transfer to developing countries, electronic

commerce, and human resources development and decision support applica-

tions. He is the editor-in-chief of the International Journal of Mobile

Computing and Commerce and associate editor of the Annals of Cases on

Information Technology Applications and Management in Organizations

as well as serving on the editorial and review boards of a number of information

systems and management journals. He is the director of communications of the

Information Resources Management Association. Kamel is a graduate of the

London School of Economics and Political Science and The American University

in Cairo.

Toma Kern was born 1964 in Ljubljana, the capital of the Republic of Slovenia.

He is married and is the father of two teenage children. He graduated from the

University of Ljubljana, faculty of mechanical engineering, and continued studies

at the University of Maribor, Faculty of Organizational Sciences. He has a

master's degree in information sciences and a doctorate in organizational

sciences. He is a professor at the University of Maribor and researcher with the

Institute for Organization and Management. His specific research field is

business processes. His bibliography contains more than 140 items. He leads a

team of experts within the laboratory for process and project management and

was involved in more than 20 projects for Slovene and European companies and

institutions.

Andrzej Koszut is a graduate of the Warsaw School of Economics in Poland

with a specialization in finance and banking. His broad knowledge in accounting

was confirmed with an accounting certificate issued by the school. Koszut also

possessed his MBA from Purdue University's Krannert School of Management

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !298 About the Authors

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

(USA), made in cooperation with GISMA Business School in Hannover,

Germany. Koszut has participated in many trips across Europe and North

America.

Somnath Mukhopadhyay is an assistant professor in information and decision

sciences with the University of Texas at El Paso. His PhD thesis focused on

understanding geometry of different pattern classifiers like linear programming

(LP) and neural networks (NN). At Arizona State University he was a research

assistant to Professor Asim Roy. He was also a visiting research assistant in the

parallel distributed processing (PDP) group at Stanford University. He has more

than 15 years of consulting experience in quantitative modeling in various

industries such as airlines, hotel, thermal engineering, and telecommunications.

To contact: [email protected]

Christopher Payne has been working with IT and software development in the

publishing industry since 1979. He is currently the group software development

manager for John Fairfax Holdings Ltd., publishers of The Sydney Morning

Herald, The Melbourne AGE, and the Australian Financial Review. Payne's

technical career commenced with programming in Assembler and Pascal on

PDP-11s. He now manages a team of software developers who support and

enhance Fairfax's business systems, including e-commerce systems, financial

systems, circulation-distribution and subscription systems, and classified and

display advertising systems. Chris has a master's of science (computing) from

UTS and now lectures part-time at the University of Technology, Sydney, on

subjects associated with global information systems and Internet evolution.

Ramesh Pullamsetti is pursuing an MBA from Purdue University (USA). Prior

to joining the MBA program, he worked as corporate finance associate for two

years in one of the leading financial firms operating in the Hyderabad Stock

Exchange, India, and one year as an accountant at Standard Chartered bank.

While working as associate he earned his post-graduate diploma in information

technology from Manipal Academy. He has an undergraduate degree in com-

merce (Honours) from Osmania University, India.

Mahesh S. Raisinghani is a faculty member at the Graduate School of

Management, Texas Woman's University (USA), where he teaches MBA

courses in information systems. Dr. Raisinghani was the recipient of the 1999

UD Presidential Award and the 2001 King Haggar Award for excellence in

teaching, research, and service. His previous publications have appeared in

Information and Management, Information Resources Management Jour-

nal, Journal of Global IT Management, Journal of E-Commerce Research,

Information Strategy: An Executive's Journal, Journal of IT Theory and

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !About the Authors 299

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Applications, Enterprise Systems Journal, Journal of Computer Informa-

tion Systems, and International Journal of Information Management, among

others. He serves as an associate editor and on the editorial review board of

leading information systems/e-commerce journals and on the board of directors

of Sequoia, Inc. Dr. Raisinghani is included in the millennium edition of Who's

Who in the World, Who's Who Among America's Teachers, and Who's Who

in Information Technology.

Magdy K. Serour is a research fellow at the Centre for Object Technology

Applications and Research (COTAR) at the University of Technology, Sydney

(UTS) (Australia). He is the co-founder of SB the Software Group Pty Ltd.

(1982) and has 25 years' experience in information technology, being signifi-

cantly involved in object technology adoption, requirement engineering, model-

ing, implementation, and IT consulting. Serour's current interests are in organi-

zational transition, e-transformation, agile methodologies, software process

reengineering, and software process improvement and capability determination

for object oriented/component based software development (OOSPICE). Serour

is also a member of the University of Western Sydney (UWS) Research Group.

Magdy has a Bachelor's of Accounting (Cairo University), G. Dip in computing

(ICL, Lon), Dip in computing (Control Data, Sydney), Master's of Computing

(UWS, Sydney), and PhD (UTS, Sydney) in the area of migration to object

oriented technology.

Andrew S. Targowski is a professor of computer information systems at

Western Michigan University (USA) and chairman of the advisory council of the

Information Resource Management Association. He published one of the first

books on enterprise systems architecture, The Architecture and Planning of

Enterprise-wide IM Systems, in 1990, along with one on information infrastruc-

tures, Global Information Infrastructure, in 1996, Enterprise Information

Infrastructure in 1999, and Electronic Enterprise in 2003. He is a pioneer of

the information superhighway concept (INFOSTRADA, Poland 1972), and he

developed an award-winning digital city Web site (www.telecity.org) for

Kalamazoo in 1997.

Jenny Teoh works as an analyst in the area of emerging technologies and

innovation in a large Australian bank. Jenny has a BSc (business information

technology) from the University of New South Wales and was a UNSW co-op

scholar (1999 to 2002). She is a member of the Association of Professional

Engineers, Scientists and Managers, Australia.

Bhuvan Unhelkar (PhD, FACS) is an internationally known expert in the field

of software modeling and processes with four books and numerous papers to his

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !300 About the Authors

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

credit. He brings a unique blend of industrial consulting and robust research

together. His interests are mobile technologies, Web services, and socio-cultural

perspectives in ICT. For further details, please visit www.unhelkar.com.

Khimji Vaghjiani is a senior manager at a large Australian bank. Vaghjiani

manages the emerging technologies and innovations function, and he is also an

industry director of the Collaborative Research Centre for Smart Internet

Technology (CRC-SIT). Vaghjiani managed a venture accelerator group post

tech-wreck for two years and is the founder and president of the Indus

Entrepreneurs, Sydney chapter, a Silicon Valley networking organisation. Khimji

holds a BEng (Honours) and MBA, and a Master's of Science and Technology

Commercialisation, and is currently studying for his PhD in innovation.

An Wang is an MBA student at Gisma Business School (Germany)/Krannert

Graduate School of Management, Purdue University (USA) with the scholarship

of honour. From 1998 to 2002, she studied at Tianjin Polytechnic University and

was on dean's list for all four years. After receiving a bachelor's degree of

management in management information systems, she worked in Tsinghua

Tongfang (THTF) Co., Ltd. (Beijing, China), one of the most famous high-tech

companies in China, before she went abroad for further education.

Ahmed Zyada is an information technology officer at the Regional IT Institute,

one of Egypt's leading professional development organizations focusing on

executive degree and non-degree programs. In 2002 he was awarded a master's

degree in business information technology from Middlesex University. Zyada

has participated in many research projects in information technology and

knowledge science. He is a graduate of Middlesex University (UK) and Cairo

University (Egypt).

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Index 301

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

Index

Symbols

3G wireless systems 234

A

accountability 61

accounting information systems 151

adoption 43

age of cybernetics 4

alliances 94

analytical model 159

automated processing 157

automated product ordering 221

automation 177

automotive industry 240, 247

B

B2B 172, 247

B2C 172

banking 170

benchmark model 204

Bluetooth 217

broadband wireless technology 235

business alliance formation 183

business alliances 186

business cycle 195

business expansion 53

business goals 116

business intelligence 114, 242

business process improvement 30

business process reengineering

30, 79

business processes

28, 59, 67, 241, 265

business system 29

business transactions 67, 87, 172,

220

buy-side model 243

C

calibration error 207

capability evaluation 183, 185

capital expenditure 72

change management 184, 285

cluster identification 183

cluster revenue models 183

cluster-based e-transformation 168,

181

collaborative usage 173

common object request broker archi-

tecture 103, 176

communication technologies 103

communications channels 51

comparative analysis reports 117

competition 79, 83

competitive advantage 141

competitiveness 138

computer virus 288

computer-aided system development

11

computer-based applications 115

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !302 Index

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

computer-based systems 120

computer-serviced society 4

conceptualization 195

core infrastructure 8

corporate business 59

cost effectiveness 53

cost-benefit analysis 58

critical risk factors 49

cross-cultural issues 110

cultural backgrounds 103

cultural changes 229

cultural problems 123

cultural significance 105

cultural values 101

culture 6, 51

customer relationship management

242, 266

customer service enhancement 97

customization of software 87

D

data layer 144

data mining 142, 145

data mining query language 142

data society 1

data transformation 157

data warehouse development 160

data warehouses 149

data warehousing 159

database-oriented DSS 118

decision layer 144

decision making authority 125

decision support systems 114

decision support tools 150

decision-making culture 154

decision-making process 196

deployment dynamics 72

diffusion 43

diffusion stage 61

digital nervous system 266

disaster recovery plan 137

distributed component object model

176

distributed computing object model

103

dynamic decision making 135

E

e-auction 241

e-business 61

e-business alliances 94

e-business strategy 241

e-catalog order processing 241

e-cluster design 184

e-commerce 46, 243

e-marketplaces 243

e-news site 272

e-procurement 243

e-publishing 267

e-readers 273

e-transformation 182

economic environment 115

economic indicators 197

eCRM 272

efficiency 150

efficiency of the business system 29

Egypt 114

electronic business 95, 110

electronic data interchange 172

electronic inquiries 88

electronic transformation 169

enhanced sustainability 214

enterprise mobility 217

enterprise-wide information systems

152

ERP i 86

eXtensible Mark-up Language (XML)

142

external information sources 153

F

financial performance 137

forces of change 2

foundational infrastructures 8

G

generalization 207

global business environment 27

global economy 1, 43

global environmental threats 2

global information environment 164

global information systems 95, 150,

265

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Index 303

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

global models 131

global open society 18

global organisation model 132

global project management 266

globalization 28, 42, 83

globalization process 167

globalizing 2

government 170

government regulations 181

grouping 33

groupware 51

H

health care 170

horizontal alliance 277

human and technical resources 125

human capacity 252

human culture 44

human entity 6

human interface 115

human intervention 167

I

ICT-based globalization 180

immediacy of action 221

Indian economy 67

indicators of the information society 1

industrial process reengineering 170

information and communication

technologies 113, 168, 267

information environment 156

information flows 158

information infrastructure 114

information requirements analysis 161

information society 1

information technology (IT) adoption

197

information technology tools 121

information wave 1

information-based applications 227

information-based learning 69

informational learning 87

informationware 172

informative business 171

informative society 11

informed society 8, 15

integrational infrastructures 8

intelligent agents 131, 144

inter-networked computing 106

inter-organizational collaborations 103

interactive 236

intermingled processes 31

international organisation model 132

internationalization 43

Internet growth 193

Internet-based technologies 42

intra-organizational collaboration 103

investment strategies 137

IT growth 198

J

just-in-time 61

K

key success factors 58

knowledge building 183, 186, 287

knowledge capitalization 96

knowledge repository 114

knowledge sharing 96

knowledge society 3, 16

knowledge workers 118

knowledge-based subsystem 118

L

learning societies 3

learning society 17

M

maintainability 53

management department 140

management information systems 150

managerial analysis 154

manufacturing 91

manufacturing competence 79

manufacturing intelligence 73

manufacturing marketing interface 81

market expansion 97

marketing 91

marketing department 140

mass media society 14

mathematical tools 159

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !304 Index

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

maturity stages 43

memorization 207

mobile devices 217, 227

mobile information technology 194

mobile society 215

mobile technologies 214

mobility 174

model-generating process 201

model-oriented-DSS 118

models of Internet use 211

monitoring systems 113

multi-skilling 72

multi-tasking 72

multinational organisation model 131

N

national information system 4

natural languages 161

networked society 12

neural networks 144

O

occupational health and safety 229

online analytical processing 151

online negotiations 251

operative usage 173

organizational culture 44, 47

organizational efficiency 28

organizational structure 52

organizational transformation 42

outsourcing 97

P

patterns of mobility 229

performance measurement 66

performance measurement system 80

Personal Smart Client Application 170

politics 10

process organization 40

procurement 240

product development 251

product differentiation 221

productivity 66

profitability 138

programming for Web sites 95

project and resource management 285

public administration 114

publishing 265

Q

quality-driven transactions 66

quantitative framework 195

quantitative planning models 193

R

real time enterprise 215

recruitment of employees 138

reengineering 30, 103

reliability of service 61, 223

remote communication 234

repository 39

resource generalization 39

risk management 285

risks 291

robotized society 16

S

sales department 140

sales force automatio 221

scalable architecture 282

security 137, 285

security problem 288

segmentation of workers 229

self-sustainable society 1

simulated management games 135

socio-cultural 94

sociological 95

software applications 180

software availability 123

software developers 58

software engineers 42

speed of delivery 223

spreadsheet 119

SQL database 285

standardization 177

standards 137, 183, 217

statistical techniques 197

strategic alliances 110

strategic deployment of IT 83

strategic IT plan 137

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Index 305

Copyright © 2005, Idea Group Inc. Copying or distributing in print or electronic forms without written

permission of Idea Group Inc. is prohibited.

strategic planning 49

strategy development 114

structured data storages 157

structuring 33

supply chain management 242, 266

support teams 61

system analysis 159

system's flexibility 39

T

tariff structure 123

tax benefit 97

technologists 168

technology layer 144

technotronic society 4

telecommunications 198

telecommunications providers 170

telecommunications services provider

236

telematic society 4

text-based database 142

text-oriented DSS 118

training 72

transaction processing applications

115

transaction processing system 123

transaction software 252

transactional interfacing 74

transactionware 172

transference 29

transforming organizations 49

transnational organisation model 132

U

Unified Modeling Language (UML) 281

user interaction 220

V

vertical alliances 275

virtual society 15

virtual teams 278

Volkswagen 251

W

Web services 167, 175

Web technologies 46

wireless local area network 231

wireless technology 237

work culture 51

worker productivity 69

written communications 107

X

XML/SOAP protocol 177

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !BO O K CH A P T E R S

JO U R N A L AR T I C L E S

CO N F E R E N C E PR O C E E D I N G S

CA S E ST U D I E S

The InfoSci-Online database is the

most comprehensive collection of

full-text literature published by

Idea Group, Inc. in:

n Distance Learning

n Knowledge Management

n Global Information Technology

n Data Mining & Warehousing

n E-Commerce & E-Government

n IT Engineering & Modeling

n Human Side of IT

n Multimedia Networking

n IT Virtual Organizations

BENEFITS

n Instant Access

n Full-Text

n Affordable

n Continuously Updated

n Advanced Searching Capabilities

The Bottom Line: With easy

to use access to solid, current

and in-demand information,

InfoSci-Online, reasonably

priced, is recommended for

academic libraries.

- Excerpted with permission from

Library Journal, July 2003 Issue, Page 140

"

"

Start exploring at

www.infosci-online.com

Recommend to your Library Today!

Complimentary 30-Day Trial Access Available!

InfoSci-Online

Instant access to the latest offerings of Idea Group, Inc. in the fields of

INFORMATION SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT !

Database

InfoSci-Online

Database

A product of:

Information Science Publishing*

Enhancing knowledge through information science

*A company of Idea Group, Inc.

www.idea-group.com

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !Idea Group

REFERENCE

Edited by: John Wang,

Montclair State University, USA

Two-Volume Set • April 2005 • 1700 pp

ISBN: 1-59140-557-2; US $495.00 h/c

Pre-Publication Price: US $425.00*

*Pre-pub price is good through one month

after the publication date

Provides a comprehensive, critical and descriptive exami-

nation of concepts, issues, trends, and challenges in this

rapidly expanding field of data warehousing and mining

A single source of knowledge and latest discoveries in the

field, consisting of more than 350 contributors from 32

countries

Offers in-depth coverage of evolutions, theories,method-

ologies, functionalities, and applications of DWM in such

interdisciplinary industries as healthcare informatics, artifi-

cial intelligence, financial modeling, and applied statistics

Supplies over 1,300 terms and definitions, and more than

3,200 references

New Releases from Idea Group Reference

Idea Group Reference is pleased to offer complimentary access to the electronic version

for the life of edition when your library purchases a print copy of an encyclopedia

For a complete catalog of our new & upcoming encyclopedias, please contact:

701 E. Chocolate Ave., Suite 200 • Hershey PA 17033, USA • 1-866-342-6657 (toll free) • [email protected]

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF

DISTANCE LEARNING

April 2005 • 650 pp

ISBN: 1-59140-560-2; US $275.00 h/c

Pre-Publication Price: US $235.00*

*Pre-publication price good through

one month after publication date

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF

MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGY

AND NETWORKING

April 2005 • 650 pp

ISBN: 1-59140-561-0; US $275.00 h/c

Pre-Publication Price: US $235.00*

*Pre-pub price is good through

one month after publication date

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF

INFORMATION SCIENCE

AND TECHNOLOGY

AVAILABLE NOW!

Five-Volume Set • January 2005 • 3807 pp

ISBN: 1-59140-553-X; US $1125.00 h/c

More than 450 international contributors provide exten-

sive coverage of topics such as workforce training,

accessing education, digital divide, and the evolution of

distance and online education into a multibillion dollar

Offers over 3,000 terms and definitions and more than

6,000 references in the field of distance learning

Excellent source of comprehensive knowledge and liter-

ature on the topic of distance learning programs

Provides the most comprehensive coverage of the issues,

concepts, trends, and technologies of distance learning

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF

DATABASE TECHNOLOGIES

AND APPLICATIONS

Four-Volume Set • April 2005 • 2500+ pp

ISBN: 1-59140-555-6; US $995.00 h/c

Pre-Pub Price: US $850.00*

*Pre-pub price is good through one

month after the publication date

www.idea-group-ref.com

The Premier Reference Source for Information Science and Technology Research

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF

DATA WAREHOUSING

AND MINING

TEAM LinG - Live, Informative, Non-cost and Genuine !

Bạn đang đọc truyện trên: Truyen2U.Com

Tags: #group#idea